News EPLAN 20 en US - Rittbuleplan.rittbul.bg/fileadmin/dateien-BG/NEWS/News_EPLAN_20_en_US.… ·...

EPLAN NEWS for Version 2.0

Copyright © 2010 EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG

EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG assumes no liability for either technical or printing errors, or for deficiencies in this technical information and cannot be held liable for damages that may result directly or indirectly from the delivery, performance, and use of this material.

This document contains legally protected proprietary information that is subject to copyright. All rights are protected. This document or parts of this document may not be copied or reproduced by any other means without the prior consent of EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG.

The software described in this document is subject to a licensing agreement. The use and reproduc-tion of the software is only permitted within the framework of this agreement.

RITTAL® is a registered trademark of Rittal GmbH & Co. KG.

EPLAN®, EPLAN Electric P8®, EPLAN Fluid®, EPLAN PPE®, and EPLAN Cabinet® are registered trademarks of EPLAN Software & Service GmbH & Co. KG.

Windows NT®, Windows 2000®, Windows XP®, Windows Vista®, Microsoft Windows®, Microsoft® Excel®, Microsoft® Access®, and Notepad® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

PC WORX®, CLIP PROJECT®, and INTERBUS® are registered trademarks of Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co.

AutoCAD® and AutoCAD Inventor® are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

STEP 7®, SIMATIC® and SIMATIC HW Konfig.® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.

InstallShield® is a registered trademark of InstallShield, Inc.

Adobe® Reader® and Adobe® Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.

TwinCAT® is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH.

Unity Pro® is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

RSLogix 5000® and RSLogix Architect® are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation.

All other product names and trade names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

EPLAN uses the Open Source software 7-Zip (7za.dll), Copyright © by Igor Pavlov. The source code of 7-Zip is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The source code of 7-Zip and details on this license can be found on the following Web site: http://www.7-zip.org

EPLAN uses the Open Source software Open CASCADE, Copyright © by Open CASCADE S.A.S. The source code of Open CASCADE is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License. The source code of Open CASCADE and details on this license can be found on the following Web site: http://www.opencascade.org

Table of Contents

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 3

Table of Contents

Preface ................................................................................................................. 15

Notes for the reader ........................................................................................... 16

More User-friendly Interface .............................................................. 18

New Icons with Greater Color Depth ................................................................. 18

Faster Access via New Mini Toolbars ............................................................... 19

New Repeat Action Menu Option ...................................................................... 20

Adjustable Display in the Title Bar .................................................................... 21

Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the Properties Dialog ...................... 22

New Functionalities for Graphical Elements .................................... 24

New Editing Functionalities ............................................................................... 24

Trimming graphical elements ............................................................................. 24

Cutting off elements ........................................................................................... 25

Changing lengths of lines and arcs .................................................................... 26

Filleting / chamfering corners ............................................................................. 27

Drawing a Rectangle through Center ................................................................ 29

Drawing Assistance with Perpendicular and Tangential Points ..................... 30

Perpendicular and tangential points ................................................................... 30

Perpendicular or tangential mode when drawing ............................................... 31

Drawing perpendicular or tangential lines .......................................................... 31

Defining a radius through a tangential point ....................................................... 32

Line projection ................................................................................................... 32

Input Box for Editors .......................................................................................... 33

Using the input box ............................................................................................ 34

Functions with input-box support ....................................................................... 35

Activating the input box ...................................................................................... 35

Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes ................................................. 37

Elliptical Text Boxes ........................................................................................... 38

Elliptical Alignment Boxes and Leader Lines .................................................. 39

New Features in Dimensioning .......................................................... 41

New Project-wide Settings for Dimensioning ................................................... 41

New Settings in the Properties Dialog .............................................................. 45

New Features in the Page Navigator ................................................. 47

Page Filter with Schemes ................................................................................... 47

Specifying page filters via default filter ............................................................... 47

Table of Contents

4 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Specifying page filters via detailed selection ...................................................... 48

Selection in the Page List Takes Place when Scrolling Pages ....................... 49

Automatic Page Names when Inserting Pages or Macros .............................. 49

Customizing the Displayed DT for Location Boxes when Inserting Pages or Macros ................................................................................................. 50

Determining Number of Pages / Page Name per Property .............................. 51

Using Terminals .................................................................................. 53

Using Main Terminals ......................................................................................... 53

Managing terminal strips .................................................................................... 55

Managing terminal strips as in the previous versions......................................... 55

Definition of multi-level terminals ....................................................................... 55

Converting older projects and macros ............................................................... 57

Terminal Strip and Terminal Accessories ........................................................ 58

Defining alignable accessories for terminals ...................................................... 58

New Features in Editing Terminal Strips .......................................................... 60

Assigning alignable accessories when editing terminal strips ............................ 60

Information about terminal connection points .................................................... 62

Generating saddle jumpers manually................................................................. 62

External / internal saddle jumpers ...................................................................... 63

New Features in the Terminal Strip Navigator ................................................. 64

Display in the navigator ...................................................................................... 64

Generating new terminals .................................................................................. 64

Sorting terminals of a terminal strip ................................................................... 65

New Function Definitions for Terminals ........................................................... 65

New properties for characterizing terminals ....................................................... 66

Online Numbering of Terminal Sort Codes ...................................................... 66

Online numbering of terminal and pin designations ........................................... 67

Extended Reports for Terminals ....................................................................... 68

Output terminal connection point in addition to target ........................................ 68

Terminal report generation in relation to connection points or targets ............... 68

Optimized Database Structure for Projects ...................................... 69

Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin ............................ 71

PDF Export in Archiving Format ........................................................ 72

Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists ........................ 73

Managing Accessory Parts in Parts Management ........................................... 73

Clear identification of parts as accessories ........................................................ 73

Displaying accessory parts in parts management .............................................. 74

Table of Contents

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 5

Using accessory lists ......................................................................................... 76

Assigning accessories to a main part ................................................................. 77

Data transfer on update of the parts database ................................................... 78

Accessory Parts in Device Selection ................................................................ 79

Changes in the "Device selection" Dialog .......................................................... 80

Selecting accessories ........................................................................................ 81

Check Run for Missing, Required Accessory Parts ......................................... 83

Changes to the Device Selection Settings ....................................................... 83

New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On ....................................................... 86

Protected Devices ............................................................................... 89

Assigning Protection .......................................................................................... 90

Protecting functions or connections ................................................................... 90

Protecting devices.............................................................................................. 91

Removing device protection ............................................................................... 92

Using Protected Devices .................................................................................... 93

Creating macros / copies of protected devices .................................................. 93

Deleting functions .............................................................................................. 93

Using existing functions / assigning functions .................................................... 94

Actions in the graphical editor ............................................................................ 94

Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function ...................... 94

Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on ... 97

Defining Multi-line Connections on a Single-line Connection Point .............. 98

Defined multi-line connections in the connection navigator ............................. 101

New messages for defined multi-line connections ........................................... 101

Graphical Device Tag List ................................................................ 102

Simple Graphical Device Tag Lists ................................................................. 102

Customizing forms for device tag lists .............................................................. 103

Specifying settings ........................................................................................... 104

Jumping to the schematic ................................................................................ 105

Graphical Device Tag Lists with Overviews ................................................... 105

Symbols for display in reports .......................................................................... 106

Data for reports ................................................................................................ 107

Conditional forms ............................................................................................. 108

Symbols for Complex Devices ......................................................... 113

New Device Connection Points ....................................................................... 114

Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template........................................ 117

Table of Contents

6 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on ............................................................................................... 118

Improved Views in the PLC Navigator ............................................................ 119

Channel display in the PLC navigator .............................................................. 120

Inserting PLC Cards ......................................................................................... 123

Macro Placement .............................................................................................. 123

Assigning Functions ........................................................................................ 124

Taking account of the representation type ....................................................... 125

Using existing PLC connection points blockwise ............................................. 126

New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module ........................................ 127

Nets with Net-based Connections ................................................................... 129

Defining net-based connections ....................................................................... 130

Disabling target specification of connection symbols ....................................... 132

Specifying Nets with Net-based Connections ................................................ 133

Inserting net definition points ........................................................................... 133

Defining daisy chains ....................................................................................... 135

Displaying Nets and Net-based Connections ................................................. 138

Net-based connections in the connections navigator ....................................... 138

Displaying nets in the potential navigator ......................................................... 138

Highlighting nets .............................................................................................. 140

Editing Nets with Net-based Connections ...................................................... 141

Connecting nets ............................................................................................... 141

Modifying nets .................................................................................................. 142

Net-based connection reports .......................................................................... 143

Correcting connections .................................................................................... 144

New messages for net-based connections ...................................................... 145

New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration .......................... 146

EPLAN EMI Add-ons ......................................................................................... 146

Importing Mechanical Data .............................................................................. 147

Mechatronics Navigator ................................................................................... 147

Recognizing assignment status ....................................................................... 149

New filtering options in the navigator ............................................................... 149

Updating the mechanical model ....................................................................... 150

Assigning data ................................................................................................. 151

Transfering data to Inventor ............................................................................. 151

Inserting a device tag into Inventor drawings ................................................... 152

Creating and reading information ..................................................................... 153

Calculating the connection length .................................................................... 153

Table of Contents

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 7

Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI ........................................................... 154

Settings for EPLAN EMI ................................................................................... 154

Addition for length calculation .......................................................................... 154

New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal ......................................... 156

Unique Part ID for Parts in the EPLAN Data Portal ........................................ 158

Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal................................................................. 159

Integration into the EPLAN platform ................................................................ 159

New Features in Device Numbering ................................................ 161

Subcounters in Offline Device Numbering ..................................................... 161

New Numbering Formats for Busbars ............................................................ 163

Safety-relevant Functions ................................................................ 164

Connections and Connection Numbering ....................................... 166

Applying Predefined Values for Connection Colors and Cross-section / Diameter ............................................................................................................ 166

Determining Connection Sources and Targets .............................................. 168

Aligning Connection Definition Point Placements with Each Other ............ 169

Resetting the Counter for Connection Numbering per Structure / Page ..... 171

Defining the counter reset range ...................................................................... 173

Numbering Card Power Supplies and Bus Cables with General Connection Numbering .................................................................................... 173

Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform ........................ 175

Optimizing Performance by the Use of Modern Processors ......................... 175

Use of multi-core processors ........................................................................... 175

Use of more updated processors ..................................................................... 175

Project Editing .................................................................................................. 176

New projects with current creation date and creator ........................................ 176

Automatic data format checking ....................................................................... 178

EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN Data Import ................................................................... 179

Symbol library sequence in the settings ........................................................... 179

EPLAN 21 Data Import ...................................................................................... 180

Including net-based connections ..................................................................... 180

Inherit black box structures to interruption points ............................................. 180

Data Backup ...................................................................................................... 181

Distribution of directory information during data backup .................................. 181

Extended PDF and DXF / DWG Export of Pages ............................................ 186

Saving PDF settings as a scheme ................................................................... 187

New user-specific settings for export ............................................................... 188

Table of Contents

8 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

PDF export with linked documents................................................................... 192

Exporting pages in PDF format ........................................................................ 192

Outputting 3D models in the PDF export ......................................................... 194

Finding and Replacing ..................................................................................... 195

Jumping forwards and backwards in the jump sequence of cross- referenced functions ........................................................................................ 195

Go to part assemblies ...................................................................................... 196

Including objects in the layout space in the search .......................................... 197

Influencing the Value and Unit Display ........................................................... 198

New display properties ..................................................................................... 198

Using the new display properties ..................................................................... 201

New project setting for output of the unit .......................................................... 203

Enhancements to the EPLAN API ................................................................... 203

Graphical Editor ................................................................................................ 204

Rapid opening of page properties .................................................................... 204

Extending the search for path function text ...................................................... 204

Setting the displayed language of multilingual texts blockwise using actions .. 205

Multilingual texts for designation of hyperlinks ................................................. 206

Property texts for boxes when changing scale ................................................. 207

Plug DT and channel designation retained when moved ................................. 207

Expansion of special characters ...................................................................... 208

Devices .............................................................................................................. 209

Extension to user-defined property arrangement ............................................. 209

Changing the graphic of black boxes and similar components via the properties dialog .............................................................................................. 210

Properties dialog for bundle connection points ................................................ 211

Jump functions for location boxes .................................................................... 212

Plug DT for device connection points............................................................... 213

Considering part placements in global editing ................................................. 214

Adopting properties of the P&I diagram functions during synchronizing .......... 215

Assigning structure identifiers for part definition points .................................... 216

Allowing identical connection point designations for devices ........................... 217

Edit in Table ...................................................................................................... 218

Shortcut key to close edit in table .................................................................... 218

Project Data Navigators ................................................................................... 219

New jump functions in the connection navigator .............................................. 219

Placing macros ................................................................................................ 219

Placing all functions of a device ....................................................................... 221

Adjusting the column width .............................................................................. 221

Device group DT on associated devices .......................................................... 221

Table of Contents

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 9

Defined Devices ................................................................................................ 222

Taking account of macro variants .................................................................... 222

Representation types for unplaced functions ................................................... 222

Part Selection .................................................................................................... 224

Part selection with scheme selection ............................................................... 224

Do not show conflict dialog .............................................................................. 225

Modifications to part management during part selection .................................. 226

Symbol Editor ................................................................................................... 227

Reorganizing symbol libraries .......................................................................... 227

Displaying variants when paging in the symbol editor...................................... 227

Form Editor ....................................................................................................... 228

Combining overview reports ............................................................................ 228

Combining parts in enclosure legends ............................................................. 230

Conditional areas in dynamic forms ................................................................. 230

Suppressing blank data lines ........................................................................... 232

Renamed placeholder texts for the device tag list ........................................... 233

Outputting function data for the device tag list and symbol overview ............... 233

Regenerating headers without sorting ............................................................. 234

Outputting only connected connection points in connection diagrams ............. 234

Essential customization of user-defined connection diagram forms ................ 235

New placeholders for cable charts in terminal and plug diagrams ................... 236

Macros ............................................................................................................... 238

Description text for automatically generated page macros .............................. 238

Group macro boxes and associated objects .................................................... 238

Specifically assigning objects to macro boxes ................................................. 239

Placeholder Objects ......................................................................................... 240

Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects .............................. 240

New properties for placeholder objects ............................................................ 241

Simplified assignment ...................................................................................... 243

Reports .............................................................................................................. 244

Connection diagrams for wiring diagrams ........................................................ 244

Appending reports to the end ........................................................................... 248

Sorting cable overviews according to source and target .................................. 249

Using page structure identifiers for reports ...................................................... 250

Creating report templates ................................................................................ 250

Copying and pasting function-related embedded reports ................................. 250

Breaking up modules ....................................................................................... 251

Outputting part assemblies in labeling ............................................................. 252

Table of Contents

10 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Parts Management ............................................................................................ 253

Improved full-text filter ...................................................................................... 253

Additional selection option using the "Combination" tab .................................. 256

Creating subtrades for fluid power ................................................................... 256

Data field for the part number of an ERP system ............................................. 258

Entering barcodes for parts .............................................................................. 258

Clip-on height for placements on mounting rails .............................................. 259

Entering outline drawings in parts management .............................................. 261

New "Documents" tab ...................................................................................... 262

Assigning cables / connections to an image file ............................................... 263

Protecting data fields before updating .............................................................. 263

New synchronization of parts ........................................................................... 263

Updating parts when opening a project............................................................ 264

Additional menu items for the part master data navigator ................................ 265

Message Management ...................................................................................... 266

Improved ergonomics ...................................................................................... 266

New trade-specific filter settings ...................................................................... 267

New "Prevent errors" check type for error checking ......................................... 268

Setting option for module-specific checks ........................................................ 269

Separate filters for running error checking ....................................................... 269

New check run for checking the online numbering format ............................... 270

New Features in the "Revision Management" Add-on .................................. 271

Renamed revision control operation ................................................................ 271

Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics ................................................ 272

Project completion enhancement ..................................................................... 275

Generating a report when completing a project and pages .............................. 277

Numbering the revision index .......................................................................... 278

Differing graphical markers for change tracking ............................................... 281

Alternative properties comparison ................................................................... 283

Comparing the properties of projects ............................................................... 283

Displaying results of properties comparison .................................................... 286

New settings for the property comparison of projects ...................................... 289

Project-specific databases for the comparison results ..................................... 290

Deleting revision data of the property comparison ........................................... 291

Displaying deleted objects ............................................................................... 292

Layout spaces in revision control ..................................................................... 297

New Features in the "Multi Language Translation" Add-on .......................... 299

Distinguishing between source language and displayed language .................. 299

Upper-/lower-case letters for the source language .......................................... 301

Text-based line breaks in translations.............................................................. 302

Table of Contents

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 11

Changed translation behavior on input ............................................................ 304

Exporting the missing-word list based on the dictionary .................................. 305

New messages for the translation .................................................................... 306

New Features in the "User Rights Management" Add-on ............................. 307

Assigning new rights ........................................................................................ 307

New Features in the "Mounting Panel" Add-on ............................................. 308

A clearer view in the navigator ......................................................................... 308

Placing terminal strips on the mounting panel ................................................. 309

Displaying the handles of part placements ...................................................... 310

Same legend item for identical devices............................................................ 311

Settings .............................................................................................................. 311

New action for importing settings ..................................................................... 311

Preceding sign for interruption point names ..................................................... 313

New settings for displayed units of measure .................................................... 314

Renamed settings for graphical editing ............................................................ 315

Properties .......................................................................................................... 316

User-defined property configurations ............................................................... 316

Renamed project property ............................................................................... 317

New properties for device tags ........................................................................ 317

Other New Features in Utilities ........................................................................ 318

Extensions for automated editing ..................................................................... 318

Improved registration for add-ons .................................................................... 319

Improved display of system messages ............................................................ 320

Licensing ........................................................................................................... 321

Extensions to EPLAN License Manager .......................................................... 321

Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8 ................................................... 324

Terminals / Plugs .............................................................................................. 324

Terminal / pin and connection point descriptions ............................................. 324

Displaying saddle jumpers for "Interconnect devices" ...................................... 326

New Features in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on .................................... 328

Configurable PLC connection points ................................................................ 328

Channels with several I/O connection points ................................................... 329

Blockwise use of existing PLC connection points and PLC boxes ................... 330

Interface for PLC data exchange with Rockwell ............................................... 330

Simplified data display when importing PLC data ............................................ 331

Extended part allocation when exporting and importing bus configurations ..... 331

Cables ................................................................................................................ 332

Highlighting cable connections ........................................................................ 332

Ignoring subordinate DTs for nested targets .................................................... 333

Table of Contents

12 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Inserting insulated wire terminations ................................................................ 334

Devices .............................................................................................................. 337

Inserting cable parts as devices ....................................................................... 337

Device Selection ............................................................................................... 339

Device selection for wires ................................................................................ 339

Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel .................................................... 342

Navigators for the 3D Mounting Layout .......................................................... 342

Logical structure in the layout space navigator ................................................ 342

Devices displayed in the layout space navigator ............................................. 343

Project structure in the 3D mounting layout navigator ..................................... 345

Filters in the navigators .................................................................................... 346

Creating and Opening a Layout Space ........................................................... 348

Placing Mounting Panels and Enclosures ...................................................... 349

Placing mounting panels .................................................................................. 349

Placing free mounting panels ........................................................................... 351

Placing enclosures with mounting panels ........................................................ 352

Placing Components on Mounting Panels or Mounting Surfaces................ 354

Activating mounting surfaces / items automatically .......................................... 355

Activating mounting surfaces directly ............................................................... 355

Placing mounting rails and wire ducts .............................................................. 356

Inserting devices as defined devices ............................................................... 357

Defining locked areas ...................................................................................... 358

Changing the 3D View of the Layout Space ................................................... 359

Showing / hiding components from the layout space navigator ....................... 360

Showing / hiding individual components in the 3D view ................................... 361

Simplifying the object display ........................................................................... 361

Setting colors and / or transparency ................................................................ 362

Editing Objects in the Layout Space ............................................................... 363

Rotating objects about an axis ......................................................................... 363

Changing the length of objects in the layout space .......................................... 364

Measuring distances in the layout space ......................................................... 367

Displaying mounting clearances ...................................................................... 369

Macros for the 3D Mounting Layout ................................................................ 370

Importing a 3D graphic ..................................................................................... 370

Uniting objects in the layout space................................................................... 371

Managing 3D macros in the macro project ...................................................... 371

Creating 3D macros ......................................................................................... 372

Inserting 3D macros ......................................................................................... 373

Changing the rotation angle when inserting 3D macros................................... 373

Table of Contents

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 13

Editing the Device Logic .................................................................................. 374

Interactive points, lines, and areas in the device logic ..................................... 374

Defining the device logic .................................................................................. 375

Model Views for the 3D Mounting Layout ....................................................... 378

Inserting a model view ..................................................................................... 379

Updating the model view .................................................................................. 380

Modifying the contents of the model view ........................................................ 381

Outline Editor for Extrusions ........................................................................... 381

Creating outlines .............................................................................................. 382

Editing outlines ................................................................................................ 382

Importing and cleaning up outlines .................................................................. 383

Checking outlines............................................................................................. 384

Device Structure for Mechanical Devices ....................................................... 384

Online Numbering for Mechanical Devices .................................................... 385

Special Topics EPLAN PPE .............................................................. 386

Compressing and Reorganizing Projects ....................................................... 386

Redesigned Import of Loops and Consumers ............................................... 386

Including Parts from EPLAN PPE for Bills of Materials ................................. 389

New Identifier for Measurands without Supplementary Letters ................... 390

Labeling and Scripts for EPLAN PPE P&ID .................................................... 390

Special Topics EPLAN View ............................................................. 391

User Settings for Multi-user Operation ........................................................... 391

New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on ................................. 392

Direct Access to Parts Management Data ...................................................... 392

Access to Function Templates ........................................................................ 394

All Revision Control Functions are Available ................................................ 395

Other New Features in the EPLAN API ........................................................... 396

New Features in the Master Data ..................................................... 401

Enhanced Information in the Master Data Editor ........................................... 401

Master Data: Symbols ...................................................................................... 402

Master Data: Function Definition Library ........................................................ 433

Master Data: Plot Frames ................................................................................. 436

Master Data: Settings for Messages and Check Runs .................................. 437

Master Data: Identifiers .................................................................................... 437

Master Data: Projects and Templates ............................................................. 438

Master Data: Workspace .................................................................................. 438

Table of Contents

14 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Master Data: Schemes...................................................................................... 438

Other New Features and Information .............................................. 439

Customer Queries and Messages ................................................................... 439

Validation Code ................................................................................................. 442

Retrieving the validation code online ............................................................... 442

Installation and Subsequent Operation Steps ............................................... 444

Directory structure after installation ................................................................. 446

Automatically importing the settings of the previous version ............................ 448

Synchronization with original EPLAN master data ........................................... 449

Software Requirements and Approvals .......................................................... 454

General requirements ...................................................................................... 454

Client operating systems .................................................................................. 454

Server operating systems ................................................................................ 454

EPLAN Mechatronic Integration ....................................................................... 455

Database systems for parts management / selection ...................................... 455

Microsoft Office Excel versions ........................................................................ 456

Internet browsers for the EPLAN Data Portal .................................................. 456

Unsupported operating systems ...................................................................... 456

EPLAN software no longer supported .............................................................. 456

Other software no longer supported ................................................................ 457

Hardware Requirements ................................................................................... 457

Workstation hardware requirements ................................................................ 457

Recommended workstation configuration ........................................................ 458

Minimum net requirements .............................................................................. 458

Minimum multi-user requirements .................................................................... 458

Preface

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 15

Preface

Dear EPLAN users,

We are delighted to introduce the new EPLAN platform 2.0. The focus is

on practical orientation: this latest development contains well over 1,000

new features, many of them requested by customers. The result is an

EPLAN platform which has been optimized across the board to support

consistent, time-efficient, and cost-saving engineering and cross-discipli-

nary cooperation.

Focus on ergonomics: with a new dialog layout, advanced filtering tech-

niques, high-quality CAD functions, and redesigned toolbars, project

design is now even easier.

Focus on quality: device data from preplanning can now be protected

against unauthorized changes. This critical element for quality assurance

in engineering also complies with the requirements of the new Machinery

Directive (2006/42/EC). In addition, the new export format PDF/A sup-

ports additional requirements relating to the archiving of EPLAN project

documentation.

Focus on engineering: the new "Net Based Wiring" add-on can be used

to define detailed connections within a network at database level. It's an

ideal way of creating clear schematic layouts or simple daisy chains in

production. Keyword "mounting panel assemblies": these can now be de-

fined in 3D in electrical engineering and fluid power design and be inte-

grated directly into the EPLAN platform. The convenience of 3D – the

simplicity of 2D.

This News document highlights many additional features of the new

version. We wish you every success with the new EPLAN platform 2.0.

Your EPLAN Software & Service team

Preface

16 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Notes for the reader

Important information:

• Before installing the new version please read the information in "Other

New Features and Information" from page 439 onwards. In particular

please read "Software Requirements and Approvals" on page 454.

• Before opening old projects please read the information in "Optimized

Database Structure for Projects" on page 69.

• For reasons of space the printed version of the News does not cover

all topics exhaustively. The installation DVD includes a PDF of the

complete version of the News.

Before you begin reading, please note the following symbols and styles

used in this document:

Warning:

Text preceded by this symbol contains a warning; you should be abso-

lutely sure to read this warning before proceeding!

Note:

Text preceded by this image contains extra notes.

Example:

Examples are highlighted by this symbol.

Tip:

Useful tips to facilitate your interaction with the program are presented

after this image.

Preface

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 17

Administrator:

The text introduced by these pictograms contains important information

for the administrator. You must always read the sections marked with

pictograms before working with the new version (see pages 307 and

444).

Project editor:

The texts introduced by these pictograms contain important information

for the "normal" users working on projects. You must always read the

sections marked with pictograms before working with the new version

(see pages 53, 69, and 236). • User interface elements are marked in bold (and blue) so they can

immediately be located in the text.

• Italic text provides particularly important information that you should

definitely pay attention to.

• Code examples, directory names, and direct input (among other ele-ments) are displayed in a non-proportional font.

• Function keys, keyboard keys, and buttons within the program are

shown in square brackets (e.g., [F1] for the "F1" function key).

• To improve the flow of the text, we often use "menu paths" in this

document (for example, Help > Contents). In order to find a particular

program function, the menus and options shown in a menu path must

be selected in the sequence shown. For example, the menu path

mentioned above calls up the EPLAN help system.

• In combination with settings or fields (e.g., check boxes) which can

only be switched on or off, in this document we often use the term

"activate" (after which the setting is active ) and "deactivate" (after

which the setting is inactive ).

More User-friendly Interface

18 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


We have significantly changed the appearance of EPLAN in some areas

and made it more user-friendly for you. The changes include the follow-

ing new features:

• New icons with greater color depth

• Mini toolbars in the editors (see page 19)

• Repeat menu option in the editors' popup menus (see page 20)

• Adjustable display in the title bar (see page 21)

• Clearer Display and Format tabs in the properties dialog (see

page 22).

New Icons with Greater Color Depth

New, updated icons with a greater color depth are now used for toolbars,

for the cursor, and for the display of objects in the navigators and other

dialogs. The color depth with approx. 16.78 million colors now permits

detailed illustrations giving the user a very natural impression.

Benefit: The program functionalities assigned to the icons are clearly

recognizable, making use of the program via the icons sub-

stantially more intuitive. A decisive advantage, especially for

the occasional user, is the adjustment of the icons to the

Windows standard (same icons => same functionalities).

Example:

The following figure shows the "old" Standard toolbar for an opened

project.

And in comparison, here is the "new" Standard toolbar.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 19

Faster Access via New Mini Toolbars

There are now new mini toolbars when working in the editors (graphical

editor, symbol editor, etc.) for text and graphical elements.

Benefit: With the help of the mini toolbars you can edit text and

graphical elements fast and directly without having to

navigate through the main menu. If the Mini toolbars option is activated, a semi-transparent toolbar is dis-

played in miniature format when you check a corresponding individual

element. Move the cursor away from the checked element and the mini

toolbar disappears. If you place the cursor above the toolbar it becomes

fully visible and you can carry out the desired settings.

Example:

Mini toolbars let you select line settings options such as Line thickness

and Color and / or copy or apply a format to the selected line.

The mini toolbars give you access to the following functionalities:

• Text elements:

Font size, Font style, Copy format, Assign format, Color.

• Graphical elements:

Line type, Line thickness, Copy format, Assign format, Color.

You can decide in the Options menu whether to display mini toolbars or

not with the new Mini toolbars menu option or switch them on or off with

the new button in the View toolbar. The new "Mini toolbars on / off"

right has been incorporated into the rights management for this menu

option.


20 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The mini toolbars are displayed only when an individual element is se-

lected. If the selected element is blocked due to access to multiuser-

mode or if the project has been opened with write-protection (e.g. for a

filed project), the fields and symbols of the mini toolbars are grayed out.

Notes:

• Note that you can use either the Mini toolbars option or the Direct

editing option. Working with mini toolbars is activated by default. The

Mini toolbars option is switched off when you activate direct editing.

It is also possible to deactivate both options.

• If direct editing is activated temporarily, however, using [F2], then

both the mini toolbar and the direct editing box are visible. The re-

spective values in this field are checked and can be directly edited.

Click on the mini toolbar or on the page in the graphical editor to

deactivate "temporary" direct editing.

• You can set the degree of transparency of the mini toolbars using the

same settings as for the input boxes (Transparency level (without

focus) / Transparency level (with focus)). The menu path is as fol-

lows: Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Input box /

Mini toolbars.

New Repeat Action Menu Option

The popup menus of the different editors (graphical editor, symbol editor,

etc.) have been amended to include the Repeat menu option. You can

use this menu option to repeat the last action performed in the editor.

Benefit: The quick combination of two mouse clicks – one right-click

(to request the popup menu), one left-click (to select Repeat)

– enables users to repeat the last performed action as many

times as required. This enables you to greatly accelerate a

sequence of repeated actions.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 21

The Repeat menu option is always the first option in the popup menu

and the action to be repeated is displayed after the colon (e.g. Repeat:

Angle down, right). Undo, Undo list, Redo, Redo list, and Cancel

action can not be repeated. These actions are therefore not listed in the

Repeat menu option.

Adjustable Display in the Title Bar

EPLAN lets you define which information you wish to have displayed in

the title bar of your EPLAN application in addition to the program name.

Benefit: You can set the display in the title bar individually. You can

be kept fully informed about the current open project via the

optional display of a project path to prevent you from inadver-

tently editing the wrong project.

You can choose the settings in the new Display in title bar drop-down

list. The menu path to the corresponding settings dialog is: Options >

Settings > User > Display > User interface. You can choose between

the following options:

• Project path+Project+Page: If you select this option, the title bar

displays the project name with the file path and the page.

• Project+Page: If you select this option, the title bar displays only the

project name and page.

• Page: If you select this option, the title bar displays only the page.

In this case the name of the current open page is displayed in square brackets in the title bar (e.g. [=EB3+ET1/1]). If there is no page open in

the graphical editor, no page name will be displayed.


22 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the Properties Dialog

The Display and Format tabs for the properties dialogs of graphical

symbols and texts have been redesigned for the new version. All prop-

erties settings (Font size, Color, Border, etc.) are now shown in a new

table with a tree structure.

Benefit: All display or format settings are now clearly listed. These

properties settings are now quicker and easier to change.

If, for example, you have checked a property for a general device on the

left-hand side in the Component or Connection points tab, e.g. DT

(displayed), you can edit its display properties in the Property / Assign-

ment table on the right-hand side.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 23

To change the value assigned to a property, click in the corresponding

cell of the Assignment column and select another value from the drop-

down list using or select the relevant check box.

Since the different "Settings areas" such as Format, Border, Value /

unit or Position are displayed in the table as hierarchy levels, the sec-

ondary Border dialog for the device and the Language and Border tabs

for texts are now superfluous.

Under Format you can find display properties such as Font size, Layer,

Language, etc., and under Border you can find properties such as Draw

text box, Activate alignment box, etc. The new Value / unit area con-

tains properties for the display of values and units. The properties under

Position all relate to a main property.

New Functionalities for Graphical Elements

24 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


The following new functionalities are now available for editing and

drawing graphical elements in the editors (graphical editor, symbol

editor, etc.):

• Cut off (see page 25)

• Change length (see page 26)

• Fillet corners and Chamfer (see page 27)

• Rectangle through center (see page 29)

• New Perpendicular and Tangential snap points and modes for

drawing graphical elements (see page 30)

• Input box for editors (see page 33).

New Editing Functionalities

The four new functionalities, Cut off, Change length, Fillet corners,

and Chamfer have been added to the Edit menu together with the exist-

ing editing functionalities Rotate, Mirror, Scale, and Stretch under the

new Graphic menu option.

Benefit: The new editing functionalities enable the simple and rapid

change of graphical elements for the precise construction of

component contours and graphical macros.

Trimming graphical elements

Trim functionalities are tools which let you change the lengths of graphi-

cal elements retrospectively. The two trim functionalities Cut off and

Change length let you cut off, extend, or shorten graphical elements. It

is not possible to select multiple elements.

Nor can a group of graphical elements be trimmed. To trim an individual

element you first need to disable the grouping.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 25

Note:

Note that the trimming of graphical elements does not take into account

splines. Nor can you cut ellipses from splines and ellipses.

Cutting off elements

When cutting off, determine with a mouse click which part of a graphical

object is to be "cut off" (erased). The part to be removed can be defined

for a line as follows:

• Via one or two intersections

Beispiel:

A section is cut off at the tangential point.

�

• Via an intersection and an end point

Beispiel:

Several sections are cut off between the intersection and end points.

�

• Via two end or corner points.


26 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Cutting off sections is possible for the following elements:

• Line

• Polyline

• Polygon

• Rectangle

• Circle

• Arc

• Sector

• Ellipse.

Graphical elements comprising just a line and not intersecting with other

elements are fully erased.

To cut a section off a graphical object, select the Edit > Graphic > Cut

off menu option (or click on the (Cut off) button in the Edit graphic

toolbar). Click on the desired section of a line or a graphical object. The

selected section is removed. The trim functionality remains active until

you select Popup menu > Cancel action.

Changing lengths of lines and arcs

You can use the Change length functionality to extend or shorten lines

and arcs. One end of the element to be trimmed always remains un-

changed; the other end is moved to make the trimmed element shorter

or longer.

Example:

The end of a line is extended in the left-hand illustration and reduced in

the right-hand illustration.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 27

To change the length of a line or an arc, select the menu option Edit >

Graphic > Change length (or click in the Edit graphic toolbar on the

(Change length) button). Click on the end of the line to be changed. By

moving the cursor in a particular direction you extend or shorten the cor-

responding line. The trim functionality remains active until you select

Popup menu > Cancel action.

Tips:

• You can also open the input box when changing the length and ex-

tend / shorten the line by entering positive / negative values (see the

section "Input Box for Editors" on page 33).

• If the Object snap option is activated, then ends, snap points, and

intersections with other lines are used as snap points when extending

/ shortening. The lines are then automatically connected to these snap

points when trimming.

Filleting / chamfering corners

Use the Fillet corners functionality to fillet enclosed angles of less than

180°. Angles between open lines can not be filleted, i.e. lines cannot be

connected via the filleting function.

Example:

A corner of a rectangle is filleted with a radius of 16 mm.

You can use the Chamfer functionality to chamfer the corners of differ-

ent elements symmetrically. This functionality can be used on enclosed

angles which are less than 180°. In this case the original lines are short-

ened symmetrically by a value (the so-called chamfer width) which is

measured from the angle point.


28 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

A corner of a rectangle is chamfered with a chamfer width of 16 mm.

Filleting / chamfering is available for the following elements in EPLAN:

• The corner of two radiating lines

• The corner between a line and a polyline

• The corner between two polylines

• The corners of polylines (open and closed)

• Rectangles.

Filleting / chamfering rectangles will result in the rectangle being con-

verted into a polygon with four segments (starting point of the first

polyline segment = start point of the rectangle).

To enable this, the Polyline tab has been amended to include the field

Radius. You can also use this field to change a fillet radius or fillet a

"straight" polyline segment.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 29

To fillet a corner select the menu option Edit > Graphic > Fillet corners.

To chamfer a corner select the Chamfer menu option in the same menu.

Alternatively click on the (Fillet corners) / (Chamfer) button in the

Edit graphic toolbar.

Click on the corner to be filleted/ chamfered. Click to set the fillet radius /

chamfer width. The corner is correspondingly filleted / chamfered. Once

defined, a fillet radius / chamfer width is applied until you cancel the

action.

Notes:

• If it is not possible to apply a selected fillet radius you will receive a

system message.

• You can also fillet or chamfer corners of single elements in a group of

elements.

Tip:

Once you have chosen the corner to fillet or chamfer, you can also use

the opened window of the input box to set the fillet radius or the chamfer

width (see the section "Input Box for Editors" on page 33).

Drawing a Rectangle through Center

You can now also use the center and a corner point to define a rectan-

gle. To do this select the menu option Insert > Graphic > Rectangle

through center. Start by defining the center of the rectangle and click

with the left-hand mouse button. Drag the rectangle out from the center

and click with the left-hand mouse button to set a corner point for the

rectangle. Click on the new button to select this functionality from the

Graphic toolbar.


30 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tip:

Rather than using the mouse you can also set the center and corner

points of the rectangle via the input box (see page 33). Since relative

coordinates are used when entering the second point and the input

relates to the center, the point entry for a corner point of the rectangle

(e.g. 20 20) corresponds to half the width and height of the rectangle

(e.g. 40 mm 40 mm).

Drawing Assistance with Perpendicular and Tangential Points

When drawing graphical elements in the editors (graphical editor, symbol

editor, etc.) you are now assisted by new snap points (perpendicular and

tangential points).

Benefit: Drawing using tangential points assists you particularly when

constructing slotted holes which you define via two drill holes

connected by lines placed on the circle tangents. You then

use the Cut off functionality to erase the inner circle seg-

ments. The result is a fast, simple, and cleanly-constructed

slotted hole.

Perpendicular and tangential points

If the Object snap option is activated when drawing graphical elements,

a perpendicular or tangential point is displayed at the cursor as

soon as a perpendicular or tangential line element is possible.

If the Object snap option is deactivated, then these (and other) points

are not treated as snap points and are accordingly also not displayed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 31

Perpendicular or tangential mode when drawing

Irrespective of whether the Object snap option is selected, the two new

modes Perpendicular and Tangential are available in the popup menu

when drawing particular graphical elements (lines, circles, etc.).

These functionalities can help you draw a perpendicular line or a tan-

gent. Once you have selected a mode in the popup menu, the icon at the

cursor changes. The respective modes are available for the following

graphical elements:

• Perpendicular mode (cursor: ):

for lines, polylines, and polygons

• Tangential mode (cursor: ):

for lines, polylines, polygons, circles, arcs through center, and sectors.

Drawing perpendicular or tangential lines

With the help of the Perpendicular and Tangential modes you can draw

a line perpendicularly or tangentially to an object.

Defining the start point for a line

When drawing lines (polylines) you can use the new modes once to

define the start point for a line (polyline).

Once you have selected the relevant menu item in the Insert > Graphic

menu (Line, Polyline, Polygon), you can e.g. select Popup menu >

Perpendicular.

The icon at the cursor indicates that the Perpendicular mode is

active. Next click on the respective object (line, rectangle, circle, etc.) to

which you wish to draw a perpendicular line. Provided you have not

defined the end point yet, the start point is variable and the line can be

moved up and down vertically to the selected line segment of the object.

Click once more to determine the end point of the line (the next corner

point of the polyline).


32 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Defining the end point for a line

You can also use these modes to set the end point of a line (the next

corner point of a polyline).

To do this, once you have defined the start point, select the mode via the

popup menu (e.g. Perpendicular). Then move the cursor to the

object to which you wish to draw a perpendicular line. As soon as you

have reached a perpendicular point, the possible line is displayed. Click

to draw this perpendicular line.

Defining a radius through a tangential point

Tangential mode additionally lets you define the radii of circles, arcs,

and sectors in your drawing.

Once you have selected the corresponding menu item in the Insert >

Graphic menu (Circle, Arc through center, Sector), start by clicking

with the left-hand mouse button to define the center.

Then select Popup menu > Tangential. The icon at the cursor indi-

cates that Tangential mode is active. Now move the cursor to the object

to which you wish to draw a tangent. Once you have reached a tangent

point the possible arc is displayed. Click again to draw the circle / arc /

sector.

Line projection

It is now possible to define a projection for lines.

Benefit: This new feature lets you produce a DIN-compliant center

line, i.e. with projection.

If this is required for a line, open the respective properties dialog on the

Format tab and activate the Projection check box. A projection is then

drawn at the start and end point of the line. This is calculated according

to DIN on the basis of the line thickness and drawn with a length of

"12 d" (wherein d = dashed line diameter (Line thickness)).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 33

Note:

The line's snap points and dimensions are not changed by inserting a

projection.

Input Box for Editors

The new input box in EPLAN offers you the option for various functionali-

ties in the editors (graphical editor, 3D view, etc.) of entering values via

the keyboard.

Benefit: The input box permits fast, clear input of values. You can

define all the required dimensions for a high-quality produc-

tion document without use of the grid.

If the input box is activated, a small text window for inputting numbers

appears at the cursor for these functionalities (e.g. for inserting a line).

This window exhibits a predefined level of transparency which you can

change in the settings.

Tip:

You can use the input box in combination with the base point shift e.g. to

construct recesses in an enclosure door quickly and easily.

To do this select Options > Move base point and click on the bottom

left corner of the enclosure door. This defines the auxiliary point for the

relative input. Then select Insert > Graphic > Rectangle. If the Input

box option is activated the input box text window is displayed at the

cursor.


34 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Input two values to set the position of the first corner of the rectangle.

This point entry relates to the movement of the reference point on the

bottom left corner of the door. Enter one more point in the input box and

the rectangle is drawn to the exact preset size as a recess.

Using the input box

The input box text window consists of two heading rows and the actual

input box. The first header row shows the respective action (e.g. Start

point for line) and the second row shows the required input as comment

text. The numbers input via the keyboard are displayed in the input box.

The sequence of values to be input is defined in the system for each

functionality. Thus, e.g. in the case of the line, two entries are possible in

the order "X and Y value of a coordinate" or "Angle and length".

In the case of the point entry the input of two values separated by a

space is interpreted as the X and Y values of coordinates (start or end

point). In this case the input values relate to the graphical coordinate

system with its origin at the bottom left and which is specified in "mm" or

"inch" depending on the unit presetting.

Note:

Note that only the first point entry uses absolute values while the subse-

quent point entries use relative coordinates.

You input one value to define the angle of a line. Use "Value<Value" to

input the angle and the length of a line. Negative values are also admis-

sible. To set decimal places, enter the decimal separator used in the

operating system ("," or ".").

Click on [Enter] to apply the values entered to the respective functional-

ity; the input box is then cleared. The input box is closed after the last

input or after exiting the action.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 35

You can not request other functionalities with the relevant shortcut keys

when the input box is open. Press [Esc] to cancel the input box.

Functions with input-box support

Input-box entries are permissible for the following EPLAN platform

functionalities:

• Inserting graphical elements:

line, polyline, rectangle, circle, arc, sector, text.

• Inserting dimensioning.

• Editing graphical elements:

rotate, duplicate, move, mirror, scale, stretch, cut off, change length,

fillet corners, chamfer.

• Inserting 3D items:

mounting rail, wire duct (cable duct), enclosure, mounting panel,

locked area, logic item.

• Editing 3D items:

Place via adopt length, change length, rotate around axis, define

mounting point and handle.

Activating the input box

You can configure the EPLAN user settings so that the input box is

always displayed for the functionalities listed above. To do this, select

the Always show input box (2D) and Always show input box (3D)

check boxes in the new Settings: Input box / Mini toolbars dialog.

Under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Input box /

Mini toolbars you can also change the transparency of the text window

for the input box.

Along with this setting you can, however, also activate / deactivate the

input box depending on the selection of a functionality. To do this the

Options menu now includes the new Input box menu item and the View

toolbar has a new button .


36 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

The setting for activation and deactivation of the input box is synchro-

nized. I.e., if you activate the input box in the settings and then deacti-

vate it in the editor, it is also deselected in the settings. Keys for input boxes

Irrespective of whether or not you activate the input box when running

the functionalities listed above, you can also open the text window for the

input box with the [C] key. In this case the cursor is located immediately

in the input box of the text window. The same applies for the number

keys and for the [+] and [-] keys which also open the input box.

Note:

For this reason the View menu no longer has the default settings of the

[+] key for zoom In and the [-] key for zoom Out. And the shortcut key

for zoom to 100% has been changed to [Alt] + [3].

Tip:

With the help of the number keys and the [+] and [-] keys you can input

values via the input box even during an interaction and even if the Input

box option is deactivated. If you draw, e.g., a circle with Insert >

Graphic > Circle and have already placed the center, the subsequent

input of a value (e.g. "1") opens the input box and you can input the

radius, for example "10".

Elliptical Text and Alignment Boxes

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 37


EPLAN now allows you to set elliptical and circular text and / or align-

ment boxes for texts. It makes no difference what type of text this is

(simple "graphical" text, property text, special text, etc.). For placed

property texts you can also show leader lines.

Example:

Our example shows circular alignment boxes for various part placements

on a mounting panel. The leader lines show which legend item belongs

to which part placement.

Benefit: You have more flexibility in laying out text boxes. Leader lines

between a device and the associated property placements

make the schematic easier to read.


38 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Elliptical Text Boxes

You can set the options for elliptical text boxes as follows:

• Project-wide by means of an appropriate setting in layer management:

You can now select the values for the Text box property from a drop-

down list. Select "Ellipse" from this list if you want texts or device tags

on the layer concerned to be surrounded by an elliptical border

throughout the entire project.

• Individually by means of the corresponding properties dialog:

The setting options for borders have been extended for this purpose.

As already mentioned in "Clearer "Display" and "Format" Tabs in the

Properties Dialog" on page 22, the relevant settings are no longer lo-

cated on the separate tab or in the subsequent Border dialog but in a

table on the Display / Format tab.

To obtain an elliptical text box for an individual device tag or text, se-

lect the new "Ellipse" option from the Draw text box drop-down list in

the Border area of this table.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 39

Example:

The illustration below shows the new settings in the properties dialog for

a component on the Display tab.

Using the new Size from project setting check box you can specify that

the static size of the text box is taken from the new Text box project

setting. To access this setting select Options > Settings > Projects >

"Project name" > Graphical editing > General. Equal values for the

Width and Height fields will produce a circular text box.

If the Size from project setting check box is not selected, the size of

the box is determined by the text.

Elliptical Alignment Boxes and Leader Lines

If you want texts or device tags to have elliptical alignment boxes and / or

leader lines, you can specify the relevant settings individually in the

associated properties dialog.


40 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If you also select the new Activate leader line check box, a leader line

is drawn from the placed property text to the center of the associated

component. If the property text is moved, the position of the leader line is

adjusted accordingly. No leader line is drawn for simple "graphical" texts

or special texts.

To draw an elliptical alignment box you must first select the Activate

alignment box check box. This activates the new Draw alignment box

drop-down list, and you can specify whether a graphic is displayed for

the alignment box and what shape this graphic should be. For an ellip-

tical box select the "Ellipse" option. Equal values for the subsequent

Width and Height fields will produce a circular alignment box.

New Features in Dimensioning

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 41


New Project-wide Settings for Dimensioning

There are new setting options for dimensioning, making the creation of

dimensions in EPLAN more versatile and convenient.

Benefit: • You have new representation options so you can dimen-

sion drawings for customers in Europe and North America

according to local standards:

- Display dimension value as fraction

- Dimension value centered in dimension line

- Horizontal dimension value.

• You can use the Distance 1st dimension help line and

Distance 2nd dimension help line settings to create a

gap between the graphic and the dimension help lines.

• Clear dimensioning enables you to create high-quality pro-

duction documentation. You therefore lay the foundation

for smooth production and assembly processes while still

in the engineering phase.

To open the relevant Settings: Dimensioning dialog, select the menu

path Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical

editing > Dimensioning.


42 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Display two units:

If this check box is selected, the dimension value is displayed as a metric

unit (mm, cm, etc.) and in inches.

The dimension value with the second unit (i.e. the one that is not set in

the Unit field) is displayed in square brackets immediately after the first dimension value with the first unit (e.g. 88 mm[3,46’’]). The dimension

value for the second unit is shown to the same accuracy as the first di-

mension value; however, a maximum of two decimal places is displayed.

If the check box is not selected, the dimension value is displayed with the

unit specified in the Unit field only.

Note:

Two units cannot be displayed for an angular dimension. In this case, the

Display two units check box in the properties dialog is grayed out.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 43

Display dimension value as fraction:

If this check box is selected, decimal numbers such as "0.5", "0.25",

"0.125", "0.0625", or multiples thereof will be displayed as a fraction.

Possible values for fractions are therefore "1/2", "1/4", "1/8", "1/16", and

multiples thereof. Other decimal numbers are not shown as fractions.

Horizontal dimension value:

If this check box is selected, the dimension value is always displayed

horizontally, irrespective of the dimension direction.

If this check box is not selected, the dimension value is displayed

according to the dimension direction.

This means that for vertical dimensions, for instance, you no longer need

to rotate the dimension value in the properties dialog. To do this, on the

Dimensioning tab, you must first deselect the Center dimension value

check box and then change the setting in the Angle field on the Format

tab.

Dimension value centered in dimension line:

If this check box is selected, the dimension value is placed in the center

of the dimension line and the dimension line is interrupted.

With this setting, the dimension value is always displayed horizontally

and centered. Any set distance from the dimension line is ignored. Fur-

thermore, no format settings for alignment and angle can be specified in

the relevant properties dialog for dimensioning.


44 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

Linear dimension on a rectangle with Dimension value centered in

dimension line selected:

Note:

Note that the Horizontal dimension value and Dimension value cen-

tered in dimension line settings are ignored in incremental dimensions. Dimension line interrupted by dimension value:

If this check box is selected, the dimension line is interrupted if the

dimension value intersects with it.

If the check box is not selected, the dimension line is never interrupted,

irrespective of the position of the dimension value.

Display start value for incremental dimension:

If this check box is selected, the start value, i.e. the value at the first

measuring point, is also displayed for incremental dimensions.

If the check box is not selected, this value is not displayed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 45

Note:

The Display start value for incremental dimension setting is not a

property but just a display aid. Therefore this setting can not be specified

for a dimension in the properties dialog, but only project-wide.

New Settings in the Properties Dialog

In addition to the project-wide default setting, you can also specify all the

properties described above individually for a dimension. To do this, in the

graphical editor click on the relevant dimension line to open the Proper-

ties dialog.

Dimensioning tab:

The Dimension value group box on this tab contains new check boxes

as follows:

• Display two units

• Display dimension value as fraction

• Horizontal dimension value and

• Dimension value centered in dimension line.

Lines tab:

For the sake of clarity, the settings for the dimension help line and

dimension line termination have been moved to the new Lines tab.


46 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

This tab also contains the new Dimension line interrupted by dimen-

sion value check box.

It also contains the option of setting shorter dimension help lines. For this

reason, the Dimension help line group box has two new fields:

Distance 1st dimension help line and Distance 2nd dimension help

line, in which you enter the distance between the measuring point and

the start of the dimension help line for the dimension help line in ques-

tion. The dimension help line is shortened for positive values and ex-

tended for negative values.

New Features in the Page Navigator

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 47


Page Filter with Schemes

There are two different options in the page navigator to define a page

filter:

• By defining filter criteria in the "Filter" dialog

This new option is a field-based default filter which you will already

recognize from other navigators, for example. Here, you can use

various page properties as filter criteria and store them in a scheme.

• Via detailed selection in the "Select pages" dialog

This option corresponds to the page filter used to date. Here, you can

compile the desired pages manually in a tree structure, with support

from a prefilter and a postfilter.

Benefit: When using the default filter, the page filter now no longer

has to be updated after creating new pages. You are always

given the current view of the subset of project pages defined

via the page filter. Consistent use of the familiar filter technol-

ogy facilitates operation of the program.

Specifying page filters via default filter

Predefined filter schemes can be selected via the new Filter drop-down

list. If you then click the [...] button next to the drop-down list, this takes

you to the Filter dialog. Here, you can create new schemes and make

changes to the relevant filter criteria.


48 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

As this is a default technique in EPLAN, we will not be looking at this in

greater detail. For more information on this, see the EPLAN online help

in the section entitled "Filters".

Specifying page filters via detailed selection

To specify a page filter via the Select pages dialog, select the new

Detailed selection menu item in the page navigator popup menu.

Once you have made your settings in this dialog, the filter specified

here is automatically stored in a scheme and given the name

"Selection_<project name>". If you make another page selection via the

detailed selection, the scheme "Selection_<project name>" is overwritten

with the current settings.

As the selection filter is saved to a scheme, it is retained even when the

project is closed. Filters of this kind can be changed or deleted in the

Filter dialog for the page navigator, like any other filter scheme.

Tip:

When printing / exporting pages, if you want to output only the current

pages of an activated page filter, you have to activate the Selection

option in the Print dialog, and you must not activate the Apply to entire

project check box in the export dialogs. Other changes

You can also access the default filter in the Copy pages dialog when

copying pages between different projects.

Both types of filter are saved according to user. This has made removal

of the page filter via the Compress project dialog superfluous. For this

reason, the Page filter setting has been removed from the Remove

project data area in the compression settings.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 49

Selection in the Page List Takes Place when Scrolling Pages

When you "scroll" through the pages of a project in the graphical editor,

e.g. by clicking the [Image down] / [Image up] buttons, the page cur-

rently opened is now selected in the page navigator list.

Benefit: The selection behavior in the list is now clearer, so navigation

in the list takes place more quickly and more easily. With the

Tree and List tabs, optimal views are available for various

project planning tasks.

Automatic Page Names when Inserting Pages or Macros

When inserting copied pages or page macros, a functionality is now

available to you with which the new page names are automatically

suggested.

To do this, you can activate the new check box Automatic page name

in the Pages tab in the Adapt structure dialog. If this check box is

enabled, the highest page number available for the structure is deter-

mined and the second-highest number / numbers suggested for the

Page name column.

Example:

You have opened the EPLAN-DEMO sample project and selected the page

=EB3+ET1/1 with the page description Power supply in the page navi-

gator. You then insert a single-page macro. The page name of the

created page macro is initially the default setting in the Adapt structure dialog on the Pages tab (e.g. 5). When you have activated the Automat-

ic page name check box, the page name – as the highest page number assigned in the partial structure is 8 – is changed to 9.


50 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Customizing the Displayed DT for Location Boxes when Inserting Pages or Macros

If there are also location boxes on the copied pages or page macros, you

can now not only change the page structure of the pages to be inserted,

but also the displayed device tag of the location boxes before insertion.

Benefit: The displayed device tags of location boxes can now be

adapted during copying. This removes manual editing after

insertion. Automatic adaptation of the device tags saves

project planning time and ensures quality when working with

macros.

For this purpose, the Adjust page structure dialog has been extended

and renamed Adapt structure. The fields and buttons for editing the

page structure are now located in the Pages tab. If there are also loca-

tion boxes in the page / page macro to be inserted, the Location boxes

tab is also displayed.

In the table under this tab, the displayed device tags for the source loca-

tion boxes, their placement and the displayed target device tags for the

location boxes are displayed. To change a displayed DT, click the appro-

priate field in the table and enter the new tag manually.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 51

If you have input structure identifiers which are not yet present in the

target project, the familiar Place identifiers dialog is opened before

insertion.

If the settings are set to default for online numbering, numbering of the

devices then takes place using the Insertion mode dialog. The

components in the location boxes are also taken into account here.

Determining Number of Pages / Page Name per Property

The new menu item Number of pages / Page name per property in the

Page menu allows you to determine the number and names of the pages

which have the same value of a specific property. When you have se-

lected this menu item, a reporting run is started which calculates the

number and names of the pages with the same value and writes the

result to the new Number of pages per property <11062> and Page

names per property <11063> properties.

Benefit: This functionality allows you to (e.g.) determine the number of

pages in the project which have the same structure identifier

for the "higher-level function" and print this information on the

pages. This provides you with an easy overview of the scope

of the individual documentation sections, even in larger

projects.

You define the property used for comparison in the report run via the

project-specific settings for the pages (under Options > Settings >

Projects > "Project name" > Management > Pages). In the Settings:

Pages dialog, the new Number of pages / Page name per property

field is available. The Higher-level function (main identifier) property is

set as the default here. You can use the [...] button next to the field to

open the familiar Property selection dialog and select a different

property.


52 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Using the also new setting Automatically execute 'Number of pages /

Page name per property' before generating the table of contents

under this, you can set EPLAN so that the Number of pages / Page

name per property report run is started automatically before generating

and updating a table of contents.

The two properties Number of pages per property and Page names

per property can be displayed in the page properties for a page or

entered in a plot frame as Special text - page properties. The semico-

lon is used by default as a separator for several output page names, as

is – in the case of combined values – the character sequence "...".

For this, the separators for this functionality are transferred from the form

properties of the set table of contents form (properties: Separator for

multiple values and Separator for combined values). For more infor-

mation on this, see section "Combining overview reports" on page 228.

To check these properties, a number of new messages is available to

you in the settings for messages and error checking. The message class

"Other" has been extended to include the messages "022014", "022015",

and "022016". With the aid of these project checks, you can determine

whether the property selected in the Number of pages / Page name per

property setting is blank on one page of the project, whether the pages

combined via this setting are not consecutive, or whether letters are

contained in a page name.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 53

Using Terminals

Project editor:

As a project editor, you must read this section before you work with the

new version.

Using Main Terminals

If you insert a terminal, this component is now inserted by default as a

main terminal.

Benefit: The default use of main terminals offers complete device

management for terminals.

• So you can now store device definitions for terminals in

parts management and insert terminals as devices, for

example.

• You can also carry out device selection at main terminals.

• Multi-level terminals that have been defined using main

terminals are no longer separated if they are edited

(moved, copied, etc.).

• The new function definitions for terminals mean that the

field of application of a terminal can be defined with much

greater precision and flexibility.

• You can edit saddle jumpers centrally in the Edit terminal

strip dialog. This makes configuring a terminal strip clear,

quick, and easy.

The changed behavior is indicated by selection of the new Main ter-

minal check box on the Terminal tab in the properties dialog.

Using Terminals

54 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If this check box is selected, the terminal is a main terminal and behaves

in the same way as a main function. For example, if parts with function

templates are assigned to a main terminal of this type, these function

templates are now also displayed in the terminal strip navigator. Parts

can be entered at a main terminal if it has the representation type "Multi-

line".

If the check box is not selected, the terminal is an auxiliary terminal. In

this case, the Parts tab is hidden in the properties dialog and no parts

can be stored.

If a part with function templates is entered at a main terminal, these tem-

plates overlay the terminal auxiliary functions belonging to the main

terminal.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 55

Managing terminal strips

Terminal strips are managed as before using terminal strip definitions.

However, these now only contain specific terminal strip parts, e.g. labels,

rails, etc.

However, the terminal parts are now stored at the individual main

terminals rather than at the terminal strip definition as before. In this

case, the terminal strip is divided into "independent areas", with each

main terminal defining an independent area.

Managing terminal strips as in the previous versions

If the entire terminal strip is to be defined purely by the terminal strip

definition as previously (before EPLAN 2.0), then the terminal strip can

only consist of one independent area. This means that either the terminal

strip must contain no main terminals or the property Do not use main

terminals must be selected for the terminal strip definition.

If this new property with ID <20229> is selected for a terminal strip

definition, main terminals are treated in the same way as "normal"

terminals. The function templates of the parts entered at the terminals

are not used, but the parts are output in reports.

Note:

This procedure is only supported by the program for compatibility rea-

sons. We recommend managing parts at the main terminals in future.

Definition of multi-level terminals

In EPLAN, multi-level terminals are displayed with "normal" terminal

symbols. Terminals inserted into the schematic are part of a multi-level

terminal if they carry the same DT, they directly follow one another in the

sorting order, and if they have ever increasing values for the level.

Using Terminals

56 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The changed behavior when inserting terminals has to be taken into

account in the definition of multi-level terminals too. Each multi-level

terminal can only contain one main terminal. The other associated

terminals must be auxiliary terminals.

To define a terminal as a multi-level terminal when editing or inserting

terminals, enter a value > 0 in the Level field on the Terminal tab in the

properties dialog. The main terminal can be the terminal with either the

lowest or the highest level. Deselect the Main terminal check box if it is

an auxiliary terminal.

When you click [OK] to close the properties dialog, the value set for the

terminal is accepted. The level set is shown in the terminal strip naviga-

tor tree in square brackets (e.g. [1] for the lowest level).

Previously the levels of a multi-level terminal could only be sorted in

ascending order. However, the use of main terminals means that the

levels can now be sorted in descending order too:

• If the main terminal is level "1", then the levels are sorted in ascending

order. The function templates of the associated part are moved into

ascending order.

• If the main terminal level is > 1, then the levels are sorted in

descending order. The function templates of the associated part are

moved into descending order.

Storing multi-level terminals in parts management

Multi-level terminals with a part number and multiple function templates

can be created in parts management. The multi-level terminal then

placed in the schematic consists of a main terminal (with the part number

and function templates) and multiple auxiliary terminal functions. The

main terminal should normally be assigned to the first function template.

If this is not the case, this is reported by the new 001023 check run.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 57

A multi-level terminal defined in this way is an independent device for

which a device selection is also possible.

Converting older projects and macros

When you open projects and insert macros from older EPLAN versions,

they are automatically converted. This has the following consequences:

• For terminal strip definitions

The new property Do not use main terminals <20229> is activated

at terminal strip definitions from older projects. A terminal strip of this

type is only defined by the terminal strip definition. Main terminals are

then treated in the same way as auxiliary terminals.

• For terminals

Terminals with level "0" or "1" are converted into main terminals when

they are opened or inserted. At the corresponding terminals the Main

terminal check box on the first tab is selected. Terminals with higher

level values become auxiliary terminals. At terminals for which the

Main function property was enabled, the corresponding check box on

the Symbol / function data tab is deselected.

This automatic customization safeguards the previous behavior in ter-

minal editing (before EPLAN 2.0) and you can generate reports for your

old projects in the usual way.

Notes:

• When you open older projects, a prompt now asks you whether you

wish to convert the project to the current version (see page 69). Note

that the terminals / terminal strip definitions are converted even if you

close this prompt with [No].

Using Terminals

58 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• If you have already consistently entered the terminal parts at the ter-

minals in your old projects, then all you need to do is to deselect the

Do not use main terminals check box at the terminal strip definitions

in order to activate the new behavior. If function templates are stored

in parts management for the parts entered at the terminals, these are

displayed immediately and the terminal functions are overlaid by the

templates.

Terminal Strip and Terminal Accessories

Up to the present version, the terminal strip accessories were stored as

parts at the terminal strip definition. If you now use main terminals, then

you enter the parts for the accessories at the appropriate main terminal.

A distinction is made here between accessories for terminals and for

terminal strips:

• Alignable accessories

Alignable accessories are attached to the terminal strip. They can be

positioned before or after a terminal. These accessories are entered

as parts at the appropriate main terminal.

• Non-alignable accessories

Non-alignable accessories belong to either a terminal or a terminal

strip and are attached to this, e.g. labels.

These accessories are entered as parts at the terminal or at the ter-

minal strip definition. Non-alignable accessories are not shown in

reports or in the Edit terminal strip dialog.

Defining alignable accessories for terminals

Previously certain product subgroups of the terminal accessories were

given a fixed definition of "alignable" in EPLAN. In the new version you

can now choose whether an accessory part for terminals is alignable or

not.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 59

In order for an accessory part to be reported as an alignable accessory,

the Alignable check box on the Terminal data tab must be selected for

this part in parts management.

Terminals are always alignable, i.e., for the "Terminals" product sub-

group the Alignable check box is selected and cannot be changed.

Possible parts for alignable accessories

A part can be an alignable accessory if it belongs to one of the following

product subgroups:

• Cover

• Terminator

• General

• End angle

• Terminal label

• Strip label

• Cross-connector

• Rails

• Plug housing

• Plug accessories

• Test accessories

• Mounting rail

• Partition

• Undefined

• Other labels

• Tools.

If you select the product subgroups "Terminator", "End angle", or

"Partition" for a part, the Alignable check box is selected by default.

For all other product subgroups it is deselected by default.

Using Terminals

60 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

All other parts are simple parts in the terminal or terminal strip and are

not represented as accessories in reports or in the Edit terminal strip

dialog.

Note:

If you convert an older parts database (pre-version 2.0), the Alignable

check box is selected for all parts in the "Terminals" product group which

belong to one of the following product subgroups:

• Cover

• Terminator

• End angle

• Terminal

• Strip label

• Rails

• Plug accessories

• Test accessories

• Mounting rail

• Partition

• Other labels

• Tools.

New Features in Editing Terminal Strips

All settings and data for a highlighted terminal strip are shown in the Edit

terminal strip dialog. The new features in this dialog are listed below.

Assigning alignable accessories when editing terminal strips

The changed behavior in terminal editing is also evident in the Edit

terminal strip dialog. A check box in the new Main terminal column

shows you whether a given terminal is a main terminal.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 61

In connection with the new features for alignable accessories, the pre-

vious popup menu items Add strip accessories, Display strip acces-

sories, and Delete strip accessories have been renamed accordingly.

Displaying alignable accessories

In order for alignable accessories to be displayed in the dialog, the

Alignable accessories visible option must be enabled. If you select

Popup menu > Alignable accessories visible, the accessories are

shown in a separate row.

Adding alignable accessories

If you open the Part selection dialog via Popup menu > Add alignable

accessories, then only parts from the product subgroups which also

qualify as alignable accessories are displayed.

Once you have selected a part, the accessory is inserted as a separate

hatched row below the current cursor position. You can move the row as

you wish. In the Row column a small arrow indicates the position in

which the accessory is added, before or after a terminal.

Using the new Alignable accessories following popup menu item you

can choose whether to add the accessory before or after a terminal.

When you click [Apply] the accessories are assigned to the terminal and

the parts are entered at the terminal.

The terminal and accessories and the function templates belonging to a

terminal are now grouped together in a block similarly to the multi-level

terminals and can be moved together. The row numbers are grouped

together in one field in the Row column.

Disconnecting accessories / multi-level terminals

To disconnect a block of this type, select Popup menu > Disconnect.

This allows you to move an accessory or a level of a multi-level terminal

to another terminal.

Using Terminals

62 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

If you wish to continue using the previous behavior in terminal editing

(before EPLAN version 2.0), then you can continue to enter accessories

at the terminal strip definition. To do this activate the Do not use main

terminals property on the terminal strip. In this case, the parts added in

the Edit terminal strip dialog are entered at the terminal strip definition.

The rows for the accessories and the direction arrows for sorting are

unaffected.

Information about terminal connection points

In addition to the targets, now you can also display information about the

terminal connection points. The Edit terminal strip dialog contains the

following two new columns for this purpose:

• Terminal connection point (external)

• Terminal connection point (internal).

The connection point designation in these columns indicates the terminal

connection point to which a given external / internal target is connected.

Note:

The Terminal connection point (external) and Terminal connection

point (internal) columns are not displayed by default in the Edit ter-

minal strip dialog to start with. Instead they must first be added by

selecting Popup menu > Configure columns.

Generating saddle jumpers manually

In the Edit terminal strip dialog you can now also define saddle jumpers

via the popup menu. Using the Manual saddle jumper menu item you

can generate a manual saddle jumper between the highlighted terminals

or remove an existing one.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 63

The menu item is only active if multiple adjacent terminals are high-

lighted. If manual saddle jumpers have already been defined for some

(but not all) terminals within the highlighted block, a continuous saddle

jumper is generated. If manual saddle jumpers have already been de-

fined for all terminals within the highlighted block, the saddle jumper for

the highlighted area is removed; it is retained for the terminals included

in the non-highlighted area.

External / internal saddle jumpers

A distinction is now made in EPLAN between external and internal

saddle jumpers in the same way as for wire jumpers.

Existing displays in the Edit terminal strip dialog or in the reports are

not affected by this. The existing Saddle jumpers column in the Edit

terminal strip dialog and the Graphic for saddle jumpers placeholder

in the reports continue to group external and internal saddle jumpers

together.

If you want to know whether a saddle jumper is external or internal, you

can show the information in the editing dialog using the two new

columns: Saddle jumpers (external) and Saddle jumpers (internal).

And for output to reports (e.g. terminal diagram, terminal connection

diagram, etc.) the two new properties Graphic for external saddle

jumpers <13066> and Graphic for internal saddle jumpers <13065>

have been added to the Terminal properties placeholder element.

Using Terminals

64 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Notes:

• The Saddle jumpers (external) and Saddle jumpers (internal)

columns are not displayed by default in the Edit terminal strip dialog

to start with. Instead they must be added first by selecting Popup

menu > Configure columns.

• Please note that this additional feature means that it is possible to

display or to output a saddle jumper twice – i.e. as both a "normal"

and an external / internal saddle jumper.

New Features in the Terminal Strip Navigator

Display in the navigator

The main and auxiliary terminals of a terminal strip are displayed in the

navigators (device navigator, terminal strip navigator) at the same

hierarchy level. Main terminals – as is usual for main functions – are

indicated by a "shopping cart" in front of the terminal. The levels of

multi-level terminals are shown here in square brackets (e.g. [1] for the

lowest level).

Generating new terminals

The popup menu of the terminal strip navigator now includes the menu

option New terminals (devices). The dialog that this option opens al-

lows you to generate multiple unplaced terminals for a new or existing

terminal strip in accordance with a defined numbering pattern.

Unlike the New functions menu option, a function definition is not

selected in the Generate terminals (devices) dialog. Instead a part is

entered in the Part number field or selected using the [...] button. In

order for a terminal to be able to be inserted in this way, the selected part

must have at least one terminal function template. Once you have

clicked [OK] to close the dialog, the terminals are generated from the

function templates of the selected part, the terminal designations being

determined by the numbering pattern.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 65

Sorting terminals of a terminal strip

The new Sort terminal strip menu item means that you can now auto-

matically sort all terminals of a terminal strip according to certain criteria

in the terminal strip navigator too. The sort options offered in the sub-

menu correspond to the known functionality for sorting terminals from the

Edit terminal strip dialog.

If you highlight a terminal in the navigator, the entire terminal strip is

sorted according to the selected sort criterion. In this way you can now

delete terminal sort codes, for example in the terminal strip navigator, by

selecting Popup menu > Sort terminal strip > Default.

Note:

Multi-level terminals and other independent areas are retained when the

terminals are sorted. The properties of the first terminal in the area

(usually the main terminal) influence the sort order. The main terminal

always has the lowest sort code within its independent area.

New Function Definitions for Terminals

The new EPLAN version offers many new function definitions for ter-

minals. These new function definitions have been greatly simplified, and

their structure is improved in comparison to those previously used. They

offer greater variability in terms of numbers of connection points and can

map up to eight connection points and more.

We recommend that you no longer use the old function definitions for

terminals in project planning. If you use the function definition library

supplied with this version, the "old" function definitions are no longer

offered for selection in the Function definitions dialog.

Using Terminals

66 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New properties for characterizing terminals

The new function definitions for terminals mean that terminals are de-

scribed by the number of their connection points and by predefined

connection points for saddle jumpers. To enable you to characterize

inserted terminals more precisely, the following new properties are

included in the Settings category in the properties dialog:

• Terminal category <20230>

The drop-down list for this property allows you to characterize a

terminal more precisely. A terminal could be a feed-through terminal,

isolating terminal, switching terminal, diode terminal, etc.

• Terminal with LED <20231>

You can use the check box for this property to indicate that a terminal

has an LED.

• Terminal opened <20232>

You can use the check box for this property to indicate that the ter-

minal is open. You can show the state of an isolating terminal in this

way, for example.

All of these properties are available in terminal reports and can be used

there to output terminal graphics using the form property Assignment:

Property / value to graphic [1-10].

Online Numbering of Terminal Sort Codes

Existing terminal sort codes can now be taken into account in online

numbering. In this way on insertion of macros and copies, the sort codes

in the terminal strips existing in the source are determined and the sort

code of the newly inserted terminals incremented.

To this end the Numbering formats dialog on the Designations tab

now includes a Terminal sort codes check box.

Using Terminals

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 67

Note:

This setting only affects existing terminal sort codes on insertion of ma-

cros and copies. On symbol insertion or on creation of terminal strips in

the terminal strip navigator, sort codes are not generated automatically. If the check box is selected and if in addition one of the numbering op-

tions is chosen in the Insertion mode dialog, then existing sort codes

are automatically numbered on insertion.

The highest sort code in the terminal strip is identified and incremented

by one. Therefore, the newly inserted terminals are always sorted at the

end of the terminal strip. If several terminals have a sort code, their

sequence is retained by ascending sort code values. The numbering

does not separate consecutive terminals.

If the check box is deselected, the sort codes of the inserted terminals

are not changed. The terminals are then sorted between the existing

terminals according to their sort code or terminal designation. This can

mean that terminals that were previously consecutive (e.g. multi-level

terminals) can be separated.

Online numbering of terminal and pin designations

If you copy and insert terminals / pins, then the inserted terminals / pins

are now numbered in the logical sequence and not in the graphical se-

quence any more. In this case, multi-level terminals are now retained in

online numbering rather than being separated.

Using Terminals

68 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Extended Reports for Terminals

Output terminal connection point in addition to target

In reports for terminals (terminal diagrams, terminal connection dia-

grams) you can now choose to output information about the terminal

connection points to the targets too.

To enable this to be taken into account in the report, the new placeholder

elements Terminal connection point external and Terminal connec-

tion point internal are now available for the corresponding forms. These

placeholder elements allow you to output the connection point designa-

tion of the terminal connected to a given external or internal target, for

example.

Terminal report generation in relation to connection points or targets

Using the new form property Connection point-specific output

<13113> you can determine whether terminals in terminal diagrams or

terminal connection diagrams are output in relation to connection points

or to targets.

If this property is activated, a row is generated in terminal diagrams and

terminal connection diagrams for each pair of connection points. Ter-

minals with more than two connection points are automatically split

across multiple rows. In addition, terminal connection points that are not

connected are output.

If the form property Connection point-specific output is disabled, ter-

minals are reported in relation to targets. In target-specific reports the

external and internal targets of the terminal are output.

Optimized Database Structure for Projects

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 69


Project editor:


new version. The new version of the EPLAN platform supports a new, improved data-

base structure for projects.

Benefit: The additional data and new functions of the new EPLAN

version can only be supported with the new database

structure.

The consequences for the opening of projects are as follows:

• New projects

New projects are now always created in the new database structure.

It does not matter how the projects were generated (e.g. via project

management, via data transfer, or via the EPLAN Engineering

Center).

• Old projects

In order for old projects to be edited in the new EPLAN version, the

application of the new database structure is absolutely essential for

these projects.

When you open an old project in EPLAN, a prompt is displayed asking

whether you want to convert the project to the new version. If you

confirm this prompt with [Yes], the project is updated. The project is

given the new database structure and is then opened.

This process also creates a backup copy of your project in the project

directory. The name of this backup project includes the old project

name and the conversion date.


70 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If you choose [No], the project retains the old database structure. Al-

though the project is opened it cannot be edited, only viewed. In this

case the project can continue to be opened and edited with old

EPLAN versions. The prompt will appear each time you open the

project in the new EPLAN version.

Warning:

New projects and old projects that have been updated will no longer be

able to be opened with old EPLAN versions.

Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 71

Restoring Deleted Projects from the Recycle Bin

If you now delete a local project, the project file and project directory,

with all the data in them, are moved to the recycle bin of the operating

system. The relevant project may – as is usual with Microsoft – be

restored from the recycle bin.

Benefit: The option of restoring accidentally deleted projects via the

Windows recycle bin provides you with protection against

unintentional loss of project data. Occasional users get up

and running with projects more safely and more quickly.

Here, it does not matter whether a project is deleted in project manage-

ment or by selecting Project > Delete. This also applies to revised EPLAN projects (*.elr). Even when overwriting projects (e.g. when

copying or renaming), the project already in existence will be moved to

the recycle bin.

Note:

If you have deleted a project from a network drive, then you can no

longer restore that project due to the behavior of the operating system.

PDF Export in Archiving Format

72 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

PDF Export in Archiving Format When exporting PDFs it is now also possible to output PDF files in the archiving format PDF/A. This format is a standard for the long-term

archiving of electronic documents in accordance with the ISO 19005-1

standard.

Benefit: The PDF/A archiving format safeguards the long-term display

and use of your documentation.

A new user-specific setting has been added to enable you to output PDF

files in the archiving format. Select Options > Settings > User > Inter-

faces > PDF export. Then in the settings dialog switch to the General

tab and select the new Archiving format PDF/A check box.

If this check box is selected, then the output data is saved in PDF/A-1b

format. In this case, it is not possible to generate a write-protected PDF.

You cannot select the corresponding Read-only check box. The gener-ated PDF files still have the *.pdf extension.

Notes:

• Note that if the Archiving format PDF/A setting is selected, 3D

models and linked documents belonging to the project are not output

on export.

• If they are opened with Adobe Reader 9, such documents are dis-

played by default in PDF/A mode. In this mode you cannot use the

hyperlinks output by EPLAN to navigate within the PDF document. If

PDF/A mode is disabled, then the hyperlinks in the PDF are available

for use again.

Improved Use of Accessories and Accessory Lists

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 73


The management of accessory parts has been optimized with the new

EPLAN version. Individual accessory parts and / or accessory lists can

be assigned to a main part via a separate tab. If accessory parts are

stored for a main part, they too are offered for selection in device selec-

tion.

Benefit: Accessory lists are useful when you are selecting optional

parts. In addition, EPLAN shows you absolutely essential

parts during project planning. In this way, you can assign

accessories more quickly and more accurately.

Managing Accessory Parts in Parts Management

Clear identification of parts as accessories

Accessory parts are now clearly identified in parts management. The part

types "Assembly", "Component", and "Module" are now available for all

parts on the new Accessories tab.


74 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Identification of a part as an accessory is no longer carried out using the

Accessory code property but on the Accessories tab. To clearly

identify a part as an accessory, select the Accessories check box on

this tab. A part for which the check box is deselected is a main part.

You can distinguish between main and accessory parts as follows:

• Accessory part

The Accessories check box is selected. Accessory parts and acces-

sory lists cannot be assigned to this type of part on the Accessories

tab. The table of accessory parts is grayed out accordingly.

• Main part

The Accessories check box is deselected. Both individual accessory

parts and accessory lists can be assigned to a main part on the

Accessories tab.

Displaying accessory parts in parts management

Using field-based filters for accessory parts

The "Accessories" filter scheme is used by default for field-based filters.

If this filter scheme is selected, then the Accessories property <22054>

is used as a filter criterion and only accessory parts are displayed on the

Tree, List and Combination tabs of parts management. In addition to

the accessory parts, the tree view also shows data from the hierarchy

levels "Construction", "Connection points", etc.

If you want to know the main parts for which a particular accessory part

is used, then you can use the new Is used as an accessory property

<22963>. To do this, create a new filter scheme with this property as the

criterion and enter the part number of the accessory in question as the

value.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 75

Note:

You can also access the field-based filter schemes for parts manage-

ment from the part master data navigator and from the Part selection

dialog. Accessory parts in tree view

To make it easier to distinguish accessory parts from "normal" parts in

the parts management and parts selection tree views, etc., you can

adapt the tree configuration accordingly. To do this, select the Accesso-

ries property <22054> as an additional main node when editing the tree

configuration.

Parts for which the Accessories check box has been selected are then

displayed under an Accessories hierarchy level. Parts which have not

been identified in this way are listed under a Main part hierarchy level.

Example:

If the tree configuration has been adapted in this way, a superior

"Product group" hierarchy level is subdivided into the "Main part" and

"Accessories" hierarchy levels. The illustration shows an example of

the subdivision of the "Relays, contactors" product group.


76 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Here the default tree configuration has simply been extended. The

Accessories property was added to the bottom of the properties list in

the Tree configuration – Main nodes dialog.

Using accessory lists

In EPLAN parts management, you can now create various lists for ac-

cessory parts. These accessory lists make it easy to manage alternative

accessory parts. Using these lists you can select a part from a list of

possible alternatives in device selection.

Example:

You want to create an illuminated pushbutton. The main element – a

component – is the rim of the button that is used to fix it in the front of the

enclosure, and a contact that is already screwed on.

The following colored caps are then created in an accessory list:

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

Orange.

This list is defined as a necessary list, i.e., a part must be selected from

this list for the pushbutton to be complete. Creating an accessory list

Accessory lists form their own highest hierarchy level in the parts man-

agement tree view. To create a list of this type, select the "Accessory list"

entry on the Tree tab and then choose Popup menu > New. The two

tabs Accessory list and Parts then appear on the right-hand side of

parts management.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 77

On the Accessory list tab enter a unique name and a description for the

accessory list. This name appears in the parts management tree view

and in the selection of accessory parts on the Accessories tab, for

example. The other two fields, Creator and Last change, are filled out

automatically by EPLAN.

On the Parts tab, choose the accessory parts to be included in the

accessory list. Click the (New) button on the toolbar above the table

to generate a new line. In the Part number field you can select parts in

the same way as for an assembly. To do so, click [...] in this field. The

Part selection dialog opens. Only the previously defined accessory

parts are displayed here. Choose the accessories you wish to include.

Once you have created an accessory list, you can assign this list to a

main part as an accessory.

Exporting and importing accessory lists

You can export and import accessory lists in text format, in XML format, and in CSV format. The new file type CSV for accessory lists is

available for data exchange in CSV format.

If this file type is selected in the Export records dialog, all settings

relating to the part type and trade are grayed out and the data for all

accessory lists are exported. To export the data for a specific accessory

list, highlight it in the "Accessory list" hierarchy level and then select

Popup menu > Export.

Assigning accessories to a main part

To assign an accessory to a main part, click the (New) button on the

Accessories tab. A new row then appears in the accessories table.


78 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Part number / name:

Click [...] in the relevant field in this column to select a part or part variant

from part selection. If the field-based filter "Accessories" is selected, only

defined accessory parts are displayed. You can also access the acces-

sory lists here.

Required:

Select the appropriate check box in this column if the part is to contain a

required accessory part.

Variant:

The corresponding variant number of the part is displayed in this column

for an accessory part. You can overwrite this if required.

Part type:

The Part type ("Component" or "Accessory list") is entered automati-

cally. The field is for information only and is grayed out.

The accessory parts stored here are displayed in the device selection for

the main part and can be selected there as accessory parts.

Data transfer on update of the parts database

If the parts database is in an older version, you are prompted to update

the database on opening parts management. If you answer this prompt

with [Yes], the parts database is updated.

If you click [No], then the parts database is not updated. The parts man-

agement data fields will then remain empty and cannot be edited.

Other program components which also access the data in the parts data-

base (e.g. device selection) will output an equivalent message if the

parts database does not correspond to the current version.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 79

When the database is updated, a data transfer for accessory parts from

the "Relays, contactors" product group takes place in the background. All

parts from this product group which have an accessory code and no

"Coil" type function template are accepted as accessories. This means

that on the new Accessories tab the check box of the same name is

selected for these parts. The parts to which this applies can be seen in

the System messages dialog.

Note:

As automatic recognition of other accessory parts is not possible during

the update, accessory parts from other product groups will be disre-

garded when the data is transferred and will have to be assigned

manually. Accessory code in the list view

To enable you to identify the former accessory parts more easily after a

data transfer, the Accessory code property <22025> can be used in the

column configuration for the parts management list.

If you select the associated check box in the Column configuration

dialog, the "old" accessory code appears in the list. You can then select

the corresponding parts in the list and mark them as accessory parts

using the Accessories tab.

Accessory Parts in Device Selection

The changes made in parts management in relation to accessory parts

and the addition of accessory lists have implications for device selection

too. These are described in the next section.


80 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Changes in the "Device selection" Dialog

To make it easier to distinguish the parts in the list on the left-hand side

from the accessory parts, the name of this list has been changed to Main

parts. This list displays all the parts from the Parts management module

that are suitable for the selected device and for which the Accessories

check box on the Accessories tab is not selected.

If you select a main part in the list on the left-hand side, then all asso-

ciated accessory parts are now displayed on the right-hand side. These

accessory parts must have previously been assigned to the main part in

parts management by entering them in the table on the Accessories tab

there.

The following new features have also been introduced in the Device

selection dialog:

• New device selection

In a new device selection the most recently selected parts are now

highlighted in the Main parts list.

• Devices with the "graphic" function definition

For devices with function definitions from the "Graphic" group, all parts

which have function templates with the "graphic" function definition

are displayed when the device is selected. In addition, all parts

without function templates and accessory parts are displayed. This

allows you to select parts from the "Mechanics" generic product

group, for example.

• Parts without function templates

In the new EPLAN version parts without function templates are now

also displayed in the Selected parts: Functions / templates list.

These may be accessory parts or parts which have been assigned to

the device using part selection, for example.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 81

• Device selection for special functions

Functions which are only needed for defining a device are handled in

a special way in device selection. These include black boxes, PLC

boxes, terminal strip definitions, plug definitions, cable definitions, and

shields.

If device selection is performed for a device which consists only of

such functions and is otherwise empty, then all parts which have at

least one function template for this function are displayed when the

device is selected.

Example:

For example, if you carry out a device selection at an empty PLC box,

only parts which have a function template with the function definition

"PLC box" (plus any number of function templates for the PLC connec-

tion points) are displayed. Parts which only have function templates for

the PLC connection points and none for the PLC box, however, are not

displayed. Benefit: • A device selection can also be carried out now for "empty"

PLC boxes, terminal strip definitions, etc.

• As the most recently selected main parts are highlighted at

the same time, an appropriate accessory part can be se-

lected immediately. This makes device selection faster.

Selecting accessories

In order to be able to transfer an accessory part to the Selected parts:

Functions / templates list, you must first select a part number for the

accessory in question. To do this click in the Selection column in the

appropriate accessory row.

To transfer an accessory part with a part number to the Selected parts:

Functions / templates list (and hence to select it), click as before on the

button (Select accessory part), for example.


82 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

The procedure described above applies if the default settings are

selected for device selection. If the Overwrite old parts with current

selection check box is selected in the Settings: Device selection

dialog, then a main part can be selected in the Device selection dialog

with just one click. A part included in the Selected parts: Functions /

templates list is deleted and replaced with the highlighted main part. The

same applies when selecting an accessory. As soon as a part number is

entered for an accessory, the accessory too is accepted with just one

click. Accessory lists as accessories

If the highlighted accessory is an accessory list, clicking in the Selection

column opens a selection dialog. Here you can select the part number of

the accessory part you require.

Required accessory

If you have defined an accessory part as "required" in parts manage-

ment, then the part number of this accessory is automatically copied to

the Selection column. For "required" accessory lists the part number is

not copied automatically. In the Selection column click on [...] to open a

selection dialog in which you can select the part you require.

When you click [OK] to close device selection, the part numbers for the

selected main and accessory parts are copied to the Parts tab of the

properties dialog.

Note:

If the parts database is in an older version, you are prompted to update

the database on opening device selection. If you click [Yes], the parts

database is updated and you can access new accessory parts in the

device selection. If you click [No], the device selection is still opened

but no accessory parts appear in the Accessories list.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 83

Check Run for Missing, Required Accessory Parts

You can use the new check run 007018 to check devices to determine

whether the required accessory parts assigned to a main part are

present. If a main part is entered on the Parts tab for a device but the

required accessory part is missing, then this message is displayed.

Changes to the Device Selection Settings

Changes have also been made to the Settings: Device selection

dialog, which can be opened from device selection for example using

the [Settings] button.

The Use previous run setting has been renamed and its function has

changed.

Old name: New name:

Use previous run Automatic device selection If the check box for this setting is selected, during device selection the

data for the part entered at the function are compared with the criteria set

for device selection. The Device selection dialog is only opened if a new

device selection is required (because an error such as over-allocation

has been found) or if no part has been entered at the function yet. If on

the other hand the part meets the criteria set for device selection, the

Device selection dialog is not opened. If you are carrying out a device

selection for multiple devices, then the devices to which an appropriate

part has already been assigned are skipped.

If an appropriate part has already been entered at a function but the

technical data for the part is missing (e.g. because the part number was

entered manually or via external editing), then this part data is automati-

cally added during device selection. The data for the function templates

stored at the parts is also transferred.


84 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If the check box is not selected, the Device selection dialog is opened

for all selected devices, regardless of whether an appropriate part has

already been assigned. The automatic addition of technical data for an

existing part is not possible in this case.

Note:

If this check box is selected, the Device selection dialog is opened

under the following conditions:

• No part has been entered at the device.

• The Use available function data check box is selected. The function

data differs from the corresponding parts data.

• The device is under-allocated with functions.

• The Minimize unused functions check box is not selected. The

device is over-allocated with functions.

• The Minimize unused functions check box is selected. The device is

over-allocated with functions, and the number of unused functions

exceeds the value set in the Number of unused functions field. Consider accessories:

This check box no longer exists. Now if you highlight a main part in

device selection, all associated accessory parts are always displayed.

Only consider main function:

This check box is deselected by default. In this case only those devices

that cover all functions, i.e. both the main function and all auxiliary func-

tions, are now offered. Devices that match the selected main function

and have any number of accessories are also offered. (No check is

made as to whether the accessory matches the functions.)

If the check box is selected, then as before all parts that match the

selected main function are offered, regardless of which auxiliary func-

tions are available.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 85

Use available function data:

In the tabs under this check box you can specify which available function

data should be used as selection criteria for device selection.

Some new criteria have been added on the various tabs. For general

devices, for example, the Connection point description, Plug DT, and

Relevant to safety check boxes have been added. The Wire tab is also

new. This new feature has been introduced for the device selection for

wires (see section on page 339).

New "EPLAN Pro Panel" Add-On

86 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


The EPLAN Pro Panel add-on is used for placing electrical engineering

and fluid power devices from the EPLAN project, from the EPLAN parts

management, or from the EPLAN Data Portal, as required. In conjunction

with mechanical components such as cable ducts, mounting rails, mount-

ing panels, or entire enclosures, EPLAN Pro Panel simplifies the con-

struction of complex 3D mounting layouts dramatically.

Benefit: EPLAN Pro Panel makes it easy to construct complex 3D

mounting layouts. The user is supported by means of intelli-

gent placement aids, implicit locked areas, information on

minimum distances, predefined handles, and mounting sur-

faces of the components used – known as EPLAN eTouch

Technology.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 87

Qualified production and mounting diagrams in conformance

to standards can be created automatically on the basis of the

3D model information. The correct display of hidden lines and

associated customizations to the drawing if changes are

made to the 3D structure are both taken into consideration.

Finally, the EPLAN reporting process allows detailed legends

to be added to drawings and order lists and bills of materials

to be created for the pre-cut part, even for variable-length

parts.

Note:

The EPLAN Pro Panel add-on is available as an option for EPLAN

Electric P8 Compact, EPLAN Electric P8 Select, and EPLAN Electric P8

Professional, and for EPLAN Fluid Compact and EPLAN Fluid.

Some mechanical components can have several individually selectable

mounting surfaces, allowing the placement of other items. These include

mounting panels, doors, walls, profiles, and also electrical engineering

and fluid power devices, which are represented by a 3D graphical macro.

Other mechanical components have only an internally defined mounting

surface for devices, which cannot be changed and which are therefore

not shown in the tree view of the layout space navigator. These compo-

nents include mounting rails and pole rails of busbar systems.

You can generate 2D model views of the mounting panels and enclo-

sures mounted in the layout space, and these are saved on project

pages. These model views can include dimensions and other information

and can be used as production documents.

Reports in the form of enclosure legends and bills of material help you

with calculating and planning materials requirements.


88 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The following two new navigators are the central tools for the project

planning of 3D mounting layouts:

• The layout space navigator lists the layout spaces and their struc-

ture.

• The 3D mounting layout navigator lists the intended equipment

items.

More details about the functions of this add-on can be found in "Special

Topics EPLAN Pro Panel" in the complete PDF version of the News (see

page 342). Extensive and more detailed information can also be found in

the online help in the "EPLAN Pro Panel" section.

Note:

Just like pages, layout spaces defined in EPLAN Pro Panel belong to an

EPLAN project. If layout spaces are defined in a project, then they can

be opened in the EPLAN platform and viewed in 3D even without a

license for the EPLAN Pro Panel add-on. In this case you can use the

new Layout space menu option in the menu bar with its corresponding

functions and the layout space navigator. The same applies to EPLAN

View.

Protected Devices

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 89

Protected Devices

Devices can now be protected from being changed in EPLAN. You can

use protected devices to identify already completed parts of a plant, for

example. A graphical editing operation such as "Delete pages", for ex-

ample, will not remove these devices from the project. They are retained

as unplaced devices and continue to be displayed in the navigators and

reports (e.g. parts lists).

Benefit: Protected devices allow you to protect information stored on

items and components in preplanning from being accidentally

deleted. The protected devices are a fixed element of your

project and information stored there is permanently retained.

Multiple entries are avoided. All preplanning information is

available to all project participants for the entire lifetime of the

project, ensuring transparency and high-quality project docu-

mentation.

The new Protected function property <20475> is assigned to protect a

placed or unplaced function. This protection mainly applies to parts that

have been assigned to a function, but it also prevents the function from

being deleted. The protection also extends to any function templates that

may be stored on a part.

It is also possible to assign protection to all functions of a device simulta-

neously, thereby protecting the entire device. You can find out more in

the following sections: "Assigning Protection" on page 90 and "Using

Protected Devices" on page 93.

In addition, the new Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main

function property allows you to edit the entire device when working with

macros and copy functions. More information on this is provided in the

section "Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function"

on page 94.

Protected Devices

90 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

Device groups are not protected as a single entity; each device in a

device group must be protected separately.

Assigning Protection

You can protect individual functions and connections or a complete

device.

Protecting functions or connections

To protect a function, first select it in the graphical editor or in a navigator

dialog. You should select a connection to be protected in the connections

navigator. Then open the appropriate properties dialog and switch to the

first tab (e.g. Plug definition, Connection, etc.).

In the Properties table, display the Protected function property. To do

this, click (New) and select the property in the Property selection

dialog. Select the check box for the Protected function property.

As soon as you select this check box, the function or connection is pro-

tected. In this case, the function can no longer be deleted from the

project. In addition, assigned parts can no longer be used. This means

that device selection or part selection or actions such as "Exchange

part", "Edit part", or "Add part" cannot be executed.

Protected Devices

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 91

Protecting devices

Under Project data > Devices there are now two new menu options,

Activate protection and Deactivate protection, which can be used to

switch protection of one or more selected devices on or off.

Protection for a device can only be switched on or off at a main function

or main terminal. Highlight one or more appropriate functions in the

graphical editor or in a navigator dialog and then select Project data >

Devices > Activate protection.

All functions of the device are then given the property Protected func-

tion. The device or individual functions of the device cannot be deleted.

The parts assigned to the device cannot be changed. In this case too, a

device selection or part selection or actions such as "Exchange part",

"Edit part", or "Add part" are not possible.

Protected Devices

92 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Changing properties

With both protected functions or connections and protected devices, it is

still possible to change properties on the first tab, <Function category>

or Connection.

Tip:

You can extend device protection by defining the check type "Prevent

errors" for the new check run 007019. In this way, you can prevent the

over-allocation of a protected device, the addition of further functions, or

the modification of data transferred to the functions from the parts. Displaying protected devices in the navigators

In the tree view of the navigators protected functions are indicated by an

orange circle. The following icons are displayed for protected functions:

Icon Meaning

Protected, placed main function.

Protected, unplaced main function.

Protected, placed auxiliary function.

Protected, unplaced auxiliary function. Filter for project data

In the navigators, you can also filter by protected or unprotected func-

tions. In the criteria selection for the various filters you can now access

the new property Protected function <20475> for this purpose. The new

property can also be displayed as an additional column in the list view in

the navigators (via Popup menu > Configure columns).

Removing device protection

To remove protection for one or more devices again, highlight the corres-

ponding main functions or main terminals in the graphical editor or in a

navigator dialog and then select Project data > Devices > Deactivate

protection.

Protected Devices

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 93

This removes the device protection. The Protected function property is

deactivated again for all functions of this device.

Using Protected Devices

To use the functions of protected devices when editing schematics, you

must assign the Protected function property to all functions of a device

that you wish to protect. A new check run, number 007021, allows you to

determine whether a device contains both protected and unprotected

functions.

Creating macros / copies of protected devices

If you create a macro or a copy in the schematic of a protected device,

then the Protected function property is stored with the main function in

the macro or copy.

When you insert such a macro or copy, the Protected function property

is inserted along with the main function.

Deleting functions

Protected functions cannot be deleted completely from the project; only

the placement can be deleted. This has the following implications:

• For the graphical editor:

If you delete a placed, protected function in the graphical editor, only

the placement is deleted. This means that after deletion protected

functions remain as unplaced functions in the project and in the bill of

materials.

• For the navigator dialogs:

Placed or unplaced protected functions cannot be deleted in the

navigator dialogs. In the Edit menu and in the Popup menu, the

Delete menu option is disabled for protected functions.

Protected Devices

94 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Using existing functions / assigning functions

The "Use existing" option for functions in the DT selection dialog is

not available for protected functions. Similarly, a device tag or function

cannot be assigned to a protected function in the graphical editor. The

target function must always be an unprotected function.

If on the other hand the protected function is the source for a "Use

existing" or "Assign" action with regard to an unprotected function, the

editable properties of the source function (together with the Protected

function property) are copied to the target function in their entirety and

the source function is then deleted.

Actions in the graphical editor

For actions in the graphical editor, e.g. moving or inserting additional

functions, for which DT adoption would be possible, the original full DT is

not changed by protected functions. If a protected device is affected by

such an action, then the identifying device tags of all components on the

page in question are protected against a DT change.

Managing Unplaced Auxiliary Functions at the Main Function

The new property Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main

function <20476> is now available at main functions. If this property is

activated at a main function, the assigned, unplaced auxiliary functions

are managed together with the main function. For auxiliary functions this

property shows the value of the associated main function.

Benefit: The association between main function and unplaced

auxiliary functions makes handling even complex device

configurations easier and speeds up project planning for

these components.

Protected Devices

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 95

Using this new property you can save all functions of a device to a macro

or a copy, for example, even if only some of the functions are placed in

the schematic. If only the placed auxiliary functions of a device are se-

lected in the schematic, the associated main function is also written to

the macro or the copy as an unplaced function. It makes no difference if

the main function has not been placed or not been selected in the

schematic.

Creating macros / copies

If you have activated this property for a main function and you create a

macro or a copy of this main function in the schematic, then the unplaced

auxiliary functions are also written to the macro or the copy.

On inserting corresponding macros / copies, the unplaced auxiliary func-

tions are inserted along with the main function. The unplaced auxiliary

functions thus behave in exactly the same way as function templates in

these actions.

Renaming functions

If main functions are renamed (e.g. in the properties dialog or by moving

them to a different location box), the unplaced auxiliary functions are

automatically renamed at the same time.

Deleting functions

If the main function is deleted, then the associated unplaced auxiliary

functions are also deleted.

Using existing functions / assigning functions

The behavior of the unplaced auxiliary functions when using existing

functions or assigning functions depends on whether the Manage un-

placed auxiliary functions at the main function property is activated

at the source function and / or at the target function.

Protected Devices

96 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Property activated Behavior on using existing / assigning

at source function and

target function

The source function comes with its unplaced

auxiliary functions. The unplaced auxiliary

functions of the target are deleted along with

the main function.

at the source function

only

The source function comes with its unplaced

auxiliary functions. The unplaced auxiliary

functions of the target are retained.

at the target function

only

The source function does not come with any

unplaced auxiliary functions. The unplaced

auxiliary functions of the target are deleted

along with the main function.

Note:

The Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function

property can be used both separately and in combination with the

Protected function property.

Definition of Multi-line Connections in the "Single Line" Add-on

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 97


Note:

The "Single Line" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric P8

Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery for EPLAN

Electric P8 Professional.

The "Single Line" add-on permits the production and logical manage-

ment of single-line schematics. It substantially simplifies e.g. the creation

and integration of plant overviews in your project documentation.

EPLAN now permits a purely single-line documentation of the schematic.

This can be useful if the connections between the equipment are largely

standardized and therefore no further detail in the form of a multi-line

diagram is necessary (e.g. two modules connected via a serial interface).

If the single-line plan is followed by further project planning stages based

on multi-line connections (reports, e.g. connection lists), you need to

create multi-line connections from the single-line connection schematic.

A new functionality (described next) now lets you define multi-line con-

nections in the single-line diagram.

Benefit: From now on you can use intuitive, single-line diagrams to

plan detailed information for component circuitry. The number

of schematic pages and their complexity is reduced while

detailed documents for production and assembly are avail-

able as usual.


98 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The following preconditions must be in place for this:

• The multi-line functions of the device (e.g. the pins) must be present

in the project as unplaced functions.

• The single-line function of the device (e.g. of the plug connector)

placed in the single-line diagram must be a main function. The

Manage unplaced auxiliary functions at the main function prop-

erty should be activated for this function (see also the corresponding

section on page 94).

You can define the multi-line connections on single-line connection defi-

nition points. To this end the properties dialog for connection definition

points has been amended to include the new Interconnect devices tab.

This tab is the same in structure and functionality as the possibly familiar

Interconnect devices dialog.

Defining Multi-line Connections on a Single-line Connec-tion Point

Once you have created single-line connections in the single-line diagram

by inserting macros / symbols, place a connection definition point on the

desired autoconnecting line in the single-line schematic.

In the Properties (components): Connection definition point dialog,

switch to the Symbol / function data tab and in the drop-down list for

the Representation type field select the "Single-line" setting. The Inter-

connect devices tab is then also displayed in the properties dialog.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 99

Device source:

The device which is the source of the single-line connection is automati-

cally displayed in this field. The device connection points are displayed in

the Connection point column in the table below. In this case only con-

nection points of unplaced multi-line functions are displayed.

Device target:

The device which is the target of the single-line connection is automati-

cally displayed in this field. For the device target again, only connection

points of unplaced multi-line functions are displayed in the Connection

point column.

These two fields do not let you select a device as in the Interconnect

devices dialog.


100 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

If a cable is assigned to the single-line connection (e.g. via a manual

cable definition), the Interconnect devices tab displays information

about this cable (in the fields Cable DT, Cable type, Statistics). You

cannot create a new cable. Generating connections

To generate multi-line connections, select the same number of connec-

tion points in the left-hand and right-hand dialog areas and click on

[Generate connections]. The multi-line connection points are generated

and the targets for the respective connection points displayed in the ta-

ble. Cable connections are generated if a cable is assigned to the single-

line connection, otherwise conductor / wire connections are generated.

Editing connections

As you may be familiar from interconnecting devices, you can edit the

properties of the connections, delete connections, insert insulation, etc.

in the Interconnect devices tab. You can then e.g. use Popup menu >

Properties to edit the properties of a connection and for example define

the connection color and the connection designation. The multi-line con-

nections and your connection data are saved at the connection definition

point.

Copying or moving connection definition points

If a complete schematic section (i.e. the connection definition point and

the relevant graphical symbols) is copied and pasted or moved, all con-

nection data stored at the connection definition point is retained. The

same defined connections are created even if the pasted devices are

renumbered.

If only the connection definition point is copied and pasted or moved to

another existing single-line connection, the connection data is retained

only if this applies to the new connection points.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 101

Benefit: Using this copy function you can duplicate schematic-sec-

tions with minimum effort and you need only define the de-

tailed wiring. In similar system parts, duplicating pre-defined

partial circuits saves you project planning time and increases

the quality of the project documentation in terms of detailed

connection information.

Defined multi-line connections in the connection navigator

In order to recognize the newly-produced multi-line connections in the

connection navigator you need to configure the columns of the navigator

such that the Connection type property <31075> is displayed. The

defined multi-line connections are characterized by the new "Multi-line

(automatic)" connection type.

New messages for defined multi-line connections

The settings for messages and check runs contain several new mes-

sages with which you can check the defined multi-line connections.

The following messages have been added to the "Connections" mes-

sage class:

• Message 005060 "Connection point has a multi-line connection in

both single- and multi-line representation"

• Message 005061 "More than one multi-line connection definition at a

single-line connection"

• Message 005062 "Multi-line connection definition does not match

source / target"

• Message 005063 "Connection point is not contained in the multi-line

connection definition".

Graphical Device Tag List

102 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


Graphical device tag lists are a particular form of device tag list. This

display generally contains the device schematic, references to the

position of the associated functions in the schematic (device cross-

references), and technical and commercial data. This display, which is

common in the power supply industry, is now supported in EPLAN.

Benefit: The EPLAN platform automatically creates the graphical

device tag list display, which is widely used in the power

supply industry, from prepared master data. This automatic

creation means that all reports are always up to date and

always provide a 1:1 reproduction of the configuration and

connection point conditions of the devices. High-quality

device tag lists create transparency and ensure a uniform

level of information between all project participants.

Simple Graphical Device Tag Lists

To obtain the desired display, you need to use a dynamic form for device tag lists (*.f03) and customize it accordingly.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 103

Example:

The illustration below shows an extract from a simple graphical device

tag list.

Customizing forms for device tag lists

We recommend selecting the following properties in the form properties

of the relevant forms and setting them accordingly:

• Combine in a line by <13111>

Here you indicate the form properties for which identical data should

be combined in one line. For example, you could combine the part

numbers of the device for the device tag list.

• Dynamic line adjustment <13009>

You must activate this property in order for a separate line to be

created for each device.

• Align graphics to insertion point (without alignment box)

<13112>

This property applies to graphical device tag lists with overviews.


104 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

It applies to all placeholders for graphics for which the alignment box

is deselected. For symbols inserted by means of such a placeholder,

the handle is positioned on the insertion point of the placeholder text.

This means that the symbol graphic is not adjusted to fit the alignment

box.

Customizing the form's data areas

Next you must prepare the data header area and data area of the dy-

namic form for output. To do this, place placeholder texts in the form's

data header area for the parts data and for the component graphic.

The best way to do this is to split the data header area into two halves –

one half for the technical data and one half with the device symbols –

and separate these two parts using graphical auxiliary lines.

In the data header area of device tag lists you can now also output the

subtotal of subsequent data lines in a summation. Previously this was

only possible for the data area. In this way you can show the total num-

ber of parts for the devices which are listed in the following lines in the

header.

In the data area of the form you insert placeholder texts for output of the

device tag and for display of the placement. The resulting device tag list

then contains references to the placement of the associated function in

the schematic.

Specifying settings

After creating a form for the graphical device tag list, select this form in

the Settings: Output to pages dialog for the Report type "Device tag

list".

Before you generate a report for this report type, you must first ensure

that in the project-specific settings for the part in the Include parts group

box the Device without part number check box is not selected.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 105

You can then generate the graphical device tag list. To do this, select the

"Device tag list" report type in the Select report dialog. The example

above shows one possible result.

Jumping to the schematic

From a graphical device tag list you can jump back to the schematic

again.

To do this, position the cursor on the desired device tag, press the

[Shift] key, and then click the DT in the report page. If only the device is

highlighted, select the menu option Find > Go to > Graphic to jump to

the component for the main function in the schematic.

Graphical Device Tag Lists with Overviews

If you use overviews (internal schematics) for complex devices in your

projects and you want this overview to be retained in the output graphical

device tag list, you must store data for the report in parts management

and define "subforms" for your dynamic form.


106 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

The illustration below shows an extract from a graphical device tag list

with overviews.

Symbols for display in reports

You may need to create the symbols for the overview of the complex

devices first. We recommend that you create a separate symbol library

for this.

Note:

Do not select a basic symbol library in the Symbol library properties

dialog, as the newly created symbols from this library will only be used

for graphical purposes.

When you create the new symbols, in the Symbol properties dialog

select the new list entry "Graphic" for the Symbol type drop-down list.

This gives you the option of inserting macros and image files. The com-

ponents in a macro are converted into graphical objects. You can also

copy components in the schematic and insert them as graphical objects.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 107

Note:

When you use a symbol, remember that there must always be a com-

plete symbol library in the project. For symbols with lots of image files

this can lead to large volumes of data. Check the file sizes of the image

files used. When using symbols with image files, use multiple symbol

libraries if this will enable you to reduce the volume of data for the

project.

Data for reports

The overview symbol that is to be output in the graphical device tag list is

stored by default at the main part of the device in parts management.

(This is the first part on the Parts tab in the properties dialog.)

You can use the new Data for reports tab in parts management for this.

You can also assign an "Identifier for reports" for the part here. Using this

identifier you can specify in the form editor which subform is to be used

for the part (using the Conditional forms function).

This tab is available for the part types "Component", "Assembly", and

"Module".

Identifier for reports:

Select the appropriate identifier for the reports from the drop-down list, or

enter a new identifier manually. You can use this identifier in a dynamic

form to define the subform to be evaluated.


108 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Symbols:

In this table click [...] to open symbol selection and select the symbol to

use to display the device.

Notes:

• Note that identifiers for reports are managed in a single language only

and that the values for the report are case-sensitive.

• Note that only the symbols from the symbol libraries stored in the

project are displayed in symbol selection here.

Conditional forms

Conditional forms allow you to define a "subform" for a dynamic form.

The output of a subform is associated with certain conditions. This pro-

duces a so-called "main form" and the "conditional forms" assigned to it.

The conditional forms must be the same form type as the main form.

For the output of a graphical device tag list this means that both the main form and the subforms must be of the "Device tag list" type (*.f03).

The conditional forms and the conditions are defined in the form editor

using Insert > Conditional forms. The icon for conditional forms is

then attached to the cursor and can be placed by clicking anywhere in

the desired main form. The Conditional forms dialog is then opened.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 109

Form name:

If subforms have already been defined, this list shows their names. Click

(New) to select a suitable form from the Select form dialog.

If the list contains several forms with different conditions, these forms are

displayed in groups and, if the condition changes, separated by a line.

To open a subform, select it in the Form name list and then click on

(Open form). The form is then opened in the form editor and the Condi-

tional forms dialog is closed.

Filter:

In this table, you specify filter criteria for the forms.

In the toolbar for the filters click on (New) to go to the Criteria

selection dialog and select the criterion you require for the conditional

forms. For graphical device tag lists select the property Identifier for

reports <20858>.


110 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

Note that you can also use any other available criterion for conditional

forms. If you use the function definition as a criterion, for example, you

could define subforms for PLC boxes in this way and hence output them

separately in the device tag list. Value:

Enter the comparison value that is to be compared to the selected

property in this column. If the condition specified here is met when the

report is generated, then the associated subform is used. To output

graphical device tag lists enter the corresponding value of the property

Identifier for reports in this column.

For certain other properties or function data (e.g. function definition) you

can click [...] to open a selection dialog and select the value you require.

Editing conditional forms

To edit conditional forms, double-click in the open main form on the

placed icon for the conditional forms.

You cannot insert more than one icon for conditional forms in a main

form.

Generating reports of conditional forms

The subforms selected in the Conditional forms dialog must be dynam-

ic forms too.

If several forms with filter criteria are entered in this dialog, then on

generating reports each object is checked to determine whether the

defined conditions match one or more subforms. All matching forms are

reported in succession (in the order in which they appear in the dialog);

only the dynamic areas "Data header area", "Data area", and "Data

footer area" from the subform are reported.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 111

Form properties, graphics outside areas, and the dynamic areas

"Header", "Conditional area", and "Footer" are disregarded and taken

from the main form.

You can design the subforms in any way you want. If you want to use

full-page symbols for the report, then you must make this area in the

data header area of the subform big enough.

Example:

Example of the design of a subform for a graphical device tag list with a

full-page overview.

Here A and B represent the data header area of the form (A: area con-

taining placeholder texts for the part reference data, B: area in which the

symbol for the report (overview) is output). The data area C is where the

device tag and the function placements are output when the report is

generated.


112 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If the defined conditions do not match any subform when a report is

generated for an object, then this object continues to be reported with the

main form.

Outputting symbols on multiple pages

If several subforms match an object, you can choose to split large

symbols for overviews.

In order to do this you must store several symbols at the part in parts

management. Then create several subforms with placeholder texts for

the various part symbols. For instance, you could place the property

Parts data [1] / Symbol for report [1] on the first subform, the property

Parts data[1] / Symbol for report [2] on the second form, and so on.

On generating reports these forms are used one after another, and if the

symbols are full-page symbols, several pages are generated.

The desired display is thus created automatically for each device and

can be updated at any time.

Symbols for Complex Devices

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 113


Switchgear and protective gear from electrical engineering are often

planned in two different displays. These devices have a large number of

complex functions and are therefore displayed in an overview. By con-

trast, the individual functions in the multi-line schematic are often used in

a distributed manner in the project. Until now, special complex symbols

created by users themselves were used for the individual functions.

To make it easier to display the functions of complex devices in future,

we have included many new "standard symbols" in the new version.

These symbols, consisting only of 1 to 4 connection points, can be

customized with graphics in any way you want. For consistent project

planning in EPLAN the symbols are saved as symbol macros and stored

in parts management.

Benefit: The new standard symbols reduce the number of symbols

needed to display complex devices. This makes creating and

managing symbols for complex devices easier and more effi-

cient. You have much more freedom in the graphical design

of schematics, yet at the same time the logic is standardized.

Example:

The illustration below shows the overview of a complex switchgear.


114 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Procedure

To create an individual function of a complex device, start by selecting

one of our new standard symbols in the Symbol selection dialog (see

"New Device Connection Points") and insert this symbol in the schemat-

ic. Add your choice of graphic to the symbol.

Then set the appropriate function definition at the inserted symbol. If the

complex symbol is to represent an NO contact, for example, then select

a corresponding function definition for the inserted symbol in the Symbol

/ function data tab (e.g. "NO contacts, thermal releases").

Then save the edited symbol as a symbol macro and store it at the

corresponding function template for a part in parts management (see

"Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template" on page 117). The

function definition at the symbol in the symbol macro must match the

function definition of the template at the part. Such a part can then be

inserted as a device in the schematic.

New Device Connection Points

New standard symbols have been provided for creating symbol macros. In the SPECIAL symbol library under Electrical engineering//

Electrical engineering special function// Device connec-

tion point// Device connection point, variable you can select

many new device connection points with 2, 3, and 4 connection points.

The following device connection point types are available:

• Static device connection points:

In these device connection points all connection points are a fixed

distance apart and point in the same direction.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 115

Example:

The illustration below shows the static device connection points S2DCP

(variant F), S3DCP (variant D), and S4DCP (variant F).

• Dynamic device connection points:

In these device connection points the connections point in opposite

directions.

Example:

The illustration below shows the dynamic device connection points D2DCP, D3DCP, and D4DCP (all variant A).


116 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If you have selected a dynamic device connection point, then the first

click defines the insertion point and the position of the first connection

point. The other connection points remain attached to the cursor and can

be placed by pointing the mouse at a selection area. A second click then

defines the position of these connection points.

All these device connection points have the function definition "Device

connection point, variable".

New device connection points with just one connection point

In addition, the following four symbols (with plugs) have been added to

the existing device connection points with just one connection point:

• DCPP3

• DCPPJIC

• DCPPO

• DCPPOJIC.

So device connection points are now available in all connection point

variants with one to four connection points.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 117

Storing a Symbol Macro at the Function Template

To enable the created symbol macros to be stored at the function tem-

plates in parts management, on the Function templates tab the Symbol

macro column has been added to the Device selection (function

templates) table.

Click [...] to go to the Select macro dialog and select the desired symbol

macro. Selecting a symbol macro deletes the content of the Symbol cell

and vice versa.

If a corresponding part is entered as a device, then the symbol macros

stored at the function templates are used on placement. If this is done

using the menu options Insert > Device, then you can browse through

the functions (templates) using the [N] key and select the one you want.

Channel-oriented Operation in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on

118 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


Note:

The "PLC & Bus Extension" is an optional add-on for EPLAN Electric P8



Channel-oriented operation allows fast assigning of PLC connection

points from the navigator to the placed functions in the schematic.

Assignment via a channel display in the tree is thereby facilitated.

Benefit: Channel-oriented operation of the PLC connection points sig-

nificantly simplifies and speeds up editing of the PLC connec-

tion points. You will see immediately which connection points

belong with a channel, and you can edit the connection points

together.

The following sections deal with channel display in the tree, and with a

possible procedure:

• "Improved Views in the PLC Navigator" on page 119

• "Inserting PLC Cards" on page 123

• "Macro Placement" on page 123

• "Assigning Functions" on page 124.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 119

Improved Views in the PLC Navigator

The tree view in the PLC navigator has been extended to add the

Channel-oriented view so that channels can be displayed. In addition,

the two views mentioned previously have been renamed as follows:

Old name: New name:

Schematic-oriented DT-oriented

PLC-oriented Address-oriented In addition, the address-oriented view has been adapted to fit with the

other views and now also displays PLC boxes and other PLC data.

This means that all PLC data present in the project is now displayed in

all views, i.e. PLC boxes, all PLC connection points and function tem-

plates. Thus empty PLC boxes are also displayed, such as PLC boxes

which contain only function templates.

If you want to restrict the display to specific data, this can be done by

means of a filter.

Example:

If you want to display just the I/O connection points which have a PLC

address in the address-oriented view as in the earlier versions, you need to filter by the criterion Properties > PLC address.

To do this, go to the PLC - <project name> dialog, click [...] next to the

Filter field, and specify the following settings in the Filter dialog:

Active Negated Criterion Operator Value

PLC address <>

If only I/O connection points are displayed in the address-oriented view

(i.e. also I/O connection points without addresses), filter by the function group PLC connection point, I/O, 1 connection point.


120 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

To do this, specify the following settings in the Filter dialog:

Active Negated Criterion Operator Value

Function group = PLC connection point,

I/O, 1 connection point The following views are now available in the popup menu in the PLC

navigator:

• DT-oriented: The PLC data is ordered by their device tags according

to the project structure.

• Address-oriented: The PLC data is arranged by addresses within the

project structure.

That is, the I/O connection points are displayed under the PLC ad-

dress. The associated power supplies are only also displayed under

the PLC address if the corresponding PLC address is entered at the

power supply. In addition, the PLC boxes and connection points are

grouped under the relevant CPU if this property is entered at the

associated PLC box.

• Channel-oriented: The PLC data is ordered by channel within the

project structure (see the following section on page 120).

Channel display in the PLC navigator

To switch to channel-oriented view, select the menu path Popup menu >

View > Channel-oriented in the navigator tree.

All the PLC connection points belonging to a channel are summarized

and displayed under the channel ( icon). That is, the I/O connection

points and associated power supplies are displayed under the channel

designation. The icon for the channel shows whether there is a safety-

relevant connection below. In addition, the preceding icon indicates

whether the channel contains unplaced I/O connection points.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 121

PLC connection points which do not have a channel designation which

has been either determined or manually input will be arranged according

to their DT.

The following icons are some of the ones displayed in the PLC navigator

tree view:

Icon Icon Meaning

(Unplaced) (Placed)

Device

PLC box (main function with representation

type "Multi-line" or "P&I diagram")

Superimposed PLC box (main function)

Channel

Channel with safety-relevant connection point

Function template

Multi-line auxiliary function (here: PLC

connection point)

Superimposed function (here: multi-line PLC

connection point)


122 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

The illustration below shows the channel-oriented view for the sample project EPLAN-DEMO.

Here, the tree structure level has been opened with the channel Out0 for

the PLC box with the DT A7 and a PLC connection point for Out1 has

been set to Relevant to safety.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 123

Inserting PLC Cards

Before actual assigning, first add the PLC card that you want to use in

the project as a device to the PLC navigator (via Popup menu > New

device). If the part selected has only function templates and not macros,

a PLC box will be generated which only contains function templates. If,

on the other hand, the part also has macros, the function templates will

be superimposed via the multi-line macros from the macro file registered

for the part.

Note:

If you would like to assign the functions individually, it is wise to use parts

which contain no part macros so that no superimposed functions arise.

DT inheriting is taken into account during assigning. If you assign a sin-

gle function, you may find that additional, as yet not assigned PLC con-

nection points inherit the DT from this function. These PLC connection

points then appear twice under the channel – as an unplaced function

with an inherited DT ( icon), and as a placed, superimposed function

( icon). As soon as all PLC connection points have been assigned, on-

ly placed, superimposed functions will be displayed.

Macro Placement

With the procedure described here, the next thing you will do is insert the

multi-line macros in the schematic. These serve as target functions for

assigning. The macros should include only PLC connection points (with-

out PLC boxes) to PLC functions where possible, as only PLC connec-

tion points will be assigned from channel-oriented view during assigning.

If the macros do indeed include PLC boxes, these must not have a part

as they will otherwise represent devices themselves, i.e., their PLC con-

nection points have already been assigned automatically.


124 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tip:

When placing the macros, use the Number with flag "?" mode in order

to identify PLC target functions. All other functions included in the macro

(wiring of the PLC connection points) can be subsequently numbered

later using DT numbering.

Assigning Functions

Once the macros have been placed, assign the unplaced functions or

PLC card function templates to the component. To do this, mark the

channel in the PLC navigator and select the Popup menu > Assign

menu item. All PLC connection point functions or function templates be-

longing to the channel marked can be assigned individually to the PLC

connection points placed in the schematic.

As soon as a channel contains a placed multi-line I/O connection point

through assigning, the channel will no longer be identified in the PLC

navigator via the additional icon for unplaced functions which pre-

cedes the channel. Moreover, the icon for the target functions in the

schematic is no longer displayed in the PLC navigator as the original

function of the PLC connection point is replaced by the unplaced func-

tion.

Note:

During assigning, a check is carried out to find out whether the unplaced

function or the function template (source function) has the same function

group as the PLC connection point in the schematic (target function). If

the function groups of source and target function do not match, a mes-

sage is displayed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 125

Tips:

• Simultaneous assigning of all functions / function templates belonging

to a channel is possible via a multiple choice of target functions. To do

this, after selecting the Assign menu item click in the schematic and

draw a frame around the required PLC connection points. Another

option is to group the PLC connection points in the schematic prior to

assigning (one group per channel).

The unplaced functions or function templates are then assigned in the

order in which they are displayed in the PLC navigator. The appropri-

ate target functions are sought in the schematic according to their

graphic sequence.

• You can also assign a function using drag & drop, by holding down

the key combination [Ctrl] + [Shift] and dragging the desired function

from the PLC navigator to the target function in the schematic.

Taking account of the representation type

If the selection in the PLC navigator contains only one representation

type for the source function, this will be assigned to the appropriate

target function (with the same function definition) independently of the

representation type. The target function retains its representation type.

If you have selected several representation types of a specific source

function in the PLC navigator, the function will be assigned which has the

same representation type as the appropriate target function. If there is no

identical representation type for appropriate source or target functions

(with the same function definition), an appropriate source function will be

selected using the sequence for global editing.

With this type of multiple choice, the representation type of the function

which is attached to the cursor will be displayed by means of additional

text on the cursor. Use [Tab] to toggle between the representation types.


126 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Using existing PLC connection points blockwise

As an alternative to assigning, you can also use the Use existing PLC

connection points blockwise action to allocate the PLC connection

points. To do this, first mark the target functions in the schematic and

then select the Project data > PLC > Use connection points block-

wise menu items.

As part of the extensions noted previously, the dialogs for blockwise use

of existing data now also display the Channel designation (automatic)

column by default. In addition, in the list representation of the Select

PLC connection points to place them blockwise dialog, it is possible

to configure the dialog columns and select the Channel designation

(automatic) property as the column header.

New "Net Based Wiring" Add-on Module

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 127


Note:

The "Net Based Wiring" add-on is available for EPLAN Electric P8

Professional as an optional extra.

The order in which components are connected in EPLAN Electric P8 is

defined by default as soon as the connections are drawn. This is done

through the choice of the appropriate connection symbol (T-node,

jumper, double junction, etc.), in which the logic model for the target

specification is stored.

Net-based connections in the new add-on module "Net Based Wiring"

enable a schematic to be created without having to immediately define

how the connections are arranged. EPLAN notes the internal flow of the

connections, irrespective of how they are graphically represented in the

schematic.

Benefit: • You can generate the schematic without taking into ac-

count the precise wiring. When the spatial arrangement of

the components and their optimal wiring is clarified, this

information can be added as required.

• Connections can easily be represented in the schematic

even in the case of complex wiring sequences. The plans

become more legible, particularly with potentials over more

than one page which are distributed throughout the entire

project.

• Simple net connections in the schematic and detailed

reports of the connections via connection lists can also

meet the requirements of the new machine guideline in

respect of clear, readily legible machinery / plant docu-

mentation with minimal effort.


128 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

The following illustrations clarify how the connections in the schematic

are represented simply and clearly, even in the case of a complex wiring

sequence, by using net-based connections.

Prior progression of the autoconnecting lines for the connections of a

potential with target specification.

New progression of the autoconnecting lines for a net with net-based connections. The connections defined at the net definition point NBW are

also shown in the illustration.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 129

Nets with Net-based Connections

In EPLAN Electric P8, it is now possible to define nets with net-based

connections. Unlike a "normal" net with automatic connections, the con-

nection sequence within the net here is not determined via the connec-

tion symbols in the schematic; it must be specified later in the properties

dialog of the associated net definition point.

The following is possible for nets with net-based connections:

• Working methods employing both target specification and net-based

connections can be mixed within a project.

• A mixture of connections with target specification and net-based

connections can also occur within a net.

• In net-based connections, connectors are always drawn as connec-

tion points.

• Net-based connections are defined using a net definition point. Which

connection points of the net are connected to each other is stored in

the net definition point.

• The connections and their order can be retrospectively edited without

having to modify the drawing.

• Net-based connections can be automatically designated in the same

way as normal connections using connection numbering.

• Interruption points enable net-based connections to be continued on

different pages.

• The connection properties of net-based connections can also be

modified using "external editing". The connection itself cannot be

modified using "external editing".

• Net-based connections are also taken into account on data transfer

from EPLAN 21 (see the relevant section on page 180).


130 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

Cable definition lines can not be used for net-based connections. The

connections under a cable definition line are not recognized as cable

conductors in a net with net-based connections.

Defining net-based connections

Net-based connections are defined using a net definition point. Which

connection points of the net are connected to each other is stored in the

net definition point. The connection points are identified by a connection

point ID that is unique within the net. The IDs are automatically assigned

but can be changed manually. These IDs are also copied when a net is

copied, so the connections stored in the net definition point are retained.

Example:

In a "normal" net with automatic connections, the potential L1 is con-

nected with the four fuses (-F1 to -F4). For the connection sequence

at the T-nodes, the 1st target right, 2nd target below directions have

been defined.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 131

The following four connections are shown in the connections navigator:

Connection (source) Connection (target)

L1 -F1:1

L1 -F2:1

L1 -F3:1

L1 -F4:1

At the T-nodes, the Specify targets check box is unchecked and a net definition point with the net name N1 is added.

After defining the net connections in the net definition point, the follow-

ing connections appear for the five connection points:

Connection point ID Connection (source) Connection (target)

L1 1 L1 -F1:1

-F1:1 2 -F1:1 -F2:1

-F2:1 3 -F2:1 -F3:1

-F3:1 4 -F3:1 -F4:1

-F4:1 5

To achieve a complete net, the connection points can also be con-

nected with one another in different sequences.


132 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

In practice, the sequence of the relay is compliant with the optimized

wiring sequence (for example) in the enclosure.

Disabling target specification of connection symbols

If you want to define a net in a project in which only net-based connec-

tions appear, or only partially net-based connections appear, you have

to disable target specification of the associated connection symbols

(T-nodes, jumpers, double junctions) to do this. For this, you have the

following two options:

• Disable target specification manually:

To disable target specification at an individual connection symbol

with a branch option, the relevant properties dialogs now control the

Specify targets check box.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 133

If this check box is deactivated, the target order for the relevant con-

nector will not be evaluated and the connector will be shown as a

point. In this case the connections are not automatically generated

and have to be specified manually.

If the Specify targets check box is selected, EPLAN automatically

generates connections.

• Disable target specification by default:

To do this, go via Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing >

Connection symbols to the Settings: Connection symbols dialog

and select the new Deactivate 'Specify targets' property when

inserting a net definition point check box.

If this is the case, the Specify targets property in the corresponding

connection symbols is deselected when net definition points are

inserted.

Note:

If you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on module,

the Specify targets check box will normally not be displayed. If you

open a project in this instance in which this check box has been dese-

lected for a connection symbol, the check box still appears in the dialog

but you cannot cancel deactivation of the target specification.

Specifying Nets with Net-based Connections

To define a net with net-based connections, you first have to insert a net

definition point.

Inserting net definition points

Using a net definition point, you can assign properties to the connection

running via this point (such as Connection designation, Cross-section

/ diameter, etc.) and give the net in question a unique name.


134 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

To do this, select the Insert > Net definition point menu items. The

symbol for the net definition point hangs on the cursor. Click in the sche-

matic to place the net definition point. The Properties (components):

Net definition point dialog is opened.

Net name:

Enter the name of the net defined via the net definition point. The new EPLAN410, Property placement.Net names layer is used to display

the net name.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 135

Notes:

• Remember that the net name must be unique within a project. To

check this, you can use the new message 005054 in the check runs.

• No potentials and signals can be defined at net definition points. The

potentials and signals must be defined via a potential definition point

or a potential connection point in the project.

• The net has a higher priority than the signal or the potential. For for-

warding properties to a connection, this means that the properties

stored in a net definition point take precedence over the properties

stored in a potential definition point.

Tip:

As an alternative to insertion via the menu item, you can also insert a

net definition point via a symbol button. To do this, click the (Net defi-

nition point) button on the Connections toolbar. Then on the Net connections tab, define the connections within the net.

Defining daisy chains

A net with net-based connections will not be complete until all connection

points have been connected. This takes place at the net definition point

on the Net connections tab. This generates a list of connection points

which are connected to one another pairwise in sequence – a so-called

"daisy chain".

In the Properties (components): Net definition point dialog, select the

Net connections tab. The Connection points table displays all the con-

nection points in the net. Select Popup menu > Create daisy chain.

Click the connection point at which the daisy chain is to begin. The con-

nection point is shown in the Connections table.


136 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Click in sequence on the other connection points that are to be included

in the daisy chain. The connection points in the daisy chain are shown in

the Connections table. Select Popup menu > End daisy chain. A

horizontal line is added to the Connections table to indicate that the

daisy chain is complete.

If not all connection points are connected with one another, you can re-

peat this action in order to define another daisy chain. Click [Apply] to

save the defined daisy chains.

Note:

If a net has more than one daisy chain, these must also be intercon-

nected in order to create a complete net.

Tips:

• As an alternative to creating and ending daisy chains via the popup

menu, you can also click the (Create daisy chain) and (End

daisy chain) button in the Connection points table.

• Double-clicking on a connection point in the Connection points table

starts a new daisy chain. If a daisy chain has already begun, double-

clicking ends the daisy chain so begun.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 137

Connection points:

All connection points for the net are shown in this table.

Selecting the popup menu item Properties or (Edit) allows you to

change the connection point ID (the property ID for net-based connec-

tions). Using the popup menu item Change target order, it is also

possible to change the order of the targets for the selected connection

point.

Connections:

In this table, each daisy chain is displayed as a list of connection points.

You can also display and edit the properties of the connections.

Double-clicking on the popup menu item Properties or the (Edit)

button here opens the properties dialog for the connection between the

connection point selected and the connection point following this in the

list.

Clicking on (Delete) removes a selected connection point. To move

selected connection points, use the (Move up / Move down) but-

tons. All of these actions also change the connections.

Connection sources and targets

The first connection point of a daisy chain is the source of the first con-

nection. The second connection point of the daisy chain is the target of

the first connection. Similarly, the second connection point in the daisy

chain is the source of the second connection, and the third connection

point is the target of this connection. The same applies to all further con-

nections in a daisy chain. You can modify the order of the source and

target of a connection stored in a net definition point by activating the

Exchange source and target property in the properties dialog for that

connection.


138 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Other connections

You can use the Other connections popup menu item of the Connec-

tions table to open a subsequent dialog. Here, the other connections for

this net are displayed that are not stored in the net definition point. These

include connections that are defined using connectors with target specifi-

cation or via other net definition points.

Tip:

You can select the complete daisy chain by clicking on the separator

underneath it. This allows you to move the entire daisy chain using the

arrow buttons, for example, or to delete it using the button.

Displaying Nets and Net-based Connections

Note:

Net-based connections, defined nets, and net tracking are displayed

even if you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on

module. In this instance, the properties dialog of a net definition point

already inserted in the project can in fact be opened, but the net

definition cannot be edited.

Net-based connections in the connections navigator

The connections stored in the net definition point are not immediately

visible in the connections navigator. Connections are not generated from

the information contained in the net definition point until the connections

are updated. Only then will these connections be displayed in the con-

nections navigator.

Displaying nets in the potential navigator

The nets defined in a project are displayed – in addition to the defined

potentials and signals – in the tree and list view of the potential naviga-

tor.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 139

Tree view

In this view, a defined net and its net name are displayed under the

tree structure levels "Potential" and "Signal". A tree structure level under

this shows the net definition points with their placement.

The following icons are displayed in the tree view of the potential naviga-

tor:

Icon Meaning

Identifies the project level. This icon is only displayed when

several projects are open.

Potential

Signal

Placed potential definition point

Net

Placed net definition point

Example:

The illustration below clarifies the representation of a net (here with the net name N1) and net definition point in the tree view of the potential

navigator.


140 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

List view

In this view, the net name is also shown as a column header in addition

to the potential and signal names and for placement.

When selecting a net name in tree or list, the corresponding net definition

point is displayed in an opened preview (Graphical preview dialog,

Property preview dialog).

Note:

Nets without net names or net definitions are not displayed in the

potential navigator.

Highlighting nets

In addition to potentials or signals, nets can now also be temporarily

highlighted in color to allow a quick overview of their extent. The cur-

rently selected net is then colored according to the colors you have

defined in the user settings.

Benefit: The color identification allows you to quickly check selected

nets in the graphical editor. This provides you with security

when defining net-based connections and enhances the

quality of your work results.

Select View > Net tracking. Click a connection symbol or connection

line. EPLAN searches for the associated net and colors this completely

(i.e., also over page boundaries). Click another connection to remove the

highlighting of the first net and color the net associated with this connec-

tion. Again select the View > Net tracking menu items to remove the

highlighting of the net.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 141

Notes:

• The color settings for potential, signal and net tracking are defined

jointly under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > 2D

in the same Track potential drop-down list.

• Color highlights for potentials, signals, or nets can only be removed

when the connections are active.

• Once potential, signal or net tracking has been terminated by pressing

[Esc] or selecting Popup menu > Cancel action, tracking has to be

disabled and enabled again (e.g. by selecting View > Net tracking)

before you can remove the color highlights from a potential / signal /

net again.

Tip:

You can also enable and disable net tracking by clicking on the

(Net tracking) button in the View toolbar.

Editing Nets with Net-based Connections

Connecting nets

In EPLAN, a net is a subset of a signal. It consists of connection points

that are connected directly to each other and the connections between

these connection points.

Normally, a net in the graphical editor ends at a function. Most functions

have net isolation as standard. In the new version, you now have the

option of identifying a function (e.g. a terminal) as "net-connecting" and

thereby extending a net. Potential connection points are always net-

connecting.


142 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

For this purpose, the new Net-connecting check box is available in the

properties dialog for components in the Symbol / function data tab in

the Function data (logic) group box. Select this check box if the func-

tion is to be net-connecting.

Example:

It may sometimes be necessary to continue a net via a terminal or a pin.

If, for example, the Net-connecting property is assigned to the terminal -X100, the lamps -H10 and -H20 will be part of the same net and can be

connected to each other using a net-based connection.

Modifying nets

The connections stored in the net definition point are managed using the

connection point ID (ID for net-based connections property).

Renaming a function

If functions within the net are renamed, the connections are retained, as

the connection point IDs will not have changed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 143

Removing a function from a net

If a function is deleted from a net, its connection points and the connec-

tions to these remain stored at the net definition point but will be flagged

as invalid in the Connections table.

The invalid connections must then be deleted – either manually in the

properties dialog of the net definition point or automatically when the

project is compressed. For this, the new Remove invalid connections

setting is available in the Settings: Compression dialog under Net

definition points.

Replacing a deleted function

If you insert a new function in a net and assign the same connection

point IDs as those of the previously deleted function to the connection

points, the connections are retained and lead to the new function. If the

new function has different connection point IDs, these connection points

will not be connected and the net will be incomplete.

Further editing options and examples are provided in the EPLAN online

help. For more information, see the section entitled "Net-based connec-

tions".

Net-based connection reports

Net-based connections can also be taken into account in the reports. On

the one hand, you have the option of placing the connection property Net

name <33007> as placeholder text in various forms (e.g. connection list,

parts list, etc.).

Secondly, net-based connections can be output in reports sorted by nets

and daisy chains. The following new properties can be used for this

purpose:

• Net index <31076>: Identifies the net in the case of net-based

connections.


144 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• Daisy chain index <31077>: Identifies the daisy chain within a net in

the case of net-based connections.

• Connection index <31078>: Identifies the connections within a daisy

chain in the case of net-based connections.

In addition, the Connection type property <31075> can be used as a

filter criterion in reports so that only connections with the value "net-

based" are output.

Correcting connections

To be able to automatically correct errors which may occur when working

with net definition points, the correction run for connections has been

extended.

Now, when you select the menu path Project data > Connections >

Correct, the new Correct connections dialog will open in place of the

previous prompt. For correction of net definition points, the following

check boxes are available here:

Merge net definition points:

If this check box is activated, a number of net definition points within a

network are combined to form a single net definition point. The remaining

net definition point contains all the connections and properties that were

defined in the other net definition points. In the event of a conflict, the

first graphical net definition point "wins".

Remove superfluous net definition points:

If this check box is activated, the net definition points that are not re-

quired to define the connections are removed. This will be the case, for

instance, if the connections of the net are defined using connectors with

target specification. If additional properties are stored in the net definition

point, a connection definition point with identical properties is placed here

instead of the net definition point.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 145

Note:

If you do not have a license for the "Net Based Wiring" add-on module,

the Correct connections dialog will not be displayed. In this instance,

the Merge connection definition points action is directly executed after

a prompt.

New messages for net-based connections

To check nets with net-based connections, a number of new messages

is available to you in the settings for messages and error checking. The

following messages have been added to the "Connections" message

class:

• Message 005046 "Incomplete net"

• Message 005047 "Net definition point contains incomplete

connections"

• Message 005048 "Net contains connection symbols with the 'Specify

targets' property"

• Message 005049 "More than one net definition point on a net"

• Message 005050 "Duplicate ID for net-based connections within a net

(%1!s!)"

• Message 005054 "Different nets with identical net name (%1!s!)"

• Message 005055 "Several signal definitions on one signal"

• Message 005056 "Conflict between net and potential or signal"

• Message 005057 "Net definition point with incorrect potential"

• Message 005058 "Net definition point with incorrect signal".

New Features in EPLAN Mechatronic Integration

146 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


The new EPLAN EMI technology (EPLAN Mechatronic Integration) al-

lows mechanical and automation engineering to access common design

data. The basis for this is the shared storage of EPLAN data and design

data from AutoCAD Inventor in the EPLAN platform. This makes it possi-

ble to edit a project in parallel in different engineering disciplines, allow-

ing a mechatronic workflow to be displayed.

Benefit: EPLAN EMI allows data exchange between the different

engineering disciplines. Information from one team can also

be used "across the disciplines" by other teams involved

in the design process. This two-directional data exchange

accelerates the design process. It helps to avoid errors and

inconsistencies, reinforces information exchange between

departments, improves the quality of documentation, and

encourages collaboration between departments.

EPLAN EMI Add-ons

EPLAN Mechatronic Integration now provides the following add-ons:

• EPLAN EMI Collaboration for AutoCAD Inventor:

This module enables AutoCAD Inventor to be connected to the

EPLAN platform at item level. It allows the user to synchronize item

lists in both directions and import as yet unplaced mechatronic items

directly into their planning environment.

• EPLAN EMI Cabling for AutoCAD Inventor:

This module allows cable data to be exchanged between EPLAN

Electric P8 and AutoCAD Inventor. The electrical engineer can use

the 3D model, the virtual prototype, to calculate cable lengths and

therefore create the production documents for cabling in EPLAN

Electric P8 early in the project.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 147

• EPLAN EMI Piping for AutoCAD Inventor:

Fluid power, instrumentation & control and process engineers can use

this module to import the length and diameter of pipes and tubes into

EPLAN Fluid and / or EPLAN PPE from the 3D model in AutoCAD

Inventor.

Note:

The EPLAN EMI add-ons are available as an option for EPLAN Electric

P8 Professional, EPLAN Fluid, and EPLAN PPE.

Importing Mechanical Data

To import model data from Mechanics into the EPLAN platform you

must first open the mechatronics navigator using Project data > Mecha-

tronics > Navigator. Then select Popup menu > Import mechanical

model. In the next dialog, open the AutoCAD Inventor file to be imported

using the [Open] button.

When the mechanical model has been imported into the project, the

mechatronic data is displayed in the mechatronics navigator. The model

can be displayed in the 3D view of the EPLAN platform. The mechanical

model can also be placed on a project page as a model view (see the

section "Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI" on page 154).

Mechatronics Navigator

When the mechanical model has been imported into the project, the data

is displayed in the mechatronics navigator. This navigator visualizes the

essential mechatronics data which is used in both disciplines (EPLAN

platform and AutoCAD Inventor).


148 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tree view

In the tree view of the navigator, all the components from the 3D model

are displayed in a hierarchical structure. The tree structure reflects the

assembly topology of Inventor's assembly view.

The icons displayed in the tree view of the mechatronics navigator

include the following:

Icon Meaning

EPLAN project

Inventor file (assembly)

Inventor file (item)

General fluid item

General electrical engineering item

Pipe / tube

Inventor item, mechanical

Inventor assembly, mechanical

Cable

Terminal

Note:

Please note that the icons shown here for the Inventor files (assemblies *.iam, items *.ipt) may differ from the icons displayed in your mecha-

tronics navigator. The icons displayed here depend on which symbols

are linked to the relevant file extensions in your operating system.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 149

Recognizing assignment status

The different status icons are also used to show whether an item is being

used in the 3D model and synchronously in the relevant schematic, is not

in either the model or the schematic, or is redundant.

In this document, items which are used synchronously will be referred to

as "linked", while items which only appear in one of the disciplines and

are missing (as yet) in the corresponding area will be referred to as "not

linked". It is also possible to reject links in order to document that a sug-

gested link is not wanted. This is the case, for example, if there is no

need to import a mechanics item into the automation engineering

schematic.

The following icons are available:

Icon Meaning

"Not linked mechanics": The mechanical item can / must be

linked to a schematic object, but the link has not yet been

made.

"Not linked schematic": The schematic object can / must be

linked to a mechanical item, but the link cannot be made

because the mechanical item is missing.

"Linked": The mechanical item has been assigned to a

schematic object.

"Link rejected".

New filtering options in the navigator

In the mechatronics navigator you also have the option of restricting the

amount of data displayed by using a filter.

You can use the filters that are available for selection in the Filter drop-

down list to set up the navigator so that each editor only sees the compo-

nents that are relevant to his specialist area.


150 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The following filters are available as standard:

• "Processing list":

This filter can be used to provide an overview of all the items that are

relevant to the schematic. Their status may be "Linked", "Not linked",

or "Rejected".

• "Electrical engineering", "Fluid power", and "PPE":

With this filter, only the mechanics items that are relevant to the cor-

responding trade are displayed in the navigator; all other components

are hidden. The components that have been filtered out are displayed

transparently in 3D display and cannot be selected.

• "Information":

With this filter, only components which contain information for tracking

are displayed.

• "Not linked", "Outdated mechanical models", and "Linked":

These filter options are used to monitor the level of assignment be-

tween the mechanical model and the schematic.

Updating the mechanical model

You can use Popup > Check for more up-to-date data to check that all

the models loaded are up to date. If discrepancies are found, the models

are selected accordingly.

To update the data in the mechanical model, select Popup menu >

Update mechanical model. All the changed 3D components are then

reloaded for the selected 3D model.

The components and their assignments to the devices in the schematic

are also updated. The note "Data updated" is automatically entered in

the Information dialog for the relevant main assembly so that all the

editors working on the project can see that the status of the model has

changed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 151

Assigning data

The data in the mechatronic navigator initially has no references to the

devices in the corresponding EPLAN project. The data for the different

disciplines must be assigned to one another.

Assigning from the device navigator

In this version, if you want to assign mechatronics data in the mechatron-

ics navigator you must first select this data in the device navigator. Then

press [Ctrl] + [Shift] and drag the function required to a suitable com-

ponent in the mechatronics navigator using drag & drop. If the objects

assigned do not match, EPLAN will display a message to this effect.

Assigning and placing from the mechatronics navigator

In this version, you also have the option of assigning mechatronics items

to a suitable object in the schematic from the mechatronics navigator. To

do this, select the relevant model, press [Ctrl] + [Shift], and drag it to the

component in the schematic using drag & drop. You can also use the

Assign popup menu item. If the objects assigned do not match, EPLAN

will display a message to this effect.

To place an object which is not yet in the schematic from the mecha-

tronics navigator, select Place from the popup menu or drag it into the

schematic using drag & drop.

Transfering data to Inventor

Unlinked schematic objects (icon: ) are objects that you have dragged

into the mechatronics navigator from the schematic but which do not yet

have the appropriate mechanics items / assemblies in the 3D model.

Under certain conditions, you can transfer these unlinked schematic

objects to Inventor.


152 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

In order to do this, an Inventor assembly or an Inventor item must be

specified at the part of this schematic object. You can enter a corres-

ponding Inventor construction file in the 3D macro field in parts manage-

ment, on the Mounting data tab.

To transfer 3D data, select the unlinked model, then select Popup menu

> Place in Inventor.

Tip:

If the conditions listed above have been met, the mechanical model for

this type of part can be dragged directly into the open Inventor using

drag & drop and placed in an assembly there.

Inserting a device tag into Inventor drawings

The mechatronics navigator offers the Popup menu > Insert device

into drawing functionality for inserting device tags into Inventor draw-

ings.

Select this menu item, then in the next dialog, select the Inventor draw-ing (*.idw) for the imported mechanical model into which the device

tags are to be written. The default for the file to be opened is the file

name of the associated main assembly. When you click [Open], the

selected file is opened and all the components of the main assemblies

which have been given a device tag by means of assignment from the

schematic are found in the drawing.

If device tags are present, a guide line text with the DT entry is gener-

ated and placed in the drawing close to the drawing component for each

device tag found. Intersections with other drawing elements are not

taken into account.

If the EMI model does not contain any assigned device tags, the process

is canceled with an appropriate message.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 153

Creating and reading information

A new information dialog gives you the option of saving texts at Inventor

components, e.g. to make additional information available to other

editors (mechanics, electrical engineering, fluid power, etc.).

To open the Information dialog, select Popup menu > Create / read

information in the mechatronics navigator. Enter your new information

in the Create new information field. Close this dialog by clicking [OK];

the new information is then carried over to the Information for tracking

field.

Next time the dialog is opened, the information will be shown in the

Information for tracking field. In the mechatronics navigator, items

with information for tracking are marked with this icon .

When the information has been read and acted on, select the Informa-

tion completed check box. Completed information is then only visible in

the information history. All the information saved to date is displayed in

the relevant Information history field and cannot be changed.

Calculating the connection length

Using the EMI "Cabling" and "Piping" add-ons you can calculate tube

and pipe lengths in addition to cable lengths; the Calculate cable length

menu item under Project data > Mechatronics has therefore been re-

named.

Old name: New name:

Calculate cable length Calculate connection length This functionality is now also available in the popup menu in the mecha-

tronics navigator.


154 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

For length calculation, select the relevant cables or tubes in the graphical

editor (multiple selection is possible) then select the Calculate connec-

tion length menu item to calculate the new lengths. The connection

lengths are also updated.

Inserting a Model View for EPLAN EMI

The data in the mechanical model are now accessed independently of

the representation on the project pages. Therefore the former preview

screen of the mechanical model has been replaced by a model view.

Benefit: The model view offers greater flexibility. You can decide

whether a mechanical model is represented on project pages

and the appearance of this view. You can place this model view on project pages, as before. However, the

model view is not required to represent the mechanical model in the 3D

view or to assign electrical engineering data to mechanical data.

To insert a model view for EMI on a project page, select Insert >

Graphic > Model view (EMI). Then place the corners of the model view

by opening an area. The Model view dialog then opens; select the 3D

object to be represented and specify the properties of this model.

Settings for EPLAN EMI

Addition for length calculation

EPLAN now has a settings dialog where you can specify an additional

length for connection length calculation. You can open the Settings:

General (mechatronics) dialog via Options > Settings > Projects >

"Project name " > Mechatronics > General.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 155

Benefit: Accurate length calculation based on the 3D model combined

with the optional additional length means that cables and

tubes can subsequently be installed during production without

complications (e.g. unwanted tension) – and there is no need

to build a physical prototype.

Specify the addition length for the calculation of cable / tube lengths for

EMI in the Addition for cable length calculation / Addition for tube

length calculation group boxes.

Enter an absolute extra length which will be added to the calculated

length once per cable / tube in the appropriate Value field. The result will

then be rounded up to the "full" value of the unit in use. Select the unit to

be used for the additional length from the Unit drop-down list.

New Features in the EPLAN Data Portal

156 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


At the same time as the release of the new version of the EPLAN plat-

form, a new version of the EPLAN Data Portal with increased functional-

ity has also been released.

Our Internet portal for device data – the EPLAN Data Portal – provides

you with categorized master data of major manufacturers for direct trans-

fer to the EPLAN platform. In addition to alphanumeric parts data, among

other information this master data also contains schematic macros, multi-

lingual parts information, preview images, documents, etc. The data is

directly integrated into the EPLAN platform when downloaded.

Benefit: The EPLAN Data Portal enormously simplifies parts selection

for the designer. While planning, he or she can directly

access master data that has been classified and checked for

EPLAN compatibility, without time-consuming searching of

manufacture catalogs, which thus reduces the project plan-

ning time.

High-quality master data makes it easier to use throughout

EPLAN and increases the quality of the project documenta-

tion, from the schematic, through detailed reports, to integra-

tion of manufacturer documentation (data sheets, operating

manuals) in high-quality manufacturing specifications. De-

tailed item data is of crucial significance even in downstream

use of documentation during servicing and maintenance

work. To productively access the portal, you require the "EPLAN Data Portal"

add-on module and a valid Software Service Contract for your EPLAN

license.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 157

This add-on can be used with the following variants of the EPLAN

platform:

• EPLAN Electric P8 (Version 2.0)

• EPLAN Fluid (Version 2.0)

• EPLAN PPE (Version 2.0)

• EPLAN Education for Classrooms (Version 2.0).

Notes:

• You must be connected to the Internet in order to use the EPLAN

Data Portal, and you must make sure that access is not prevented by

a firewall or any other security mechanism! If you have problems, you

should first check your firewall, virus scanner, or proxy settings.

• Note that the EPLAN Data Portal has been released for Microsoft

Internet Explorer 7. After installation via the usual EPLAN installation wizard, the add-on

module and its dialogs (navigator, settings, etc.) are integrated into the

user interface of the EPLAN platform. Once a user account has been

created, open the EPLAN Data Portal navigator by selecting the new

Data portal navigator menu item from the Utilities menu. The menu

item for the navigator has been moved. It can now be found directly

below the Parts menu item.

An overview of the main new features of the EPLAN Data Portal:

• New data

The amount and scope of item data in the EPLAN Data Portal is con-

stantly growing. Additional manufacturers have been newly added to

the list of 20 component manufacturers. Manufacturers already estab-

lished in the portal are constantly expanding the scope of their data in

the EPLAN Data Portal.


158 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• Unique part IDs for all parts

All parts in the EPLAN Data Portal now have a "Unique part ID". This

means that two parts with different part numbers can now be placed in

relation to one another (see the section "Unique Part ID for Parts in

the EPLAN Data Portal" on page 158).

• Stronger integration into the EPLAN platform

With the new version, the EPLAN Data Portal has been integrated

more strongly into the EPLAN platform. So now, for example, the set-

tings for the portal can be input via the EPLAN settings dialog (see the

section "Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal" on page 159).

Find out about all of the new features at our website

www.eplan.de/portal-news. Information on new functionalities is also

available in the online help function of the EPLAN Data Portal server.

Unique Part ID for Parts in the EPLAN Data Portal

All parts in the EPLAN Data Portal are now identified by means of

"Unique part IDs". Using this ID, it is possible to place two parts with

different part numbers in relation to one another. When importing a part

from the EPLAN Data Portal, the "Unique part ID" is used for identifica-

tion of the part in question.

Benefit: If the part number for a part has changed, it is still possible

with the help of the Unique part ID property to provide the

desired part with data during part import.

For all other parts in the EPLAN parts database, issuing this kind of

identification is optional, i.e. a part does not have to have this property.

So that the Unique part ID property cannot be changed accidentally, this

can not be created or changed via the parts management interface.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 159

Tip:

By means of the "API Extension" add-on module, the property Unique

part ID can be used to assign a part or read it.

Settings for the EPLAN Data Portal

Integration into the EPLAN platform

For the new version, the EPLAN Data Portal has been integrated more

strongly into the EPLAN platform. So now you can make the settings for

the EPLAN Data Portal via the EPLAN settings dialog.

The menu path to the dialog Settings: Data Portal is as follows:

Options > Settings > User > Management > Data Portal.


160 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The settings options are split across three tabs: Portal, Connection, and

About. The [Reset] button has been removed from the Portal tab. If you

now want to restore altered default settings (e.g. the website address of

the EPLAN Data Portal in the Portal URL field), click in the relevant field

and select the familiar Go to default menu item from the popup menu.

This change also makes it possible to export and import the settings for

the EPLAN Data Portal, e.g. via the and buttons. This facilitates

the exchange and synchronization of these settings between several

EPLAN workstations.

New Features in Device Numbering

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 161


Subcounters in Offline Device Numbering

A new setting for format elements in offline device numbering is now

available. With this setting you can specify that a counter should behave

like a subcounter.

Benefit: Automatically assigning device tags in the desired format

saves a considerable amount of time and ensures that the

identifiers assigned are correct and unique. With the new

settings, EPLAN supports standardization without generating

additional project planning work.

If you select a counter as a format element in the Settings: Numbering

(offline) dialog, in the next dialog opened you can specify that the coun-

ter should behave like a subcounter. If you select the new Counter is a

subcounter check box, the counter is incremented again from the start

value as soon as the other numbering changes.

If the check box is not selected, the counter is incremented indepen-

dently of the other characters.


162 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

For offline numbering of a project, the numbering format specified is Page + Identifier + Column + Counter, consecutive by

columns. If the Counter is a subcounter check box is not selected,

in offline numbering with a start value of 1 the result is as follows:

If the Counter is a subcounter check box is selected and all other

settings are the same, the result is as follows:

If the value of the "column" format element changes (with -1F2), the

counter starts again with the start value (-1F21).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 163

New Numbering Formats for Busbars

A separate DT format is now available for online numbering of busbars.

A new setting option has been added to the DT tab in the Numbering

formats dialog. (To open this dialog, follow the menu path Options >

Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (on-

line) and in the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, click [...] next to

the Numbering format field.)

Benefit: Busbars can be numbered separately in online device num-

bering. EPLAN offers flexibility – the settings you make deter-

mine how the system will behave, allowing you to implement

your individual project planning standard. By default, the connection point designations for busbar connection

points are also automatically numbered when they are inserted. The

Designations tab in the dialog referred to above now has a Busbar

connection points check box and an option to edit format elements.

Safety-relevant Functions

164 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


In EPLAN, functions can now be identified as relevant to safety.

Benefit: The safety-relevant functions give you the option, for in-

stance, of distinguishing between "safe" and "unsafe" PLC

signals in the project. Another piece of detailed information

which is easily stored in the engineering to guarantee even

higher-quality machine and plant documentation. For this reason, the properties dialog for components now has a new

Relevant to safety check box in the Function data (logic) group box on

the Symbol / function data tab. Select this check box if you want the

function to be relevant to safety. In the navigators, functions that are

relevant to safety are indicated by the icon .

Note:

Connections can not be identified as relevant to safety. In the properties

dialog for connection definition points, the Relevant to safety check box

is therefore grayed out and cannot be selected. Safety-relevant PLC connection points

The new version introduces some PLC connection points that are rele-

vant to safety.

For these new symbols with the names PLC_S_CBOX* and numbers

330-339, the Relevant to safety check box is already selected (see the

section "Master Data: Symbols" from page 402 onwards). These symbols

have a yellow border to make them easier to identify.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 165

Safety-relevant function templates

The function templates in the Parts management have also been ex-

panded to take account of this new property during device selection and

overlaying. On the Function templates tab you can also select the prop-

erty Relevant to safety <21006>. For this reason, the Device selection

(function templates) table now has an extra Relevant to safety column

(except for the "Cables / connections" and "Wires" product groups).

In the settings for device selection, Relevant to safety can be set as a

selection criterion for all parts groups (except for "Cable" and "Wire").

Filter for project data

In order to filter for safety-relevant functions in the navigators, you can

access the new property Relevant to safety <20216> when selecting

criteria for a filter. This new property can also be displayed as an addi-

tional column in the list view in the navigators (via Popup menu >

Configure columns).

Safety-relevant functions in reports

Safety-relevant functions can also be taken into account in reports. One

option is to place the property Relevant to safety <20216> as place-

holder text in various forms (e.g. parts list, device connection diagram).

Another option is to use this property as a filtering and sorting criterion

for functions when generating reports.

Connections and Connection Numbering

166 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


Applying Predefined Values for Connection Colors and Cross-section / Diameter

In the properties dialogs of connections, connection, potential or net

definition points, you now have the option to apply project-specific, pre-

defined values for the connection colors and for the connection cross-

sections and connection diameters.

Benefit: The selection of predefined values ensures that only data

specific to the project is used. This standardization means

that errors are avoided and the workflow for planning is

improved.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 167

The Color / number and Cross-section / diameter fields have been

extended by the relevant selection options in the respective tabs.

Color / number:

If you click the [...] button next to this field, the Connection colors dialog

opens. Select the desired color here.

You can create your own project specifications for the connection colors

in the settings under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name"

> Connections > Connection colors.

Cross-section / diameter:

If you click [...] for this field, you go to the Cross-sections / diameters

dialog. In this selection dialog, you can apply a predefined value, includ-

ing the associated unit. This unit is then displayed in the Cross-section /

diameter unit field.

Define your own default values for a project in a new settings dialog

under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections

> Cross-sections / diameters. If the unit set for a value here is "As in

project", the unit from the project-specific settings dialog Settings: Prop-

erties is applied (Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >

Connections > Properties).

Note:

You can also use the entries you have made in the Settings: Cross-

sections / diameters dialog as default settings for the conductor cross-

sections or conductor diameters of cables and shields. In the Cable /

Shield tabs, the Conductor cross-section / diameter field has also

been extended by the selection option described above.


168 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Determining Connection Sources and Targets

You now have two options to choose from when determining connection

sources and targets. The default is for the device tags of the connected

functions to be considered in the determination. But you can also con-

figure EPLAN so that the position of the connected functions in the

schematic is considered when determining the sources and targets

of connections. This reflects the behavior in EPLAN before version

1.9 International SP 1.

Benefit: With appropriate sorting, you save additional processing time.

Now available to you under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project

name" > Connections > General, to affect the behavior when determin-

ing connection sources and targets, is the new setting Determine the

source and target of connections from the placement. If this check

box is selected, the connection sources and targets are determined

using the graphical position of the connected functions. The connection

sources and targets are then sorted in the reports, according to their

placement in the schematic.

If the check box is deselected, the device tags of the connected functions

are compared, to determine the connection sources and targets. The

sorting of the structure identifiers in structure identifier management will

be used for these comparisons; the "smaller" device tag will become the

source.

The check box is deselected by default. When transferring data from

EPLAN 5, this results in correct source and target determination and thus

in correct wiring lists.

Note:

Cable connections are not affected by this setting.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 169

Aligning Connection Definition Point Placements with Each Other

Now you can set connection numbering in such a way, that the connec-

tion definition points can be aligned horizontally or vertically to each

other, when placing on connection sections.

Benefit: The placement of the connection definitions is instantly and

easily legible and visually appealing. There is no need for

time-consuming, manual positioning.

If you want to perform this type of placement, in the settings for connec-

tion numbering on the Placement tab, you must activate the new Align

placements with each other check box. (A possible menu path to the

settings dialog is: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >

Connections > Connection numbering.)

Conditions for aligned placement

An aligned placement of the connection definition points can only occur if

the following conditions are met:

• The sections run parallel.

• The spacing between sections is always the same.

• The sections have a common coordinate area (in the X direction for

connections running horizontally, and in the Y direction for connec-

tions running vertically).

The sections that meet these criteria make up a group, within which the

connection definition points are aligned to each other. Thus the parallel

sections that have different spacing are not recognized as a group. The

connection definition points on these sections are not aligned to each

other either.


170 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Normally, the connection definition points are aligned at the first graphi-

cal connection definition point within the group. If this is not possible, be-

cause the connection definition point is outside the common coordinate

area, the next connection definition point of the group is considered. If

none of the connection definition points is within the common coordinate

area, the connection definition points in this coordinate area are moved.

Example:

In the following illustration, the Align placements with each other

check box is initially deselected. The connection definition points are

placed according to the settings in the Number of placements group

box. In this case, the option On every individual section is set.

The Align placements with each other check box is selected. The

connection definition points on parallel sections with the same spacing

are aligned horizontally or vertically to each other (highlighted here by a

green border).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 171

If the Align placements with each other check box is deselected or if

the conditions mentioned earlier are not met, the connection definition

points are placed by means of the other criteria specified in the Place-

ment tab.

Resetting the Counter for Connection Numbering per Structure / Page

When numbering connections, it is possible to reset the counter to its

start value and then restart, subject to the established conditions, such

as on every page, for every plant, etc. Previously, this was only possible

manually, but now you have the opportunity to enter the counter reset in

a scheme for connection numbering as well.

Benefit: Counter reset can now be entered in a scheme for

connection numbering. Requests for relevant numbering

systems can thus be easily met and automated.

The Designate connections dialog has been redesigned for this

purpose. Instead of the previous check boxes, the Overwrite and Avoid

identical designations settings are now made in drop-down lists.


172 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

For the counter reset, in the Avoid identical designations drop-down

list, select the new option Per counter reset range (structure / page).

As a result, the connection designations are only unique within a certain

range; identical designations are also allowed in the project.

Example:

You have selected the "Per counter reset range (structure / page)" set-

ting and the counter reset range is defined so that the counter is reset

when the page changes. The connection designations are then unique

within a page. However, the same connection designations are allowed

on different pages.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 173

Defining the counter reset range

To be able to use this new option, you must define the so-called "counter

reset range" in your scheme for connection numbering. This is the range

within which the counter is incremented, and within which the designa-

tions are unique.

In the Connection numbering: Formats dialog, double-click on the

selected "Counter" format element, for example, to open the Format:

Counter dialog. Select the new Reset per structure / page check box

here and then click [Settings].

In the new Settings: Counter reset range dialog that then opens, define

for the counter the range within which the counter is incremented. When

one of the specified criteria changes, the counter is reset to its start

value. To do this, in the Structure / Page area, select the required check

boxes (Higher-level function, Mounting location, Page, etc.). You can

use the From source or From target options to define whether the

criteria established above are applied to the source functions or target

functions of the connections.

Numbering Card Power Supplies and Bus Cables with General Connection Numbering

The connections at PLC connection points for bus cables and card

power supplies can now be numbered, together with the general con-

nections.

Benefit: PLC bus ports and PLC card power supplies can now be

numbered together with general connections. Combining

these operations means that some steps are no longer

necessary and the result is unique.


174 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The new predefined connection group "Connections connected to PLC

connection points (except card power supply and bus cable)", is avail-

able in the Connection numbering: Formats dialog for this purpose.

Note:

The connections are numbered according to the sequence of the con-

nection groups. If you want connection numbering like that cited above,

in your scheme for connection numbering, you should firstly list the

"Connections connected to PLC connection points (except card power

supply and bus cable)" connection group and secondly, the "General

connections" group should be in last position.

Other New Features of the Entire EPLAN Platform

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 175


Optimizing Performance by the Use of Modern Proces-sors

Use of multi-core processors

One of the most important trends in computer technology over the past

few years is the use of a number of main processors on a single chip.

In the latest version, such multi-core processors are now also used by

EPLAN in order to enhance performance.

These are optimized accordingly so that our application can benefit from

the additional computing power of these multi-core processors. Thus dif-

ferent database accesses by EPLAN are distributed over the individual

processors. This does not affect their operation in EPLAN.

Use of more updated processors

EPLAN has also been optimized for the use of newer processors. The

command set extension SSE2 (Streaming SIMD Extensions 2) is used

for this, for example. As a consequence of this optimization, EPLAN now

supports only later processors (e.g. Pentium 4, Athlon 64, etc.).

Warning:

EPLAN may no longer be capable of running on computers with older

processors which were made before 2005 (see also the section

"Hardware Requirements" on page 457).


176 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Project Editing

New projects with current creation date and creator

When new projects were created, the data in the template was in part

used for the Creator <10020> and Creation date <10021> properties.

With the new EPLAN version, you now have the option of changing

creator and creation date of a new project. For this purpose, the input

fields Specify creation date and Specify creator, which you already

know from Copy project, are now also available when creating projects.

Benefit: You can enter the relevant creator and current creation date

for new projects, and change this if necessary.

New dialog when creating projects

If you create a project by selecting Project > New, the new Create

project dialog is now opened. The sequence and designation of the

fields match the interface in the project wizard.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 177

Project name:

Enter the project name without file extension in this field.

Storage location:

This field contains the directory where the new project is to be saved.

EPLAN suggests using the directory specified under Options > Settings

> User > Management > Directories in the Projects field as the save

location. Use [...] to open a dialog for choosing a directory. Here, you

can choose another directory as the storage location for the project.

Template:

The template used for the new project is shown here. You can select

project templates or basic projects as the template. Click [...] in order to

open the Select project template / basic project dialog. You can select

a template in this dialog.

Specify creation date:

If this check box is selected, then you can specify a different creation

date for the new project in the field below. In this case, the current date is

entered here initially. If necessary, you can change this date.

If the check box is deselected, the creation date of the selected template

will be used.

Specify creator:

If this check box is selected, your logon name or user code will automati-

cally be entered in the field below, depending on the settings under User

> Display > User code / address. If you do not want to use your logon

name or user code, you can also input a different name.

If the check box is deselected, the creator who created the template will

be shown. If there is nothing entered in the field, no creator was specified

for the template.


178 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Change in the project wizard

The Project wizard, which you can open by selecting Project > New

(Wizard) has been extended accordingly. The new setting options for

creation date and creator can be found here under the first tab, Project.

New projects are now named "New project" by default, irrespective of

how they have been created. If there is already a project with this name,

the project name then has a number added ("New project (2)", .... etc.).

Automatic data format checking

If EPLAN is abruptly ended during editing (e.g. due to a power outage

or via the Windows Task Manager), incomplete data may remain on the

hard disk. Such projects for which the project database has been left

"improperly" are now automatically recognized when opened.

Benefit: Project data is now even more robust against external influ-

ences because errors do not propagate.

In a case like this, you will be warned that the project has not been

closed correctly, then you can decide whether you want to carry out a

consistency check. Confirm the Consistency check prompt by selecting

[Yes], and a consistency check will be carried out for the project.

If no errors are found during the check, the project will then be opened.

A damaged project, on the other hand, will not be opened. In such a

case, the problems will be listed in the system report file and then dis-

played in the System messages dialog.

If you click [No], the project will not be opened. In this case, you have to

select a different project for editing.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 179

EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN Data Import

Symbol library sequence in the settings

During EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN data import of projects, if some symbols from an original symbol file (e.g. DIC_WUPD.SYM) cannot be replaced with

symbols from the symbol library IEC_symbol EPLAN inserts this original

symbol file in the list of symbol libraries in the Settings: Symbol libra-

ries dialog.

Up to now, the relevant original symbol file had been listed after the SPECIAL library and before the IEC_symbol library in the second line of

the dialog. This later led to problems in EPLAN when certain actions

were executed (e.g. when inserting devices) as symbols from the first library listed (e.g. DIC_WUPD.SYM) were used.

In the case of EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN data import, if a case of this kind

appears, the sequence of the symbol libraries will be swapped in the settings. The default symbol library IEC_symbol is listed before the

original symbol file in the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog.

Note:

This altered sequence may possibly lead to problems with the exchange

of pages / macros with other projects which have been imported with

EPLAN version 1.9 (or older) and which used the other EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN original symbol files (e.g. DIC_ESSD.SYM). Here, it is possible

that individual symbols (e.g. change-over contacts) cannot be displayed.

In this instance, we recommend that you manually revise any symbols not displayed. For this, select a suitable symbol from the IEC_symbol

library from the properties dialog under the Symbol / function data tab

by clicking the [...] button, which is located next to the Number / name

field.


180 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

EPLAN 21 Data Import

Including net-based connections

Within the scope of the extensions of the new "Net Based Wiring" add-on

module, you now also have the option of transferring net-based connec-

tions on data import from EPLAN 21.

For this purpose, the general default settings for EPLAN 21 data import

in the General tab have been extended to include the new Include net-

based connections drop-down list. (One possible menu path for the

dialog Settings: EPLAN 21 data import is: Options > Settings > User

> Interfaces > EPLAN 21 data import.)

Here, select whether – and how – net-based connections are to be

included:

• No: Net-based connections are not included.

• Yes: Net-based connections are included. I.e. during data import, a

net definition point is automatically placed on the net, the T-nodes are

adapted, and the connections are written in the form of "daisy chains"

to the net definition point.

• From project settings: The setting indicating whether or not net-

based connections are to be included are taken from the project. If the

EPLAN 21 property Net-based connections is enabled for a project,

the net-based connections will be included.

Inherit black box structures to interruption points

In EPLAN 21, it is possible for interruption points placed in black boxes

or PLC boxes to take over the structure identifiers of the superior boxes.

This behavior is also available to you in the EPLAN platform.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 181

For this, the dialog Extended project structures has been extended to

include the new check box Inherit black box structures to interruption

points. (This dialog can be accessed via the project properties, for

example, by clicking on the [Other] button in the Structure tab.) This

check box is now selected by default when importing data from

EPLAN 21. With this, the structure identifiers such as higher-level

function, mounting location, etc. are inherited from black boxes and PLC

boxes to the interruption points.

Note:

Please note that when creating new projects, this check box must be

enabled so as to achieve the same behavior as in EPLAN 21.

Data Backup

Distribution of directory information during data backup

When backing up project data and master data, information on the origi-

nal directory is now also backed up internally. When restoring the data,

this directory information is then output and suggested as a default for

the target directory.

If you have already backed up the data once, the directory saved when

you did this will automatically be suggested as your target directory. If

this data is new to you, on the other hand (e.g. a project passed on by

e-mail), the directory settings from the last data backup will be suggested

as the target directory.

Benefit: Data exchange and distribution of projects and master data

are more user-friendly. Optionally, the data can be imported

into the original directory structure or into a different one. This

provides you with the requisite flexibility in data exchange

with clients or subcontractors and allows projects to be

managed in a uniform, well-defined directory structure.


182 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

With data backup, to allow the directory structure to be passed on suc-

cessfully to other project editors or to clients, we recommend that you

save your projects in the default directory set for projects. You can create

corresponding subdirectories here to allow you to manage client-specific

projects more effectively. For projects outside the set project directory,

only the default directory can be suggested as the target directory when

restoring the data. Backing up projects

Concerning the extension already mentioned, you now have the option

of editing the name of the backup file even when backing up projects.

For this purpose, the Back up projects dialog has been extended to

include the Backup file name drop-down list.

Backup file name:

This name is used for both backup media ("Storage medium" and

"E-mail"). A maximum of 260 characters is permitted for the file name

including file path.

The following options are available:

• If the project is located either directly in the project directory or in a

directory outside the project directory, the project name will be sug-

gested automatically.

• If the project is located in a subdirectory to the project directory, the

project name will be suggested as the first entry in the drop-down list.

After that, a suggestion follows in the list which is made up of the

entire subdirectory path and the project name. All components of this

name are separated by means of periods (e.g. "Customer1.Commis-

sion.EPLAN project").


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 183

Tip:

This second suggestion supports you when restoring projects. You can

immediately identify the subdirectories used by the extended project

name. The components of the name which appear in the subdirectory

path are not included as a project name when the project is restored. • If several projects are backed up, it is not possible to edit this field,

and the project names in each instance will be used as the backup file

names.

In the case of the first two options, you can click [...] to go to the Select

backup file dialog and navigate to the desired directory there or create

a new one. If you have selected a directory via this dialog, the relevant

directory will also be transferred for the Backup directory field.

Restoring projects

The Subdirectory field and the Restore in subdirectory check box

have been added to the Restore project dialog.

Subdirectory:

This field is used only for display. Here, the subdirectory is displayed

under the default directories in which the project was located at the time

of the backup. If no subdirectory was available, nothing is displayed.

When restoring, if a number of backed up projects is selected with

different subdirectories, the entry "<<...>>" is displayed here.

Restore in subdirectory:

Select this check box if the project is to be restored to the original sub-

directory. If no subdirectory is stored in the data backup, this check box

will be grayed out.


184 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Notes:

• The Restore in subdirectory check box is disabled by default every

time the dialog is opened, so you have to decide specifically whether

you want to restore the data in a subdirectory.

• If you have not set the target directory to the default directory, a

prompt will be displayed when you select this check box. This can

be used to reset the target directory back to the default directory. The correct name is suggested for the subsequent Project name field,

independently of the file path components in the name of the backup file.

If the backup file is nevertheless renamed, EPLAN in this instance sug-

gests the name of the backup file as the project name.

Backing up master data

The input field Backup file name has been extended in the relevant

dialogs (e.g. Back up form) to add the [...] button. This allows you to set

a different file name and a different target directory.

As mostly several master data files are backed up when master data is

backed up, no name is taken from the selected master data for the back-

up file name; instead, the last name suggested is input.

Restoring master data

The dialogs for restoring master data (e.g. Restore form) have also

been extended with the Subdirectory field and the Restore in sub-

directory check box. The Subdirectory field is, again, for display.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 185

When master data is restored to subdirectories, it is possible to differen-

tiate between the following two cases:

• If data backup took place in a subdirectory of the master data direc-

tory set, that subdirectory is displayed here. This means that an entry

such as "$(MD_FORMS)\Customer1" in the Directory field was input

when, e.g., backing up forms. In such cases, the Restore in sub-

directory check box is available and you can select it. That is, you

can state whether or not the master data is to be restored in the

original subdirectory.

• If, on the other hand, data backup takes place in the master data

directory (e.g. "$(MD_FORMS)") and if files are also backed up in

subdirectories, no directory is displayed here in the Subdirectory

field. The Restore in subdirectory check box is deactivated, and it

is also not possible to change this setting. Master data from sub-

directories also backed up is restored to a subdirectory of the target

directory set, with no selection opportunity.

For the Restore in subdirectory check box, the same instructions apply

otherwise as those to be noted when restoring projects.


186 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Extended PDF and DXF / DWG Export of Pages

In this version, the export functionalities for outputting pages in PDF and

DXF / DWG format have been greatly extended.

Benefit: • By combining the settings for PDF export as a scheme,

you can quickly and reliably adapt this export option to

customer requirements.

• You now use the page filter to select the relevant pages

for output as a PDF. The file is smaller, easier to handle,

and tailored exactly to the intended use.

• Sending PDF and DXF / DWG files directly by e-mail

speeds up data exchange considerably.

• The PDF export in grayscale corresponds to the output

from a black and white printer. This means that the cus-

tomer receives a printout and a PDF file that look the

same.

• A PDF export means that the 3D models from EPLAN Pro

Panel and EPLAN EMI can also be viewed and forwarded

outside EPLAN.

• Instead of a PDF file, the pages can now be split into sub-

directories containing several files. This simplifies connec-

tion to higher-level management systems and enables

further partial output from large projects.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 187

The innovations now available include the following:

• The settings for PDF export can also be saved as a scheme (see

page 187). During actual output you can access the predefined

settings by selecting a scheme (see page 192).

• A filter created in the page navigator can be taken into account in the

PDF and / or DXF / DWG export (see page 188 onwards).

• Like the data backup, in the PDF and / or DXF / DWG export you can

now either output the files to a storage medium or send them as an

e-mail (see page 188 onwards).

• In both export functionalities you now have the option of automatically

generating subdirectories (see page 188 onwards).

• In the PDF export, linked documents which are not stored in the pro-

ject can also be copied into the target directory during the output (see

page 192).

• 3D models from add-ons can also be included in the output during the

PDF export (see page 194).

Saving PDF settings as a scheme

For the sake of consistency, the Settings: PDF export dialog has been

moved to the other user-specific settings for interfaces. You will now find

it under Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > PDF export.

All user-specific settings for PDF export are now combined in a scheme.

For this reason, the settings dialog has the new Scheme drop-down list

plus the familiar toolbar for creating and editing schemes.

If you want to output the pages of a project in PDF format using Page >

Export > PDF, the PDF export dialog now shows you the current

scheme. Use the [...] button next to the Scheme field to move to the

settings dialog for PDF export where you can change the settings.


188 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New user-specific settings for export

There are some new setting options for PDF and DXF / DWG export.

The Export tab for DXF / DWG output has just been extended for this

purpose, but the tab of the same name for PDF export is new (see

illustration).

Page filter:

You can use this drop-down list to include a filter from the page navigator

by default when exporting PDF and / or DXF / DWG files.

Select a page filter that you have generated in the page navigator from

this drop-down list and select the Active check box next to the list. In this

case, the page filter applies to the selection made in the page navigator.

If the check box is not selected, a selected page filter is not included and

the PDF and / or DXF / DWG output is determined by the selection made

in the page navigator only.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 189

Export medium:

For PDF and / or DXF / DWG export you can now decide whether to

store the files in a directory or send them by e-mail. The following options

are available in this group box:

• Storage medium: If this option is selected, the files generated are

output to a storage medium. Enter the storage location in the Output

directory field. You can specify any drive and subdirectory as the

target for the export.

• E-mail: If this option is selected, the files generated are sent as an

e-mail. Once the function has been called up, the files (including any

directories generated) are zipped using the internal zip program and

your installed e-mail editor is started. Select the maximum size of an

individual mail file from the Split size drop-down list.

The setting options in this group box and the behavior of the program

correspond to the established conditions for data backup.

Note:

In order to exchange e-mails, an e-mail editor must be installed and

correctly set up on your computer.

In the export process itself, you have the option of changing the export

medium previously defined in the settings and selecting a different

option. For this reason, the PDF export and DXF / DWG export dialogs

also have the Export medium group box.

Generate file names:

You can now automatically assign a name to the file to be generated dur-

ing the PDF export, just as you could previously for DXF / DWG export.


190 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

For the PDF export, the following options are available in this drop-down

list:

• None: If this option is selected, the PDF file field in the PDF export

dialog is enabled and you can change the file name manually.

• From page names: If you select this option, EPLAN assigns

names to the PDF files in a standard way using the pattern <Page name>.PDF.

• From properties: If you select this option, the file name is formed

from the page and project properties plus freely definable separators.

Use the [...] button to open the Format: Property dialog to configure

the file name.

Generate subdirectories:

In this drop-down list you specify the default method for generating sub-

directories during the PDF and /or DXF / DWG export:

• None: If this option is selected, no subdirectories are generated

during the export.

• From page tree: If this option is selected, subdirectories which reflect

the project structure are automatically generated during the export. All

the pages associated with a structure are exported into the relevant

subdirectory.

Example:

You are carrying out a PDF export for the sample project EPLAN-Demo

and you have selected the From page tree option in the Generate sub-

directories field. In this case, e.g. for the higher-level function with the structure identifier =EB3, a corresponding subdirectory =EB3 is generated

during export into the output directory. Like the project structure with

various mounting locations, this subdirectory includes the other sub-directories +EBS, +ET1, +ET2, +ET3, +ET4, and +ETA. Each of these

subdirectories contains a PDF file.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 191

• From properties: If this option is selected, subdirectories are

automatically generated during the export if a predefined property

changes. The subdirectory names created from project and / or page

properties and freely definable separators can be combined.

To configure the properties, use the [...] button to move to the For-

mat: Property dialog. Here you can, for instance, use the "Directory

separator" format element to generate a directory structure with

several subdirectories arranged one below the other.

Example:

In the settings for the DXF / DWG export, you have set the From prop-

erties option for the Generate subdirectories field. In the Format:

Property dialog you have selected the following format elements:

Format element Symbol Project properties (Project: Type) P10031

Separator _

Page properties (Higher-level function) P1120

Directory separator \

Page properties (Mounting location) P1220

If you then export the sample project EPLAN-Demo in DXF format, several

subdirectories are generated in the output directory specified. Below the directory with the project name EPLAN-Demo are the subdirectories

AT78_CA1, AT78_EB3, AT78_FB3, and AT78_REPORT (AT78 is the value

for the project property Project: Type entered in the sample project).

Further subdirectories with the structure identifiers for mounting locations are located below these hierarchical levels (e.g. AT78_CA1\EAA,

AT78_EB3\EBS, AT78_EB3\ET1, etc.). These subdirectories contain

the exported DXF files.

Note:

PDF file output is split up if you generate subdirectories during the PDF

export. All the pages output to a subdirectory are combined into a PDF

file. You can not jump between the different PDF files.


192 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Output:

Only available in the settings for PDF export! You can use this group box

to specify the default settings for the output.

In addition to the previous functionalities Color and Black and white,

you now have the option of Grayscale. Select this option if you want the

PDF to be output in grayscale. The grayscale is calculated from the

colors for the white color scheme.

"Device pages" tab

The Device pages tab has been redesigned as part of the improvements

to PDF export. The option of saving additional filter criteria for the device

pages as a scheme has been removed because you can now define an

overall scheme for all user-specific PDF settings.

You now specify the filter criteria for the device pages in the Device filter

table. To select a filter criterion, click (New) above the table.

PDF export with linked documents

You can now set the PDF export in EPLAN in such a way that external

documents / linked documents which are not stored in the project are

also copied into the target directory during output.

To do this, select the new Copy externally linked documents to

output directory check box in the user-specific settings for the PDF

export. A possible menu path here is: Options > Settings > User >

Interfaces > PDF export. Select the General tab in the dialog that is

displayed.

Exporting pages in PDF format

To output single pages or an entire project in PDF format, select the

menu items Page > Export > PDF. EPLAN opens the redesigned PDF

export dialog.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 193

Here you have the option of individually changing the default settings

that you have saved in a scheme. To do this, select the settings required

in the new Export medium and Output group boxes and in the pre-

viously existing Use print margins check box.

You also have the option of using the new Scheme drop-down list to

select a different predefined scheme for the PDF export. Or click [...] to

open the Settings: PDF export dialog to create or edit a scheme.


194 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Other settings available for the export

In the PDF export dialog you can also access all the other settings relat-

ing to PDF export. For this upgrade, the [Settings] button has been

changed into a menu with the following menu items:

• Output languages: Opens the project-specific Settings: PDF output

languages dialog.

• Print margins: Opens the dialog with the relevant print settings for

the PDF export.

Outputting 3D models in the PDF export

The PDF export dialog also contains the new Output model check box.

Using this upgrade, you now have the option of including 3D models

from EPLAN Pro Panel and EPLAN EMI in the output. If you use this

option, extra document pages containing the exported models are added

at the end of the PDF file.

So that you can make default settings for this PDF export, the Settings:

PDF export dialog has been expanded by adding the 3D tab. On this tab

you can specify separately whether the 3D models for EPLAN Pro Panel

and / or EPLAN EMI should be included in the PDF export.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 195

Finding and Replacing

Jumping forwards and backwards in the jump sequence of cross-refe-renced functions

All representation types, placements, and report entries for a cross-refe-

renced device are integrated into a jump sequence. Previously, you

could only enter these cross-referenced functions in the Go to list using

Find > Go to > Cross-referenced function. In the new version, you

also have the option of jumping forwards or backwards in this jump se-

quence for a cross-referenced device.

Benefit: This new functionality allows for fast navigation in the jump

sequence for a cross-referenced device.

Therefore the Cross-referenced function menu item now has new sub-

menu items as follows:

• List

Corresponds to the old Cross-referenced function menu item.

Enters all cross-referenced functions for a selected function into the

Go to list and opens the list.

• Forward

Jumps forwards to the Go to list and displays the relevant function in

the graphical editor.

• Backward

Jumps backwards to the Go to list and displays the relevant function

in the graphical editor.

You can see the jump sequence from the sequence in the Go to list.


196 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tip:

To jump between the various cross-referenced functions of a device in

the graphical editor, use the shortcut keys [Alt] + [Page down] and [Alt]

+ [Page up]. First select the function required in the graphical editor (or

in a project data navigator). Use [Alt] + [Page down] to jump forwards

through the cross-referenced functions in the jump sequence in the

graphical editor. If there are currently no entries for the selected function

in the Go to list, new entries are added to the list and the list opens. Use

[Page up] to move backwards through the jump sequence in the graphi-

cal editor in the same way.

Go to part assemblies

Another innovation is that the Find menu now includes the Part assem-

blies menu item under Go to.

Benefit: Using this new functionality, you can jump specifically to the

part assemblies for an object to find further information about

the relevant part.

First select the object required in the schematic. Then select Find > Go

to > Part assemblies. EPLAN enters all the output locations where the

parts of the object occur in parts lists and summarized parts lists into the

Go to list and opens it. In this list, the part number for each part listed is

displayed in the Name column. Use the Popup menu > Go to (graphic)

menu item to jump from the list to the relevant locations in the part as-

semblies.

Tip:

This menu item also functions on report pages where the part number for

an object has been output (e.g. device tag lists).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 197

Including objects in the layout space in the search

The find operation in EPLAN now offers the option of including objects in

a layout space. Layout spaces and associated objects such as mounting

surfaces, mounting rails, etc. can be added to a project using the new

"EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on (see the relevant section on page 342).

The Search location group box in the Find dialog has been expanded

by adding the new Layout space check box for this purpose. Select this

check box to search for the term in layout spaces.

If the check box is deselected, layout spaces will be ignored in the

search.

Example:

You want to find a specific mechanical item in a layout space. In the Find what field of the Find dialog, enter the search term U and in the Search

in group box select the DT / designation check box. In the Search

location group box you also specify whether the search should include

the entire project as well as the layout spaces. The Search results

dialog then lists all the part placements (mounting surfaces, mounting rails, etc.) which have a U as the displayed DT.


198 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Influencing the Value and Unit Display

For many properties in EPLAN you now have the option of specifying the

way in which entered values are displayed. The values entered (e.g. in a

properties dialog) do not change but they are displayed according to the

unit and other settings specified. This relates to the display in the graphi-

cal editor and in output report pages and labeling.

Benefit: The extended functionality for values and units means that in

reports, you can quickly and easily create totals in a specified unit (e.g. m). The data in the schematic is displayed in differ-

ent units (e.g. cm, km) which are more suitable for detailed

representation.

New display properties

For extended display of values and units, the display settings on the

Display and Format tabs (for texts) have been extended by adding the

new Value / unit area.

The new, clearer listing of display and format properties has already

been discussed. More information on this is provided on page 22.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 199

The following settings are available under Value / unit:

Displayed measuring unit:

The default setting for this property is "Unchanged". With this setting, the

property is displayed exactly as it has been entered in the particular field.

The other settings under Value / unit are then grayed out.

To select a different displayed measuring unit, click in the Assignment

column, and then on [...]. An alphabetical list of physical dimensions

(such as "Pressure", "Length", "Frame", etc.), is opened in a hierarchical

tree structure. Click the character to open the required hierarchy level

of a specific dimension (such as "Power"). Double-click in the hierarchy

level underneath to select one of the listed units (e.g. "mW"). The other

display properties under Value / unit will then be validated. All the units

listed for a dimension are designated a "unit of measurement group"

here.

The base units are highlighted in the list by appearing in bold type. The

dimensions and units displayed here are managed internally by EPLAN,

and you are not able to adapt or extend them. With certain dimensions

("Length", "Frame"), you can also apply the displayed measuring unit

from the project or user settings.

Display:

Use this drop-down list to specify how the value of the entered string and

unit are to be displayed:

• All: Value and unit are displayed.

• Hide unit: The selected unit is not displayed.

• Hide value: All the values of the selected unit are hidden. In contrast,

the additional texts and units are displayed.

• Only first value: Only the first value of the selected unit is displayed.

• Only unit: Only the selected unit is displayed. Values and additional

texts are hidden.


200 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Decimal places:

Select the number of decimal places to be output from this drop-down

list.

You can also apply the decimal place setting from the Displayed unit of

length user setting. A relevant entry for this is available in the list.

Decimal places, variable:

Activate this check box if the number of decimal places is not to be filled

with zeroes. However rounding is always carried out to the number

specified under Decimal places.

Example:

You have entered the following information for a device in the Technical

characteristics field:

Power A: 750 W, Power B: 500 W

In the Display tab, under Value / unit, the Displayed measuring unit kW and the Decimal places value 3 have been specified for this

property. Once you have clicked [Apply], the entry in the Technical

characteristics field remains unchanged, and this text is displayed in

the graphical editor:

Power A: 0.750 kW, Power B: 0.500 kW

If you select the Decimal places, variable check box, the display

changes to:

Power A: 0.75 kW, Power B: 0.5 kW

There is a new project setting to output spaces before the units. More

information on this is provided in the section "New project setting for

output of the unit" on page 203.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 201

Notes:

• If you have entered values with units from two different unit of mea-

surement groups in one data entry field, you can only influence the

display of one unit with the settings under Value / unit.

• If no unit has been specified in a string, the base unit of the chosen

displayed measuring unit is taken as the basis for converting the

numeric values.

• If the displayed measuring unit is selected from a unit of measurement

group different from the unit specified in the data entry field, then it will

be assumed for all the values that the entry is made in the base unit of

the selected displayed measuring unit.

Using the new display properties

The extended display properties are used at the following locations in

EPLAN:

• In input fields for properties (Display tab)

And anywhere where you can enter strings or multilingual strings.

• In path function texts (Format tab)

• In special texts (Format tab)

• In placeholder texts in forms (Format tab)

The display settings stored in the forms are used to format the data

that is output in reports. The value and unit settings that have been

specified can be viewed in the relevant placeholder text on the report

pages but cannot be changed.

• In labeling (Property - <Property type> dialog)

The properties dialog, which opens when selecting format elements

for the header, label area, and footer, has been redesigned for this

purpose. The formatting settings on the right-hand side are now also

selected in a table with a tree-like structure.


202 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The extensions for value and unit can not be used at the following

locations:

• In graphical texts

• In placeholder texts on report pages

• In length fields for dimensioning and for graphical positioning (e.g. in

properties dialogs for graphical elements).

Use of separators

In the fields and properties listed above, if you now enter numeric values

with a full stop and a comma, the first separator is evaluated as a thou-

sands separator and the first character of the opposite type (comma / full

stop) as a decimal separator.

If there are several separators of the same type in a number (full stop or

comma), this separator is evaluated as a thousands separator. If only

one separator (full stop or comma) occurs in a number, this is interpreted

as a decimal separator.

New properties for full-length values

In some of the properties used so far (e.g. for cable and connection

lengths or for weight specifications) the values may be full-length inter-

nally, but they are rounded up or down for display. In order to retain

accuracy in any potential conversions to other units, the properties listed

below are now available:

• Cable length (complete) <20257>

• Subset / length (full) <20510>: Subset or length of a part including

unit. This property may be used in bills of materials, for example.

• Working pressure (full) <22230>

• Control range (full) <22231>

• Flow (full) <22232>

• Weight (full) <22233>


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 203

• Free properties: Value and unit (full) <22234>: Value of a free

property including unit.

• Length (full) <31090>: Length of a connection including unit.

• Subset / length (full) <31091>: Subset or length of a part entered at

the function, including unit. Using the index, you can differentiate be-

tween 50 entries.

New project setting for output of the unit

The Settings: Date / time / numbers dialog now has a new setting for

outputting the unit (menu path: Options > Settings > Projects > "Pro-

ject name" > Display > Date / time / numbers). The For numbers

output unit with blanks check box is available here.

Select this check box if you want numbers that are output with a unit,

such as kg, to have a blank before the unit.

If this check box is deselected, no blank is inserted between the number

and the unit.

Enhancements to the EPLAN API

So that the EPLAN API user can also use the enhanced display proper-

ties for values and units, all the new format properties are available in the EPLAN API. The new UnitParser class also enables you to convert

values defined in one unit into the values of another unit (from the same

unit group).

You will find further details about this in the online help for EPLAN API.


204 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Graphical Editor

Rapid opening of page properties

In the graphical editor, double-clicking on the plot frame of an open page

opens the Page properties dialog which displays the properties of this

page.

Extending the search for path function text

The EPLAN platform now provides the option of extending the search for

the path function text to the complete schematic path.

Benefit: You can position path function texts more freely, making

them easier to read. Errors due to inaccurately positioned

path function texts are prevented. Several adjacent compo-

nents in a path can now automatically use the same text. This

provides a quick and easy way of creating clear schematics

and makes working with path-specific function texts even

more flexible.

The project setting Extend path function text on the schematic path

(under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical

editing > General) must be selected. This setting allows you to decide

whether to carry out an extended search for the path function text or

whether the search should be carried out as before.

If this check box is selected, the search for the path function text is car-

ried out within the limits of the path defined by the plot frame. In this

case, a path function text is carried over into the Function text (auto-

matic) property of a component if it is located anywhere within the same

path. However, the insertion point of the path function text does not need

to be located immediately above / below the insertion point of the compo-

nent in question.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 205

If the check box is not selected, path function texts are only carried over

into the Function text (automatic) property if the component insertion

point and the path function text insertion point lie immediately above or

below one another. This is the default setting and is the same as the

previous method of searching for path function text.

Setting the displayed language of multilingual texts blockwise using actions

In EPLAN you now have the option of changing several multilingual texts

on a page to a specific displayed language by means of two actions.

Benefit: You can change the displayed language of all placed texts on

a page with two mouse clicks. The ability to switch display

languages quickly makes it much easier to handle interna-

tional projects.

Therefore the command line parameter /language:? was added to the

two actions shown below:

• "Set component format" With this action (action name: XGedIaFormatSymbol) you can specify

the language of property texts (function texts, remarks, etc.).

• "Set text format" With this action (action name: XGedIaFormatText) you can specify

the language of free, graphical texts.

After linking the buttons on a toolbar with these two actions and speci-fying the language required (e.g. French /language:fr_FR) in the

command line, you can set the texts in a selected area to this language

with a mouse click.


206 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

You want to change the function text and other placed property texts for

specific components on a schematic page to French. The entry in the

command line of the Set button dialog looks like this:

XGedStartInteractionAction /Name:XGedIaFormatSymbol

/language:fr_FR

Note:

Before the texts can be displayed in the language selected, they must be

available in multiple languages in the project and must have been trans-

lated into the relevant language.

Multilingual texts for designation of hyperlinks

In the new version of EPLAN, the text / designations of hyperlinks can be

displayed in the language of the user interface.

Benefit: Even in multilingual documentation, you can now create

hyperlinks as self-explanatory text. This makes it easier for all

project participants to understand the information embedded

in the drawings, even in international projects.

The relevant popup menu items, e.g. Translate, Multilingual input, etc.,

have been added to the Text / designation field in the hyperlink proper-

ties dialog. Multilingual entries are also possible for description texts in

external documents which are stored for a part on the Technical data

tab of the Parts management dialog and can be placed as hyperlinks in

the graphical editor.

Note:

Before the text / designation of a hyperlink can be displayed in the

current dialog language of the interface, it must be available in the

project in the appropriate language.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 207

Property texts for boxes when changing scale

If the scale on schematic pages is changed, the appearance of property

texts for boxes (location, black, PLC, and macro boxes) can now be

adjusted (scaled) in exactly the same way as for other components.

Benefit: When the scale changes, the proportions of the schematic

remain the same. There is no longer any need to change the

font size, etc. This means that the scale can be changed with

a minimum of manual work. Even retrospective changes do

not cause delays to project editing.

On "Panel layout" type pages, changing the scale does not affect the

property texts for the boxes: The corresponding texts remain optically

unchanged.

Plug DT and channel designation retained when moved

The plug DT of PLC or device connection points and the channel desig-

nation of PLC connection points can be adopted in the same way as DT

adoption, e.g. from the left (or from above). If you hold down the [Shift]

key when moving PLC or device connection points – e.g. from a PLC box

or black box – the properties listed below will be retained in addition to

the full DT of the connection point moved:

• Plug DT (automatic)

• and Channel designation (automatic) (only for PLC connection

points).

Benefit: This allows you to change the graphical representation of

plugs and PLC connection points without changing the logical

functionality of the device. Use these EPLAN functionalities in

a targeted way in different phases of a project to define how

the system should behave when devices are moved in differ-

ent situations.


208 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

For the functions in question, the Plug DT (automatic) and Channel

designation (automatic) properties remain unchanged. For the compo-

nents moved and other components affected, the displayed DT and the

values in the Plug DT and Channel designation fields can change as a

result of these actions.

Expansion of special characters

In the Special characters dialog you can select frequently used special

characters and insert them at the current cursor position. In the new

version, this list has been expanded to include the following frequently

used special characters:

• Square root (√)

• Fraction - One half (½)

• Fraction - One quarter (¼)

• Fraction - Three quarters (¾)

• To the power of three (3)

• Cross-section, diameter (Ø).

Benefit: These frequently used special characters can now be

inserted into the text more quickly.

To access these special characters when entering text or in specific

text fields, click in the relevant field and select Popup menu > Special

characters. Less frequently used special characters can be accessed

via the Windows character map.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 209

Devices

Extension to user-defined property arrangement

Changing user-defined property arrangements

If you change a user-defined property arrangement on the Display tab

of the properties dialog and wish to save it under an existing name, a

prompt is now displayed which enables you to transfer the changed

display settings to all components with this property arrangement.

Benefit: In this way, you can very quickly change the display of texts

on all components of the same type. It is also a quick and

easy way of changing and revising project documentation if

necessary. You define the basic standards, and therefore

create a clear, consistent layout for schematics.

If you confirm the Change property arrangement prompt by selecting

[Yes], the changed display settings are applied to all the components

that use this property arrangement.

If you select [No], the changed display settings are only applied to the

current component. For all other components that use this same property

arrangement, the display settings remain unchanged and their property

arrangement is changed to "User-defined".

Note:

Note that a stored, user-defined property arrangement is only available

for symbol variants of the same type. Property arrangement for connection definition points

There are two default values for the property arrangements for connec-

tion definition points. The default arrangement for connection definition

points placed when inserting cable definition lines / shields is

"Conductor".


210 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The default property arrangement for connection definition points which

are inserted individually is "Default setting (Connection)". If you wish to

save a user-defined property arrangement for a connection definition

point, a separate Save property arrangement dialog opens which takes

account of these two default values.

Benefit: A user-defined property arrangement can be used project-

wide as the default for all "types" of connection definition

points. You define standard identifier blocks which give your

schematics a clear, consistent layout.

Instead of the Use as default check box, the dialog therefore contains

two setting options as follows:

Use as default for connections:

Select this check box if this saved arrangement is to be used as the

default for "normal" connection definition points for all additional usages

of these symbol variants. This property arrangement is also used for

connection definition points that arise during connection numbering.

Use as default for conductors:

Select this check box if this saved arrangement is to be used as the

default for conductor connection definition points which are automatically

placed while drawing cables / shields in all additional usages of these

symbol variants.

Changing the graphic of black boxes and similar components via the properties dialog

As already introduced in Version 1.9 International SP 1 for mounting

panels and part placements, you can now edit the graphical properties

of other dynamic components (location boxes, black boxes, etc.) via the

properties dialog in the same way.

Benefit: This means that you can place black boxes, location boxes,

etc. with great precision.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 211

The additional tabs listed below are now available in the relevant proper-

ties dialogs:

• Rectangle tab: for location, black, PLC and macro boxes, containers,

PCT loops, and PCT loop functions

• Polygon tab: for black boxes which are drawn as polygons (symbols DC2, DCF2, PLCC3, SC2 from symbol library SPECIAL)

• Extension tab: for shields

• Line tab: for cable definition lines.

Properties dialog for bundle connection points

The "normal" properties dialog is now used for bundle connection point

symbols. For example, if you place one of these connection symbols on

a page in the graphical editor using Insert > Bundle connection point >

"Connection type", instead of the previous Edit bundle connection

point data, the Properties (components): Bundle connection point

dialog now opens.

Benefit: The information about bundle connection points can be dis-

played individually. You can precisely define the property

display that you need for a bundle connection point. The

summarized representation of connection points combined

with the detailed definition of the property display make the

schematic even clearer and even more informative for all

downstream engineering phases.


212 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

On the Bundle connection point tab you can enter the Bundle con-

nection point designation and the Bundle connection point descrip-

tion, as before. This dialog now also has a Display tab where you can

specify the display settings for the relevant bundle connection point.

Instead of using the default property Bundle connection point data

<19072> (whose value is taken automatically from the description or the

designation if the description is not available), you can also select the

properties Bundle connection point designation <19070> and / or

Bundle connection point description <19071> for the property

arrangement.

Jump functions for location boxes

Location boxes can be made cross-reference-capable by using the Main

placement <20305> property. Cross-references are formed when all

location boxes have the same DT and only one of them is the main

placement.

To make it easier to navigate between the various placements, you can

also use the following functionalities in the popup menu for location

boxes:

• Go to (cross-referenced)

• Go to (all representation types)

• Go to (counterpiece)

• Insert into list of search results.

You can use the Go to (counterpiece) menu item to jump to the main

placement; Go to (all representation types) and Go to (cross-refe-

renced) enter all location boxes with the same full DT into the Go to list

and open it.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 213

Benefit: This navigation option saves you time when searching the

project for location boxes. You can also navigate easily in

large projects with a mouse click, and you don't waste project

planning time searching for important information. Finding,

not searching is the motto.

Plug DT for device connection points

To enable you to provide black boxes with information about potential

plugs, the two properties Plug DT <20406> and Plug DT (automatic)

<20431> are now available for device connection points, in the same

way as for PLC connection points.

Benefit: The option of specifying plugs on black boxes further im-

proves the representation of complex items without time-

consuming symbol creation. After insertion of a device connection point, the Plug DT property is

displayed immediately in the Properties table. You enter the plug DT for

the device connection point in the relevant field in the Value column. As

is normal for DT adoption, the DT can be adopted from the left (or from

above), for instance.

Note:

The plug DT is just an information for the device connection points to

assist in identification of an individual device connection point. If a device

connection point is the target of a report, the plug DT is also included in

the report output.

If you also wish to display the Plug DT (automatic) property in the

property table, you need to select it via property selection. This property

shows you the automatically determined values for a DT adoption. For

output in the reports (e.g. in a device connection diagram), insert the

Plug DT (automatic) property as placeholder text in the relevant form.


214 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

To display a plug DT at the device connection point in the graphical

editor, you may also need to change the property arrangement on the

Display tab and select the Plug DT property for display.

A new layer EPLAN433, Property placement.Plug DT is now used

as the default for the plug DT for device and PLC connection points.

Considering part placements in global editing

The Properties (global) editing mode allows you to edit the common

properties of the different representation types for a function simulta-

neously in a single action. Part placements are now included in global

editing in the properties dialog (and elsewhere).

If you wish to globally edit the properties of a part placement and select,

for instance, the Popup menu > Properties (global) menu item in a

navigator, the "normal" properties dialog for global editing opens if there

is a main function and / or main terminal for part placement. A change to

the part number or another common property (e.g. the function text) is

written back to the part placement and all other representation types for

the function.

The Part placement tab is only displayed in the properties dialog during

global editing if there is no main function and / or associated terminal for

part placement.

Edit sequence for global editing

In conventional part placements there are two representation types:

"Panel layout" and "Detailed panel layout". However, part placement for

the 3D mounting layout in the new "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on uses the

"3D mounting layout" representation type.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 215

The sequence for global editing is therefore as follows:

• Multi-line

• Overview

• Pair cross-reference

• Single-line

• P&I diagram

• Wire harness

• Panel layout

• Detailed panel layout

• 3D mounting layout.

If the common property of a function has different data in the different

representation types, this sequence is used to decide which data is

applied during global editing. EPLAN therefore first takes the properties

of the multi-line representation type.

Adopting properties of the P&I diagram functions during synchronizing

A function can be displayed more than once in the schematic as a distri-

buted single-line, multi-line, overview, or P&I diagram function or as a

pair cross-reference. If the Properties (global) editing mode has not

been selected, you can edit the properties of the distributed functions

independently of one another. Differences between the function proper-

ties will arise as a result. You can synchronize the functions in order to

harmonize the properties of the functions that are displayed in a distri-

buted manner.

When doing this, you now also have the option of applying the properties

of the "P&I diagram" representation type to the other representation

types. Highlight the project, page, or function that you wish to synchron-

ize and then select the new menu item Utilities > Synchronize > P&I

diagram --> all representation types. Click [OK] to confirm the prompt

and carry out the synchronization.


216 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Assigning structure identifiers for part definition points

Part definition points behave in the same way as location boxes and on

insertion, they adopt the structure of the higher-level unit (pages, location

boxes, black boxes). A device tag may be input, but this is not neces-

sary.

Benefit: Parts which are inserted into the project via part definition

points can be directly assigned to a structure identifier.

The Part definition point tab in the properties dialog has been ex-

panded for this purpose with the new Displayed DT and Full DT fields

and the new Structure identifier group box. To enable you to also

change the display setting of placed properties (DT (displayed), Part

number, etc.), the new Display tab is now available for part definition

points.

You can use the property Part of a part definition <20508> in the bill of

materials navigator, for example, to filter by the parts which are specified

at part definitions. This new property is also available as a filter criterion

in the navigators for parts / devices (e.g. in the 2D panel layout naviga-

tor) and in the part-specific reports (parts list, summarized parts list).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 217

Allowing identical connection point designations for devices

Previously, EPLAN did not allow identical connection point designations

for several functions of a device. This could lead to a large number of

messages with the number 007004 (message text "Duplicate connection

point designation: <x>") being displayed in message management.

If a device includes several functions, it is now also possible for these

functions to have the same connection point designations. This can be

useful, for example, if you want to assign the same connection point

designation (e.g. PE) to several device connection points in a black box.

Benefit: Allowing identical connection point designations in EPLAN

means that devices with connection points which have been

given the same name by the manufacturer can now be

managed in full.

If you want to allow this for a device, in the properties dialogs for the

functions switch to the Symbol / function data tab and click on the

[Logic] button. In the Connection point logic dialog select the new

Allow same connection point designations check box for the con-

nection point in question. Then identical connection point designations

are permitted for a connection point within a device.

If you specify this setting for all functions of the device with the same

connection point designation, check run 007004 no longer outputs mes-

sages for these functions.

If the check box is deselected, the corresponding connection point desig-

nations within a device must be unique.


218 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Allowing the same designations for terminals

As part of this upgrade, the property Multiple entries allowed <20811>

has been renamed.

Old name: New name:

Multiple entries allowed Allow same designations

You can use this property to specify that EPLAN should not display

messages if multiple terminals have the same terminal designation.

Edit in Table

Shortcut key to close edit in table

The [Ctrl] + [Q] shortcut can now be used to open and close editing in

tables. Press [Ctrl] + [Q] once to open the Edit function data dialog.

Press this shortcut again to close the dialog.

Note:

You can only use [Ctrl] + [Q] to close edit in table if your cursor is in the

Edit function data dialog. If you are making a selection in a navigator or

in the graphical editor, for instance, you must press [Ctrl] + [Q] twice to

close the dialog.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 219

Project Data Navigators

New jump functions in the connection navigator

The popup menu in the connection navigator has two new menu items,

Go to (graphic source) and Go to (graphic target).

Benefit: The new menu items enable you to determine the point in the

schematic to which the jump is made. You save time because

you immediately obtain the information you need. As before, you use the familiar Go to (graphic) menu item to jump to the

connection definition point of a connection that has already been placed.

If this point does not exist, you jump to a target for the connection in the

graphical editor. Use Go to (graphic source) to jump to the source of a

placed connection in the graphical editor. Select Go to (graphic target)

to display the target for the placed connection in the graphical editor.

Placing macros

The former Place part macro functionality in the project data navigators

has been expanded and renamed to reflect the new version of EPLAN.

Old name: New name:

Place part macro Place macro

Benefit: You can now place a graphic even though no macro has

been stored for the part. This means that the work flow is not

interrupted and the parts data can be added at a later date.

EPLAN allows an iterative engineering process and supports

efficient project editing at every planning stage.


220 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If a part macro is available in the representation type selected in the sub-

menu, it is placed (e.g. Popup menu > Place macro > Multi-line). If a

suitable representation type is not found, then the part macro with a

different representation type is suggested. If you want to place a different

macro, you can now use [Backspace] to open the Select macro dialog

and select a different macro. If a part macro does not exist, macro selec-

tion is opened directly and you can select a macro.

Placing macros with more sensible preselection

Furthermore, when you place a part macro from a navigator, the macro

variant which best fits the selection made in the navigator is now initially

displayed at the cursor. The criteria for a match are as follows:

• Function definition

• Number of functions.

You can still use [Tab] to "page" through the available macro variants

during placement. And you can use [Shift] + [Tab] to page through the

available representation types for a variant.

Note:

The program cannot make a sensible preselection unless the represen-

tation type selected (e.g. Place macro > Multi-line) is available in the

macro variants. Otherwise a different representation type is suggested

for the part macro.

Example:

This program behavior can be useful, for example, in channel-oriented

procedures (see the appropriate section on page 119) where the

grouped PLC connection points for a channel are stored in one macro

variant and the entire PLC card in another variant of the same macro.

If an appropriate part with a macro for a PLC box is selected and you

select a channel of this PLC box in the PLC navigator, the variant with

the channel is preset when the macro is placed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 221

Placing all functions of a device

If you select a device in a navigator, all functions of the device are now

included when you use the menu items Place, Place macro, and

Assign.

If you select a device in a navigator and drag it to a schematic page us-

ing drag & drop, all the functions of this device are offered for placement

one after the other. You can use [Tab] to "page" through the available

symbol variants for each function.

Adjusting the column width

In all navigators for project data (device, terminal strip navigator, etc.) the

popup menu in the list view now has the Adjust column width menu

item. You can use this menu item to adjust the width of all the columns in

the list so that the heading and content of the columns are completely

visible.

Device group DT on associated devices

For devices which belong to a device group, the project data navigators

display the full DT of the device group main function in addition to the

connection point designation. This DT is now separated from the next

connection point designation by brackets.

Example:

For the NO contact –Y1 belonging to a device group, with connection

point designation 13¶14, the device navigator no longer displays

=A1+O1-H1:13¶14... but instead displays the connection point

designation (=A1+O1-H1)13¶14....


222 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Defined Devices

Taking account of macro variants

If both a macro and function templates are specified for a part, functions

which appear in other variants of this macro are also taken into account

when generating a new device in the navigators (via Popup menu >

New device) or when inserting a device in the graphical editor (via

Insert > Device).

Benefit: Because the device concept takes other macro variants into

account, it is quick and easy to plan devices that are distri-

buted throughout the diagram. This provides a simple, relia-

ble way of planning even complex devices. Appropriate

processing of device data makes project planning itself easy

and reliable, with quality included! Macro variants are used in turn while these free function templates can

be superimposed. If the functions in the current macro variant do not

match the free function templates, the action is canceled. No further

functions are generated from the remaining macro variants.

Representation types for unplaced functions

When you delete the placement of a function in the schematic, the repre-

sentation type for the unplaced function is now retained.

Benefit: Functional preplanning of a plant without drawing pages is

now possible in every representation type. You can insert the

devices directly as single-line drawings at a later date, e.g.

using drag & drop. This means you achieve the required

diagram characteristics sooner.

You choose the planning process and gain greater freedom

to implement your individual planning approach.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 223

A placement can be deleted for functions with the following representa-

tion types:

• Multi-line

• Overview

• Pair cross-reference

• Single-line

• P&I diagram.

These representation types are now also available for all unplaced func-

tions and can be specified on the Symbol / function data tab in the

properties dialog.

For functions with the following representation types the placement can

not be deleted:

• External

• Graphic

• Panel layout, detailed panel layout, 3D mounting layout (these are

representation types for part placements).

To delete the graphical representation of a function from the schematic,

highlight the relevant component and select the Edit > Delete place-

ment menu items. The function is retained as an unplaced function with

the original representation type and can, for instance, be placed again

from the device navigator.

Tip:

In the graphical editor, the Delete placement menu item is now also

available in the popup menu for a selected component.


224 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Part Selection

Part selection with scheme selection

It is now possible to use different data sources in EPLAN wherever a part

can be selected.

Benefit: Different data sources can be used for part selection through-

out EPLAN. You can populate the device list or the bill of

materials navigator with data from a number of data sources,

e.g. when Adding parts.

The settings for part selection now include the new Part selection with

scheme selection check box for this purpose. To open the relevant

Settings: Part selection dialog, you can use the Options > Settings >

User > Management > Part selection menu path.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 225

If you select this check box, the new Part selection: Select data source

dialog opens at each part selection. In this selection dialog you can

select a different data source (a scheme) from the Data source drop-

down list and / or click [...] to view / edit the settings.

In the Always use this data source check box, which also appears in

this dialog, you can specify that a selected data source should always be

used. If this is the case, the selection dialog is not launched at the next

part selection and the Part selection with scheme selection check box

in the settings is deactivated. Click [OK] to apply the selected scheme

and start part selection.

Do not show conflict dialog

In the Settings: Part selection dialog referred to above, you now have

the option of hiding the conflict dialog during part selection. The new

Show conflict dialog check box was therefore added to the dialog. The

default is for this check box to be activated.

Benefit: You can decide whether the conflict dialog should be dis-

played during part selection. This means that you can prevent

the conflict dialog from opening during API part selection, for

instance.

If the check box is not selected, the Conflict dialog is not displayed

during part selection. Part selection behaves as if the conflict dialog has

been confirmed by clicking [OK].

If a part or technical properties have already been assigned to a device,

these are automatically overwritten with the data of the new part. Data

which has been assigned to the device but is not included with the new

part is retained, i.e. values are replaced or added but existing errors or

properties are not cleared.


226 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Modifications to part management during part selection

You can now set up EPLAN so that existing parts from parts manage-

ment can be changed and new parts created during part selection. In the

Settings: Part selection dialog, select the new Modification allowed

during selection check box.

Benefit: Parts from parts management can be directly completed

during part selection while editing the schematic. This

reduces the workload considerably.

If this check box is selected and you open part selection via the Parts

tab in a properties dialog, the fields on the right-hand side of the Part

selection dialog are enabled so that you can edit them.

Because of this innovation, part selection was changed to reflect the

Parts management dialog. The menu items available in the tree, the list

and under [Extras] are now the same as in parts management. (The

only things that are not available are generating and switching the data-

base.) The Part selection dialog also has an [Apply] button so that you

can change several parts without having to close part selection in

between.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 227

Symbol Editor

Reorganizing symbol libraries

The symbol editor now offers the option of reorganizing symbol libraries.

Benefit: When a symbol library is reorganized, deleted data (symbols,

symbol variants) is irretrievably removed from the library. This

makes the symbol library smaller and reduces the volume of

data to be saved.

To do this, select the Utilities > Master data > Symbol library > Reor-

ganize menu path. The Reorganize symbol library dialog opens; select

the library to be reorganized and click [Open]. The symbol library is then

compressed and reorganized.

Displaying variants when paging in the symbol editor

When you page through the symbols of an open symbol library in the

symbol editor, only the variant of the symbol that you have previously

specified in the Symbol selection dialog is displayed. If the specified

variant of a symbol is not available, the symbol editor will show an empty

page with the text "Variant does not exist".


228 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Form Editor

Combining overview reports

EPLAN now allows you to combine overview reports (table of contents,

parts list, etc.) for a specific property. For instance, you can combine the

data for each page type in the table of contents.

Benefit: Reports generated in this way provide a better overview and

make it easier to find your way around the project documen-

tation. Clear documentation also means high quality and

smooth application of machine and plant documentation in

the downstream engineering phases.

In order to achieve this, the new property Combine in a line by <13111>

is now available in the form properties for the relevant forms. First select

this property in Property selection, then click [...] in the Value column.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 229

The new Properties to be combined dialog opens, where you can

define the properties for which identical data should be combined in one

line. Click the (New) button to open the familiar Property selection

dialog where you select the properties to be combined and transfer them

to the list. More than one property may be selected.

Separator for output values

The default separator for the values output in a line is the semicolon or,

for combined values, the string "...". However, you can also specify other

separators for a form via the form properties Separator for multiple

values <13059> and Separator for combined values <13082>.

Example:

After redesigning a relevant form, the table of contents created for a

sequentially numbered project is as follows:

Page type Page ...

Title page / cover sheet 1

Table of contents 2

Schematic single-line 3...5

Schematic multi-line 6...15;20...29

Overview 16...19;30...33

...


230 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Combining parts in enclosure legends

When outputting enclosure legends, identical part numbers can now be

combined in one line. For this reason, the new property Combine in a

line by <13111> is also available in the form properties for enclosure

legends. To combine by part number, in Property selection select the

property Part number <20100>.

It is also possible to output the number of part placements that have

been combined in a line. The property Total amount (number of units)

<20499> is now also available as placeholder text for "Enclosure legend (*.f18)" type forms.

Conditional areas in dynamic forms

You can now use "conditional areas" as additional dynamic areas in

dynamic forms. These areas are inserted into the reports when certain

specified conditions are met. This enables you to format your reports

because graphical elements such as lines, text, etc. can be assigned to

a conditional area.

Benefit: Conditional areas offer numerous formatting options for your

report pages, so your reports will be more individual and

tailored to your requirements.

To insert a conditional area for a dynamic form, select Insert > Dynamic

area > Conditional area in the form editor. Draw the conditional area as

a rectangle. Double-click in the rectangle and select the Conditions tab

in the properties dialog.

On this tab you can define the conditions under which specific areas are

output in your reports. The conditions you specify are as follows:

• If property is changed

Click [...] in this field to move to the Conditions dialog where you can

select the property that triggers output of the area when it is changed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 231

• When switching objects

Select this check box to specify that the conditional area should be

evaluated whenever an object is switched (see example below).

• At first start of column / At every start of column / At every end of

column / At last end of column

Select this check box to specify that the graphical elements defined in

the conditional area should only be inserted at the first start of the

column or at every start of the column / at every end of the column or

only at the last end of the column. In combined reports, the first start

of column and the last end of column always refer to the object to be

reported, e.g. a terminal strip.

• After every n-th line

In this field enter the value of the line after which the graphical ele-

ments defined in the conditional area should be displayed.

Example:

You have a terminal diagram in which the targets are listed for each ter-

minal. As some terminals have more than one target, a separating line

should be drawn in front of each terminal (i.e. in front of each object) in

order to make the terminal diagram clear. To do this, add a conditional

area to the relevant terminal diagram form and select the When switch-

ing objects check box as a condition.

Then insert a line, format this graphic as required, and assign this object

to the conditional area. The master data is synchronized and the reports

are updated; you have now achieved the desired result.

If you have specified a value in the After every n-th line field, the Ad-

just height check box is also enabled. If this check box is selected, the

conditional area is placed on the previous data line and scaled according

to the height of this line. In this way, you can insert a background for a

data line.


232 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

You have a parts list in a project and wish to use a background color on

alternate data lines. Insert a conditional area in the relevant dynamic form. In the After every n-th line field, specify the value 2 as a condition

for the field and select the Adjust height check box. In this area, draw a

rectangle with the same width as the data area. Then select a color (e.g.

gray) on the Format tab for the rectangle and activate the Fill surface

check box. Then assign the rectangle to the conditional area. After syn-

chronization of the master data, alternate lines on the parts list are

displayed with a gray background.

Up to ten conditional areas with different conditions can be specified in

one form.

Several conditions may also be specified simultaneously in a conditional

area. If these conditions are met in the reports (e.g. a change to a prop-

erty and an object switch), only one graphical element (e.g. a separating

line) is output. On the other hand, if the conditions are distributed over

several conditional areas, the associated graphical elements for all areas

are output if the conditions are met. This latter option is sensible, for

instance, if different texts are to be placed via the conditional areas.

Suppressing blank data lines

Blank data lines may occur in the reports if the output properties are

blank. To prevent the output of blank data lines, the form properties now

include the new property Suppress blank lines <13081>. Blank data

lines are not output if this property is selected.

Benefit: Reports are shorter and clearer. This means that site work

(commissioning, servicing, and maintenance) using the

printed plans is quicker. You lay the foundation for smooth

project implementation while still in the engineering phase.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 233

Notes:

• Data lines which contain only symbols or jumper graphics are not

regarded as blank and selecting the Suppress blank lines property

does not suppress them.

• This property is not available in the form properties for connection dia-

grams (device connection diagram, cable connection diagram, etc.).

Renamed placeholder texts for the device tag list

Previously, the "device data" elements occurred twice in the Placeholder

texts - Device tag list dialog. In order to distinguish between them, the

indexed element with properties to the n-th function of the device has

been renamed "Function". The non-indexing element with properties for

the device tag has been renamed "Device tag".

Outputting function data for the device tag list and symbol overview

When generating reports, you now get the standard behavior that is

normal for other reports if you have set the two properties Horizontal

symbol distance <13042> and Number of adjacent symbols <13043>

to "0" in the form properties of "Device tag list" and "Symbol overview"

type forms, and inserted placeholder texts for the "Function" element into

the relevant forms (e.g. properties of the n-th function of the device such

as Placement, Function text, etc.). The relevant values are output as a

single-line list separated by semicolons for each device tag.

Example:

Placements of the device with the DT =EB3+ET2-K1 are no longer output

by rows but as a list, as follows: =EB3+ET2/3.2;=EB3+ET2/1.3;=EB3+ET2/1.4;=EB3+ET2/1.4


234 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Regenerating headers without sorting

The property Regenerate header after change <13003> is also avail-

able in the form properties. Like the form property Generate data

headers for the first x sorting properties <13060>, you can use this

property in dynamic forms to generate new headers on report pages.

Benefit: You can generate new headers in reports without sorting.

Property "<13060>" specifies that sort properties (e.g. "Higher-level

function" or "Mounting location") should be used to generate new

headers. If an appropriate sorting scheme is selected when generating

the report, a new header is generated when the sorting criterion, e.g. a

new identifier for the higher-level function, changes.

Use the form property Regenerate header after change <13003> to

specify the property / properties that will trigger generation of a new

header on the report page when a change is made. The new headers

are also generated when you output the project or parts data in the

relevant report without sorting.

In the previous version (EPLAN 1.9), selecting property "<13060>" in

an "old" form meant that the previously selected property Regenerate

header after change <13003> was deleted from the form properties.

This no longer happens.

Outputting only connected connection points in connection diagrams

You can now configure device, cable, terminal, and pin connection

diagrams in such a way that only the connected connection points are

represented at the targets in the graphic in these connection diagrams.

Benefit: Using the new form property saves space in connection

diagrams. The documentation is clearer and all project

participants can quickly and easily find the information they

need to edit their task.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 235

In the form properties for each form you can use the new property

Connection diagram: Output only connected connection points

<13085>. First select this property in Property selection, then select

the relevant check box in the Value column.

This property only relates to targets and does not affect the devices,

cables, terminal strips, or plugs to be evaluated. Devices, cables, plugs,

and terminal strips are still listed in the connection diagrams without the

connected functions.

Example:

Property <13085> was selected for the form in a terminal connection

diagram. In the case of a motor which is the target of a terminal strip, the

connection diagram outputs only the function connection points that are

connected to the terminal strip.

Essential customization of user-defined connection diagram forms

Project editor:


new version. A correction to the connection diagrams may mean that you now obtain

modified reports when you use your own forms. A number of properties

in the connection diagrams are then displayed with an alignment box.

The standard forms in the EPLAN master data have already been cor-

rected where necessary. Alignment boxes are no longer displayed when

these forms are used.


236 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

You must correct any forms that you have created on the basis of our

forms. To do this, open the relevant form in the form editor and edit the

placeholder text for the placed properties where unwanted alignment

boxes are displayed. In the Properties - Placeholder text dialog, switch

to the Format tab and select the "No" option for the Draw alignment

box property. Then perform a master data synchronization and update

the reports.

New placeholders for cable charts in terminal and plug diagrams

One or more cable charts can be integrated into forms for terminal and

plug diagrams. You can use the Cable charts... placeholder elements to

display cable and conductor properties in the cable charts on the rele-

vant forms.

In order to better differentiate these placeholders from the header and

data areas of the dynamic areas, the placeholder elements Cable chart

(header)... and Cable chart (data area)... have been renamed as fol-

lows:

Old name: New name:

Cable chart (header)... Cable chart header...

Cable chart (data area)... Cable chart data area... Placeholder elements for outputting the counter target are now also

available. The counter target is the device that is connected to the

terminal strip / plug via the cable. This affects the following new place-

holder elements:

• Cable chart header: Counter target

Displays all connected counter targets of a cable for the header of the

cable chart.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 237

• Cable chart header external: Counter target

Displays all externally connected counter targets of a cable. To be

used when the header is rotated with regard to the data area.

This is assigned to the Cable chart data area external placeholder

element with the same index value via the index. The different ter-

minal targets are output using this index.

• Cable chart header internal: Counter target

Displays all internally connected counter targets of a cable. To be

used when the header is rotated with regard to the data area.

This is assigned to the Cable chart data area internal placeholder

element with the same index value via the index. The different ter-

minal targets are output using their index.

In most cases, all conductors of a cable are connected to the same

counter target. If several counter targets are connected to a cable, they

are listed in the cable chart, separated by semicolons.


238 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Macros

Description text for automatically generated page macros

When an automatically generated page macro is inserted, the Select

macro dialog now shows the description that you entered via the Macro:

Description <11057> page property for the macro, in the comments field

below the preview. If different descriptions are stored in a page macro,

only the description of the first page of the page macro is displayed.

Group macro boxes and associated objects

In fluid power, it is often necessary to group all the objects of a macro.

Grouping can take place, for example, when editing macro projects. To

reduce the amount of work required in a major macro project, the new

Group macro boxes and associated objects menu item is now avail-

able for macro projects.

Benefit: This considerably speeds up the grouping of the macro boxes

and thus the automatic generation of macros from macro

projects.

First select the pages on which the macro boxes are to be grouped. To

do this, select the project or the desired page(s) in the page navigator.

Select the menu items Utilities > Generate macros > Group macro

boxes and associated objects. Then, the macro box itself, the objects

in the box, and the objects assigned to the box are grouped for each

selected macro box. The macro box contents are checked when

grouping. If the contents conform to the criteria of a device group, a

device group is created for the macro box with its associated objects.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 239

Specifically assigning objects to macro boxes

When assigning individual objects to a macro box, you are now sup-

ported by a prompt. This makes the procedure similar to the process

already defined for assigning objects to a placeholder object.

Benefit: The new prompt avoids operating error when assigning

objects to macro boxes.

If, when marking, you have not selected all the associated macro box

objects for the macro box assignment and have then chosen the menu

item Assign objects to macro box in the popup menu for the macro

box, a new prompt will now be displayed. You can then use this prompt

to decide whether the objects you have not selected should be deleted

from the macro box assignment.

If you confirm the prompt with [Yes], the previous assignment will be lost

and only the currently selected objects are assigned to the macro box. If

you click [No] here, the previous assignment remains, and the addition-

ally selected objects are added to this assignment.


240 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Placeholder Objects

Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects

The familiar properties dialog is now also used for placeholder objects.

The placeholder object symbol graphic – the familiar "anchor" symbol – in the SPECIAL symbol library, has been given a new symbol called PLHO

for the purpose (see also page 427 in section "Master Data: Symbols").

Benefit: Because a standardized dialog is used, operation is now

easier. To find placeholders in macro collections and tem-

plate projects more quickly, you can display properties in the

diagram itself and print them for archiving purposes. This

saves time during data maintenance.

The following changes have been made to the placeholder object dialog:

• Placeholder object tab:

This tab now contains two tabs, Assignment and Values. The other

new features on these tabs are described in the two sections below.

• Display tab:

Now you can use this tab to change the format properties for the spe-

cial properties of the placeholder object (Placeholder object name,

Placeholder object: Last value set selected, Value set name), for

example, and set a user-defined property arrangement. The values of the first two properties mentioned are placed in the new EPLAN551,

Property placement.Placeholder objects layer, as standard.

• Symbol / function data tab:

This new tab for placeholder objects allows you to change the symbol

for the placeholder object (if you have created your own symbol for

this).

When you open projects with the "old" placeholder object symbols, you

are prompted to confirm that you want to update the master data. Once

you have confirmed the prompt with [Yes], the master data is updated

and the "old" placeholder object symbols are replaced by the new ones.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 241

New properties for placeholder objects

To automate the creation of schematics, it is necessary for all the object

properties in the EPLAN platform to be controllable by variables. This is

why the following properties are now also available to you on the place-

holder objects' Assignment tab:

• Function definition (Category / Group / ID) <20188>

Shows the function definition in "Category/Group/ID" format for the

associated objects of the placeholder object.


242 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• Width <20221>

Indicates the width of the black boxes, location and PLC boxes.

• Height <20222>

Indicates the height of the black boxes, location and PLC boxes.

Benefit: You no longer have to create your own macros for objects

that did not previously allow variables. The amount of effort

required for macro maintenance is reduced many times over.

The new properties can be made accessible externally by

using the relevant variables, and edited in the EPLAN Engi-

neering Center (EEC), for example. This greatly simplifies

modeling in the EEC.

Function definition

To be able to toggle between the different function definitions for an ob-

ject in a macro, for example, you must have created a relevant variable.

In the Values tab, you can then use Popup menu > Select function

definition to select a function definition and apply it as a value for this

variable. The category, group and ID of the function definition are

separated by a forward slash "/".

Box width and height

The new Width <20221> and Height <20222> properties for extending

boxes can also have variables assigned to them. These properties are

only available to placeholder objects and they allow the box width and

height to be specified. "Polyline" type boxes are not considered.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 243

Simplified assignment

After the data transfer from EPLAN 5, the variables entered in the pro-

perties there as values, are displayed in the Current value column of the

placeholder object.

To make it easier for you to transfer these predefined variables to the

Variable column, we have extended the Assignment tab by the new

Only display properties with value in Current value column check

box. If this check box is activated, then the table only shows the proper-

ties with an entry in the Current value column.

As part of this extension, the previous check box, Only display proper-

ties with value in Assignment column, has been renamed Only

display properties with value in Variable column. If this check box is

selected then the table only shows the properties having a value in the

Variable column.

If both check boxes are selected, this will be treated as an OR relation-

ship. In this case, the rows where either the Current value or Variable

columns are "empty", will also be displayed.

Extended standard operation

To copy entries from the Current value column, you can now also use

the Copy menu item in the popup menu. If the entire column is to be

copied, click the column header. This will mark the entire column, and it

can then be copied and pasted with [Ctrl] + [C] / [Ctrl] + [V], for exam-

ple. But this only copies the visible cells. The cells in collapsed hierarchy

levels are not copied.

Now also available to you in the Assignment tab popup menu are the

two menu items Expand and Collapse.


244 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Reports

Connection diagrams for wiring diagrams

In EPLAN it is now possible to generate "wiring diagrams" for devices.

Wiring diagrams consist of several connection diagrams and are used to

output information about connected conductors and targets. Devices can

be placed in a wiring diagram in the order in which they appear on the

mounting panel.

Benefit: Wiring diagrams are a frequently requested form of represen-

tation in Russia and China. Suitable reports can now support

you when planning these drawings. It is much simpler and

faster to create them and the result can be checked automati-

cally.

Wiring diagrams are output in the form of embedded connection dia-

grams, which can be placed manually in an open project page. Device

connection diagrams are generated for wiring diagrams for general

devices, and terminal and pin connection diagrams are generated for

wiring diagrams for terminal strips and plugs.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 245

Example:

The illustration below shows a section of a wiring diagram that has been

generated.

Normally, forms in table format are used for wiring diagrams. In the form

properties of the relevant forms select the following new properties in

Property selection:

• Connection diagram: Display all targets <13084>

• Connection diagram: Internal targets in table form <13086>

• Connection diagram: External targets in table form <13087>.

Select these properties. All the targets are then output and the properties

of these internal and external targets are displayed in table form in the

reports. A separate row is generated for each target.


246 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tip:

When generating the wiring diagrams, the forms for device, terminal and

pin connection diagrams specified in the project settings are used by

default. However, it is possible to specify a separate form for a device.

To do this, before generating the report, select the new property Form

for wiring diagram <20234> at the main function of the device in ques-

tion and specify which form should be used. Generating wiring diagrams

Before you can output a wiring diagram for the part placements on a

specific mounting panel, you must first insert an additional black box.

The reports generated will be placed in this black box at a later date.

Assign the device tag of the mounting panel to the black box and select

the "Overview" representation type for it.

Note:

The black box may be placed either immediately adjacent to the mount-

ing panel on a "Panel layout" type page or on an overview page, but

never on a report page.

Then use Utilities > Reports > Generate to open the Reports - <Pro-

ject name> dialog. In the dialog, click [New]. The Select report dialog

opens. Choose the "Manual placement" output format from the Output

format drop-down list. Then in the Select report type field select one of

the following reports:

• "Device-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)"

• "Terminal-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)" or

• "Pin-connection diagram (for wiring diagram)".

Select the Manual selection check box, then close the dialog by clicking

[OK].


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 247

The new Select mounting panel dialog then opens. Select the mounting

panel for which the wiring diagram is to be generated. Select the Hide

devices already reported check box if devices for which this report has

already been generated should no longer be offered.

Then in the Manual selection dialog select the devices for which you

want to generate a report. Multiple selection is possible.

Click [OK]; the report is then generated and hangs on the cursor. Place

the report on the appropriate positions in the black box. If you selected

several devices in the Manual selection dialog, you can place further

reports.

New messages for wiring diagrams

Check run 015002 has been added to the "Reports" message class in

order to check wiring diagrams.

You can use this check run to identify where part placements on the

mounting panel and the associated wiring diagrams do not match (e.g.

if a part placement has been removed or inserted retrospectively).

Note:

For this check run, and to hide devices that have already been evaluated

when generating a new report, it is essential to place the insertion points

for the generated reports inside the black box.


248 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Appending reports to the end

When generating reports from report templates, you now have the oppor-

tunity to configure EPLAN so that the output report pages are always

sorted after the last existing page.

Benefit: When generating template reports, the existing gaps for

spare pages in the page structure are retained.

To make an appropriate setting, first use Utilities > Reports > Generate

to open the Reports dialog. In the Templates tab, select an existing

template and then, next to the Start page of report block property in the

Value column, click [...]. In the subsequent dialog, in which you select

the start page for the report template, the new Append to the end check

box is now available to you.

If the check box is selected, the Page name field is cleared and grayed

out. In the report generation that follows, the report pages are sorted into

the specified structure identifiers. If there are already some report pages

in the structure identifier level, all the new report pages will be sorted

together behind the last existing page. Any gaps for spare pages that

may exist at structure identifier level are not filled and remain empty.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 249

Sorting cable overviews according to source and target

You now also have the opportunity in EPLAN to output reports of cable

overviews, cable diagrams, and connection lists, that are sorted accord-

ing to source and target. The Page sorting dialog has been extended by

the Use source / target check box for this purpose.

(You open this dialog from the Settings: Output to pages dialog

(typical menu path: Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name"

> Reports > Output to pages), when, for a line of a report type, (such

as a cable overview), you first click in the Page sorting column and then

on [...].)

The Use source / target check box can only be selected for cable dia-

grams, cable overviews, and connection lists. If the check box is se-

lected, it is not the device tags of the cables that are used for page sort-

ing, but those of the sources and targets. Cables with different structure

identifiers for their source and target (such as mounting locations, for

example), will be output in multiple structure identifiers.


250 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Using page structure identifiers for reports

Also new in the Page sorting dialog is the Use placement check box. If

this check box is selected, when reporting devices into different project

structures, it is not the structure identifiers of the devices that are consi-

dered, but the structure identifiers of the page on which they are placed.

Note:

The Identifiers for list output settings, which you could make in

EPLAN 5 at a device in the Part tab, are not applied during the EPLAN 5

/ fluidPLAN data import. For the devices to be sorted into the correct

reports, you have to select the Use placement check box described

above in the project settings.

Creating report templates

In the Templates tab of the Reports - <Project name> dialog, it is pos-

sible to create multiple report templates for the same report type. If a report template (called 0001, for example) already exists, when another

template of this type is created, a prompt is now displayed, querying

whether or not the old template should be overwritten. If you select [No]

here, two templates will be generated with the same name, which you

should then change.

Benefit: It is no longer possible to overwrite an existing template

accidentally.

Copying and pasting function-related embedded reports

When copying and pasting devices and the associated function-related

embedded reports, the relationship is retained between the devices and

a function-related embedded report that has also been copied. The same

applies to creating relevant macros with function-related, embedded

reports. Pasting directly updates the embedded report. The device to

which it applies is then immediately obvious.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 251

Benefit: This allows you to use function-related embedded reports in

macros, for example.

Example:

If, in the schematic, you copy and then paste a device such as a cable with -W5, and the associated function-related, embedded report (such as

a cable diagram), the new cable diagram you have pasted applies to the device pasted with it (displayed DT after numbering, e.g. -W6).

Breaking up modules

Parts which belong to a module can now be broken up into the relevant

sub-parts when outputting the parts list and the summarized parts list in

the reports and in the labeling.

For this purpose, a new Break up modules check box has been added

to the corresponding settings dialogs Settings: Parts and Settings:

Labeling. If this check box is selected, the modules are broken down

into their components, i.e. their individual parts.

It is now also possible to break up modules in the PDF export settings.

The Break up modules check box has also been added to the Part

properties tab in the Settings: PDF export dialog. If this check box is

selected, the existing modules are broken up. For the exported PDF file

this means that all the individual parts of the module are listed with the

specified part properties for a device in the device tree.

Tip:

If you want to break up the parts of an assembly which have been

assigned to a module, you must select the two Break up assemblies

and Break up modules check boxes in the settings. If the assembly is not nested into any other (sub-)assemblies, enter the value 2 in the Up

to level field. The assembly in the module is then broken up as well.


252 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Outputting part assemblies in labeling

If you use Utilities > Reports > Labeling to output labels for part as-

semblies, then you must bear in mind that these reports now depend on

the selection currently made (in the graphical editor or in a navigator,

for example). Part assemblies include, for example, the "Parts lists",

"Summarized parts lists", and "Manufacturer / supplier lists" report types.

This means:

• If terminals are selected, terminal parts are output.

• If terminal strips are selected, all the terminal and terminal strip parts

are output.

• If terminal strips and individual terminals are selected, all the terminal

and terminal strip parts are output. However, terminal parts are only

evaluated once.

The same applies to cables and connections.

Note:

All parts are only output when in the Settings: Labeling dialog, the

Include parts group box has the appropriate check boxes selected

(e.g. Terminal parts, Cable conductor parts, etc.).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 253

Parts Management

Improved full-text filter

The new version now provides you with an improved, faster full-text

search in parts management.

Benefit: Now that the search text can be entered directly, full-text

search has become easier and more intuitive. The use of a

SQL server as the parts database also makes a fast, full-text

search possible.

The full-text search dialog has been removed, and instead, you enter

the text you want to find directly in the Full-text filter field. Then click

(Find). The display in the tree / in the list / in the combination is updated

and only shows the parts that contain the entered text in a field. To de-

lete the search term and return to the display of all the parts, click

(Delete).

In this case, the text entered can also be only a part of the term to be searched: For example if you are filtering by the text Motor, parts in

which texts such as Motors, Motor power line or Three-phase

motor occur, will also be displayed. When parts management is closed,

text-based filters are deleted.

Note:

In the improved full-text search, you can gain access not only in the

Parts management dialog, but also in the Part selection dialog and

in the navigator for part master data. Full-text search syntax

Upper-/lower-case letters are not taken into account in the full-text

search. Do not use placeholder characters (such as * or ?), as these will

not be evaluated in the full-text search.


254 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Instead, the search logic when entering text is now similar to the com-

mon full-text syntax (+, spaces, etc.), used in Internet search engines.

Example:

Enter the following search text in the Full-text filter field:

• "Isolating terminal with fuse"

In this search, the parts found will contain exactly the Isolating

terminal with fuse character string.

• Terminal motor

With this OR operation, the parts found are those for which the text terminal or motor is contained in the text boxes. There may be

different text boxes for the individual parts.

• Terminal +motor or +terminal +motor

With this AND operation, a space has to be entered between the first

search term and the plus character. The parts found are those con-taining the text terminal and motor in the text boxes. The two texts

may both be contained within one text field, or may appear in different

fields.

Note:

This AND operation can then only be used if a SQL server is used as

the parts database. If Access databases are used, the search term Terminal +motor would have the same effect as Terminal motor;

thus it would be treated as an OR operation. Search index for full-text search

An index is now created in the parts database for the full-text search.

When you run this search for the first time, you first have to confirm a

message about generating the search index with [OK]. If the search

index has to be updated after a change in the parts database, for exam-

ple, do this by selecting Utilities > Parts > Update search index.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 255

Full-text search and field-based filter combination

The Field-based filter and the Full-text filter can be used simulta-

neously. In a case like this, the effect of the filters is additive.

For example, if a full-text search should only occur over a certain "part

type" (such as "Electrical engineering - Component"), you now set the

field-based filter. In the Filter dialog of the field-based filter, you create

an appropriate filter, activate it, and then enter the search term in the

Full-text filter field.

Note:

Please note that the parts structure of the Parts management is freely

configurable. The tree configuration shown here may differ from your

configuration, which you can configure via Utilities > Parts > Manage-

ment > [Extras] > Settings.


256 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Additional selection option using the "Combination" tab

In version 1.9 International SP 1, the part master data navigator had an

added Combination tab, which is now also available in the Parts man-

agement dialog. This new tab contains a combined view of the parts tree

and list.

Benefit: This tab allows you to navigate more easily and quickly in

your part master data. This means that even with extensive

part master data, you retain an overview every time and

quickly find the required parts, which you then apply to the

project data at the push of a button. Increased planning

safety and reduced planning time are the result of consistent

system optimization.

You can preselect parts in the tree view in the upper area of the Combi-

nation tab. When you select a tree structure level such as the "Cables /

connections" product group, the associated parts are displayed in the list

below. The range of the display in this tab can also be configured via

Popup menu > Configure columns.

Creating subtrades for fluid power

It is now also possible to create separate subtrades in parts manage-

ment for fluid power-specific trades, and assign parts to these new

subtrades.

Benefit: This means that for the first time, you can assign your parts

to multiple trades and now subtrades as well. This has the

advantage that you can classify your parts in parts manage-

ment even more precisely. There is also no longer any need

to enter subtrades manually at devices.

The General tab has been redesigned for this. The trades which contain

a part, are now no longer displayed in a group box with multiple check

boxes, but as a list in the Trade / subtrade field (e.g. "Electrical engi-

neering, Pneumatics").


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 257

In this field, click [...], so that in the subsequent dialog, you can define

additional trades / subtrades, which should contain the part. In the sub-

sequent Trade / subtrade dialog, select the check boxes in the Use

column to define the additional trades that are to contain the part.

For fluid power-specific trades (hydraulics, pneumatics, lubrication,

cooling), use the (New) button to open the Create subtrade dialog

and create a new subtrade. A subtrade of this type (such as "Pneumatics

high pressure", "Machine cooling" etc.), is then fitted in below the se-

lected trade in the Trade / subtrade column.

Translating or editing the name of a subtrade

Multilingual entries are possible when entering a name in the Create

subtrade dialog. The popup menu for this field has the corresponding

popup menu items, e.g. Translate, Multilingual input, etc.

To edit a subtrade, select the relevant subtrade in the Trade / subtrade

dialog and click the (Edit) button, or double-click. In the dialog that

opens you can change the name of a subtrade retrospectively or trans-

late it using the abovementioned popup menu items.

Subtrades in reports

When reports and labels are output (e.g. parts list, connection list, etc.),

there can be multi-level sorting by trade and subtrade. You already have

a predefined scheme available.

Access via EPLAN API

As subtrades are stored as "normal" properties in EPLAN, access is

possible via EPLAN API. There are new properties for this, Subtrade

'Hydraulics' <22158>, Subtrade 'Pneumatics' <22159>, Subtrade

'Lubrication' <22195>, and Subtrade 'Cooling' <22196>.


258 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Data field for the part number of an ERP system

In parts management, you can now also enter the part number of an

external ERP system.

Benefit: You can now use both the "technical" and your own "com-

mercial" part number in EPLAN parts management. This

means that you will not have a problem synchronizing or link-

ing to additional parts management systems (ERP systems),

even if these systems use other identifying part numbers.

The General tab has been extended by the ERP number field for this

purpose. You can enter the part number of the external ERP system into

this new data field, which is located directly below the Part number field.

Just like the part number, this number also has to be unique, and this is

checked as well, when the part or variant is saved. ERP numbers may

be up to 255 characters in length.

Entering barcodes for parts

Barcodes can be used, for example, to uniquely identify products. Differ-

ent coding standards are used internationally, such as GTIN (Global

Trade Item Number). In addition to this, companies use company-spe-

cific or separate industry standards. In the new version of EPLAN parts

management, it is now also possible to enter the identification number of

this type of barcode for a part.

Benefit: Centrally specified and globally unique numbers are used as

the basis for parts systems that span companies, industries,

and countries. Universal, machine-readable numbers from

manufacturer to end user reduce response times and logis-

tics costs. By entering this data in parts management, EPLAN

fits seamlessly into this global concept.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 259

The Prices / Other tab has been extended for this purpose by the two

Barcode number / type fields. Enter the number and type of the particu-

lar barcode in these two fields, for example, "GTIN" or "EAN-13". Click

(Delete) to remove the current barcode type from the selection list.

The content of these two fields can be included in part assemblies (parts

lists, manufacturer / supplier lists, etc.) and when exporting and importing

parts. To allow you to consider this data in the reports, two new proper-

ties, Barcode number <22208> and Barcode type <22209>, are avail-

able to you (within the parts data) as placeholder texts in the respective

forms, and as format elements in the labeling settings.

Note:

Please be aware that when you enter the barcode number, there is no

check for uniqueness. The data is output in the reports exactly as it is

entered here. This means that no barcodes with combinations of lines

and gaps are generated. The contents of the two fields are not translat-

able.

Clip-on height for placements on mounting rails

Items which are placed on mounting rails often have a recess to receive

the mounting rail. So that this recess can be taken into account indivi-

dually when the part is placed, the Mounting data tab now has a new

Clip-on height field.

Benefit: The clip-on height is taken into account individually during

part placement. And after a change to the mechanical struc-

ture, the space requirements of the entire assembly in the

enclosure are available at any time.

The clip-on height indicates how far an item extends into a mounting rail.

The bigger the value, the smaller the distance to the underside of the

mounting rail (and therefore to the mounting surface). If the value is set

to "0", the item sits exactly on the top edge of the mounting rail.


260 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If the mounting rail on which the part is placed as an item is changed, the

clip-on height of the placed item then refers to the new mounting rail. The

position of the item is then shifted accordingly. To change the mounting

rail, in the properties dialog for the placed mounting rail switch to the

Parts tab and select a different mounting rail part.

Note:

This functionality is intended only for the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on.

Example:

1 = mounting surface; 2 = mounting rail; 3 = clip-on height.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 261

Center mismatch for placements

In order to make things clearer, the former Clip-on height / center

mismatch field has been renamed.

Old name: New name:

Clip-on height / center mismatch Center mismatch If you do not want the part to be centered in the front view, enter the off-

set relative to the middle of the mounting rail in the Center mismatch

field. The item will then be automatically offset by this value.

Note:

Entries in the Center mismatch field will be evaluated by the "EPLAN

Pro Panel" add-on and by EPLAN Cabinet.

Entering outline drawings in parts management

EPLAN parts management now also gives you the opportunity to assign

outline drawings to a part.

Benefit: With outline drawings, you enter your own assembly profiles

in the system. These can immediately be used in the dia-

gram, in variable lengths. The required special profiles are

then quickly available in the system.

You can enter this type of drawing, which has previously been created in

the outline editor as an outline of the "outline extrusion" type, in parts

from the "mounting rail" or "cable ducts" product groups, for example. If

a corresponding part is then inserted into a layout space in the "EPLAN

Pro Panel" add-on, the outline is extruded to a 3D object.

Outline drawings are entered on the Technical data tab in the Macro

field. Click the [...] button next to the field, and in the subsequent Select macro dialog, select a file of the Outline extrusion (*.fc2) file

type.


262 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New "Documents" tab

Previously, it was not always possible for some parts from companies

operating internationally, to enter all the available documents into the

relevant fields of the Technical data tab. This is the reason why the

Parts management dialog has been extended by the new Documents

tab. Now you can enter and manage up to 20 external documents and /

or hyperlinks.

Benefit: Now you can store all the external documentation for a part

in parts management. You can supply all downstream pro-

cesses with the required information from engineering.

Colleagues from production, assembly, commissioning,

servicing, and maintenance will thank you, if all the in-

formation that they require is also stored in the project

documentation.

The previous External document 1 - 3 fields on the Technical data tab

have been removed. External documents that have already been stored

here are moved to the first three rows of the new tab.

To enter an external document on the Documents tab, first click in the

relevant cell in the File / hyperlink column and then click [...]. In the sub-

sequent dialog, select the document file to be linked. But here too, you

can also use Copy and Paste (in the Popup menu) to enter an Internet

or e-mail address. Then, in the Designation column, enter any textual

description for the hyperlink / external document.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 263

Assigning cables / connections to an image file

With the new version, you can now also store an image file for parts of

the "Cables / connections" Product group, as with mounting data. The

parts management Cable data tab has been extended by the Image file

field for this purpose.

Benefit: The assignment of an image makes part selection easier and

safer for the user.

To assign an image file to a cable, click [...] in this field to select the

desired image file in the subsequent file selection dialog.

Protecting data fields before updating

When importing parts data into the parts database, it is now possible to

protect individual data fields before updating. The fields to be protected

are listed in a scheme in the Field assignment dialog.

Benefit: This allows you to prevent manually entered data (such as

your own text in the Description field), being overwritten

during a parts data import with updating of the existing

records.

To create an appropriate scheme, in the Import records dialog, click the

[...] button, which is located next to the Field assignment field. Use the

new Protect fields tab to define the properties that are not to be updated

when parts data is imported. To do this, click (New), and in the Crite-

ria selection dialog, select the property to be ignored when importing.

New synchronization of parts

Synchronization of parts is now similar in process and appearance to

synchronization in master data. In the Utilities > Parts menu, the two

previous menu items Current project --> Parts database and Parts

database --> Current project have been replaced by the new menu

item Synchronize current project.


264 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

With this menu item, you open the Synchronization of parts - <Project

name> dialog, which you can use to specifically update the data of indi-

vidual parts in the project. In this dialog, you also have the opportunity to

complete the parts database. Use [Extras] > Complete current system

to transfer, for example, the parts stored in a project to a new parts data-

base.

Benefit: This new dialog makes parts data synchronization a much

more transparent process. You know in advance whether the

status of the data is different, and can specifically synchron-

ize individual parts, or exclude them from synchronization.

Also new to the Utilities > Parts menu are the following two menu items:

• Update current project

This menu item searches the current project for obsolete parts data.

If parts data that is more up-to-date is found in system parts (that is,

in the parts database), the parts stored in the project will be updated.

• Complete current project

This menu item searches the current project for missing parts; if avail-

able, they are then automatically stored.

Updating parts when opening a project

You can now set up EPLAN so that the parts stored in a project are

updated when the project is opened. The general settings for the

management of projects have been extended by the Update stored

parts at Open check box for this purpose (under Options > Settings >

Projects > "Project name" > Management > General).

Benefit: This automatically keeps the parts in the project up to date.

Because synchronization is automatic, there is no need for

manual action, and this ensures that all users are always

working with current parts data.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 265

If this check box is selected, the parts used in the project are synchron-

ized with the parts in the parts database when the project is opened. If

the project parts are obsolete, a prompt opens. Confirm this with [Yes],

and the stored parts will be updated.

Additional menu items for the part master data navigator

To extend the insertion of devices / the selection of parts using drag &

drop from the part master data navigator, the popup menu of the Part

master data dialog has been extended by two menu items, Insert

device and Assign.

If a macro with different representation types is stored in a part, the

different submenu items (Multi-line, Single-line, etc.) of the Insert

device menu item allow you to place the part macro in the required

representation type. If a suitable representation type is not found, then

after a note, a macro in a different representation type is suggested.

With Assign, you can assign a part previously selected in the navigator

to a certain function on the schematic. When you select this option, the

part hangs on the cursor. Position the cursor on the required component

in the graphical editor, and left-click to assign the part. The part can be

assigned several times; it remains on the cursor until you cancel the

action.

Tip:

For part selection using drag & drop from the part master data navigator,

first select the required part in the Part master data dialog, press the

[Alt] key, and drag the part using drag & drop to a component in the

graphical editor.


266 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Message Management

Improved ergonomics

Preview for message management

Some of the functionalities of message management have been changed

in the current version. Now, as in all the other project data dialogs, you

can use the graphical preview. If you have opened the graphical preview

(View > Graphical preview), the page that a selected message relates

to, will be displayed there. The faulty function will be highlighted in the

preview.

Now you are also given a properties preview in the Property preview

dialog, if you have selected a message in message management.

Because the graphical preview has been extended, the Preview of

errors menu item in the message management popup menu has been

removed. The Update menu item has also been removed. Instead, you

can now use the familiar "Go to" functionalities Go to (cross-refe-

renced), Go to (all representation types) and Go to (graphic).

Benefit: Graphically, it is instantly obvious where the cause of the

message can be found. Consistent ergonomics reduce

familiarization time and simplify operation for occasional

users.

Direct editing of properties

It is now also possible in message management to directly edit the de-

vices underlying the messages. The popup menu has been extended by

the Edit in table, Properties, and Properties (global) menu items for

this.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 267

Benefit: With edit in table, you can now resolve multiple messages

with the same cause, in one process. This drastically reduces

the number of editing steps required and considerably

speeds up message correction. You can find and eliminate

planning errors quickly and easily. This allows you to specifi-

cally improve the quality of your project documentation.

Displaying layout space messages

To allow you to quickly identify messages created in an "EPLAN Pro

Panel" add-on layout space, the Layout space column has been added

to the Message management dialog. The name of the layout space on

which the erroneous object is located is shown here.

If you select a relevant message in the table and double-click, the erro-

neous object is shown in the 3D view of the opened layout space. By

means of Popup menu > Configure columns, you can hide and show

the Layout space column in message management.

New trade-specific filter settings

It is now also possible in EPLAN message management, to display only

specific messages for process engineering and / or for mechanics.

Benefit: The messages suitable for the trades give you a clear task

list and clear responsibilities for editors. This simplifies the

division of work, and the project status becomes more trans-

parent, particularly in cross-discipline engineering projects.

For this purpose, the new Process engineering and Mechanics check

boxes have been added to the Filter: Messages dialog. If one of these

check boxes is selected and the Active check box in message manage-

ment is also selected, then only the messages for the devices assigned

to the particular trade will be shown in the Message management

dialog.


268 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New "Prevent errors" check type for error checking

The new "Prevent errors" check type is now available for numerous

checks in the check-related settings for message management.

Benefit: The new "Prevent errors" check type prevents incorrect

schematics at the planning stage. Instead of correcting after

the event, errors are detected immediately and eliminated at

once. There is no need for amendment.

Choose the optimum type of check for you, subject to the

engineering phases. EPLAN gives you great freedom in

project data checking, and gives you optimum support in

creating high-quality machine and plant documentation.

If you have set this new check box type for a message number in the

Settings: Messages and checks dialog, then during project editing,

a Prevent errors note will immediately inform you as soon as the set

check criterion is violated by a change.This note lists not only the check

text, but also the page, DT, and position of the incorrect function. After

closing the note with [OK], the listed changes are undone, and you can

repeat the selected action (e.g. insert a symbol).

Example:

In a check run scheme for the message "017005" (with the message

text "Duplicate DT, too many main functions") you have set the "Prevent errors" check type. If, in the EPLAN-Demo sample project, on page

=EB3+ET1/1, you now insert a safety fuse (symbol F1 with number 50),

and enter -F1 for this device as the displayed DT, as soon as you close

the properties dialog with [OK], the Prevent errors note is displayed.

Once you have clicked [OK] here, symbol insertion is undone. The se-

lected symbol stays on the cursor and you can repeat the action – but

this time with a correct DT.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 269

Setting option for module-specific checks

In addition to message management, there are other modules that also

run checks and output messages in the message management dialog

(e.g. when automatically generating cables). These checks are desig-

nated module-specific checks and in the Settings: Messages and

checks dialog in the Type of check column, show the "Module-specific"

entry as standard.

You now have the opportunity in settings to "switch off" these module-

specific checks. If you do not want to perform a module-specific check,

select "No" as the Type of check setting.

Benefit: Module-specific checks can now also be "switched off". You

can specifically define the extent of automatic checking and

only run a data check when required.

Separate filters for running error checking

In the check-related settings for message management, you now have

the opportunity to set a separate filter for specific error checks. This

allows you, for example, to run an error check only for the functions of a

certain trade, or only for objects with a special function definition.

Benefit: By using other filter criteria, only the messages that you need

are displayed. Project evaluation and monitoring is easier and

faster.

The new Filter column has been added to the Settings: Messages and

checks dialog for this purpose. The "All trades" filter scheme is preset as

standard in the relevant cell for most of the checks. Filtering does not

take place with this setting.

Click [...], and in the subsequent Filter dialog, select a predefined filter

scheme or create your own new scheme. For most error checking, you

can, depending on the selected message class, define not only the


270 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Trade property, but also other function-specific properties and / or a

function definition (function group, etc.), as a filter criterion.

With error checking for which a separate filter cannot be set (such as

module-specific checks), the "No filter" entry (which cannot be modified)

is shown in the Filter column.

Note:

Please be aware that when you use a complex filter with multiple criteria,

it can take a long time to run a check, as EPLAN has to evaluate the filter

and check that it meets the criteria.

New check run for checking the online numbering format

Different actions, such as copying and pasting pages from other projects,

or the insertion of macros, can result in device tags getting into your pro-

ject, that do not comply with your specified device structure. To check

the set online numbering format for the devices in the project, you can

now access the new 017008 check run in EPLAN.

If, in the Settings: Messages and checks dialog for a check run

scheme, you have set this new message appropriately, then message

management will display the devices that do not conform to your defaults

in the Numbering format dialog. When the "Online / offline" check type

is set, messages are written to message management as soon as they

occur. With the "Offline" check type, messages are only listed in mes-

sage management after a check run.

You access the Numbering format dialog for online numbering, for

example, via Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >

Devices > Numbering (online). Then, in the Settings: Numbering

(online) dialog for the On symbol insertion group box, click next to the

Numbering format field on [...].


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 271

New Features in the "Revision Management" Add-on

Note:

The "Revision Management" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN

Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of delivery

for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional and EPLAN Fluid.

Revision control, the "Revision Management" add-on, is used to auto-

matically record and document subsequent modifications to existing

plants. To obtain information about changes in the various project states,

you can use the following operations:

• Revision with change tracking

With change tracking, you generate a revision. The current project

becomes the revision project, and you then continue working in this.

All the changes in this revision project are logged.

• Property comparison of projects

With this operation, you compare certain properties of the current

project with the corresponding properties of a reference project. You

can decide which properties will be checked for changes.

Renamed revision control operation

In older EPLAN versions, the property comparison is designated as a

Project comparison. So that the project comparison of the revision can

be more clearly distinguished from the project verification of project

management, some renaming has taken place in the user interface,

including:

Old name: New name:

Project comparison Property comparison of projects

Comparison project Reference project In addition to this, the revision control user interface has also greatly

changed, as its menu structure has been adapted to the two operations

mentioned above (see the following section on page 272).


272 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

We have also incorporated the following new features for you:

• All the modified pages of a revised project can be completed with

common revision data (see page 275).

• Report pages can be updated upon completion (see page 277).

• The revision index for page modifications can be automatically given

consecutive numbers (see page 278).

• A separate revision marker is available for new objects in the reports

(see page 281).

• When comparing the properties of projects, the objects to be com-

pared can be determined by alternative identification (see page 283).

• The results of a properties comparison are shown in a new dialog

(see page 286).

• New settings have been made available for comparing the properties

of projects (see page 289).

• The results of a properties comparison are saved in a project-specific

database (see page 290).

• The revision data from a properties comparison can now also be

deleted (see page 291).

• In change tracking and during a properties comparison for projects,

the deleted objects can now also be displayed (see page 292).

Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics

In the new EPLAN version, we have divided the two revision control

operations in the user interface into two different menu items. Because of

this, below the Utilities > Revision control menu path, there are now

two new menu items, Change tracking and Property comparison of

projects.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 273

Benefit: The spatial separation of the menu items makes it easier for

you to distinguish the two different revision control

operations. Communication difficulties are thus substantially

reduced.

After the division, the Change tracking menu item shows the following

submenu items:

• Generate revision

• Complete pages

• Deleted pages

• Edit revision data

• Delete revision.

And the Property comparison of projects menu item has the following

submenu items available:

• Generate reference project

• Compare projects

• Show results of the properties comparison

• Add revision markers

• Delete revision.


274 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The two menu items Complete project and Remove write protection,

which are relevant to both operations, are still located directly below the

main menu item, Revision control.

Division of the settings

In the course of this interface redesign, the revision settings have also

been renamed, or split into different dialogs.

The project-specific settings under Options > Settings > Projects >

"Project name" > Management > Revision have been split between

the following settings dialogs:

• Settings: Revision (property comparison of projects)

This dialog is where the new settings for the property comparison of

projects can be found (see page 289).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 275

• Settings: Revision (graphical representation)

In this dialog, the settings for displaying the revision markers have

been moved. Most of the settings for displaying the graphical marker

apply both to change tracking and to the property comparison of pro-

jects. For more information, see the section on page 281.

• Settings: Revision (change tracking)

This dialog is where the familiar project-specific settings for change

tracking are located.

Information about the new settings, While deleting create deletion

markers and list deleted pages and Take page types specially

into consideration when completing can be found in the sections

"Displaying deleted objects" on page 292 and "Numbering the revision

index" on page 278.

The dialog with the company-specific comparison settings for revision,

has been renamed the Settings: Property comparison of projects

dialog. The menu path to this dialog is: Options > Settings > Company

> Management > Property comparison of projects.

Also available to you in the company settings is the new Settings:

Change tracking (numbering of the revision index) dialog. More

information on this is provided in the section "Numbering the revision

index" on page 278.

Project completion enhancement

Generating a revision via the Utilities > Revision control > Change

tracking > Generate revision menu path produces an edited project.

This type of project is designated a revision project. Changes to a

revision project are identified by revision markers.


276 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If you now use Utilities > Revision control > Complete project to com-

plete a revision project, then there is no longer just a prompt, but instead

a new dialog opens. This Complete project dialog gives you the oppor-

tunity to enter common revision data (revision index, description, and

reason for change) for all the modified pages of a revision project.

Benefit: On completion of a revised project, you specify common

revision data for all the modified pages.

The dialog also has the same input options for this purpose as the

Description of page modification dialog that opens when pages are

completed. When you complete a revision project, the comment for the

revision is suggested in the Complete project dialog as the entry for the

Description field.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 277

Generating a report when completing a project and pages

In another new feature, you can now also update the reports when com-

pleting the projects / pages.

Benefit: When completing the projects, you can simultaneously bring

the reports up to date. The report pages have the same

revision index that was last specified when completing.

In the Complete project dialog, the Generate report when completing

project check box is available for this purpose. If this check box is se-

lected, when you close the dialog with [OK], all the project report pages

are updated. Once a project has been completed in this way, all the

report pages are up to date, and the "Draft" identifier has been removed

for all the pages.

In our standard plot frame, multiple revision properties are placed as

special texts. Using this plot frame, the Revision index (change

tracking) [1] page property is displayed in the table of contents and in

the revision overview, for example. If a report is generated for a project

when completing, then afterwards, these report pages show the last

revision index to be specified.

Note:

Pages of the "Revision overview" page type are now also considered in

revision control. This means that relevant pages can, for example, be

identified as a "draft" and also completed. The special texts for the

revision index are displayed and updated on these pages. Generating a report when completing report pages

The Description of page modification dialog when completing pages

has also been appropriately extended (menu path: Utilities > Revision

control > Change tracking > Complete pages). If the new Generate

report when completing pages check box is activated, the selected

report pages are updated.


278 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If generating a report produces a modification to a report page (for exam-

ple, in the table of contents, in the revision overview, etc.), then this page

will be completed with the same revision index, and the "Draft" identifier

for this page will be removed. The selected report pages are updated

even if they are not identified as a "draft".

For other pages that are selected and which are not report pages (such

as schematic pages), the check box when completing has no effect.

Numbering the revision index

When completing pages, you now have the opportunity to set up the revi-

sion so that EPLAN automatically suggests a value for the revision index.

The revision index is determined by means of a numbering scheme, and

it is always the highest value that is suggested.

Benefit: Revision indexes for page modifications can be automatically

assigned consecutive numbers.

Numbering schemes for the revision index

To select a numbering scheme for the revision index or to create one of

your own, select Options > Settings > Company > Management >

Change tracking (numbering of the revision index). By default, a

scheme is defined in this new dialog, to be used to determine a sugges-

tion for the revision index.

A scheme is edited, and a numbering format defined, in exactly the same

way as in the other settings dialogs for numbering. The "Counter" and

"Separator" format elements are available to you here.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 279

Display warning if revision index does not conform to the scheme:

If this check box is selected in the settings dialog, when pages are com-

pleted, a warning is shown if the entered value does not conform to the

suggested revision index. Confirm this warning with [OK], and the

entered value is applied, which interrupts the numbering of the indexes.

The numbering of the revision index will start from the beginning, with the

next completion.

Completing pages with a numbering scheme

If you have selected or created a different numbering scheme, then

when pages or a project are completed, the highest revision index is

determined for the pages to be completed. In such a case, a value is

suggested to you in the Complete project and Description of page

modification dialogs for the Revision index field. And with each sub-

sequent completion, the suggested index is increased in accordance with

the set numbering scheme.

Taking page types specially into consideration when completing

In change tracking, you can now specify that certain page types are spe-

cially treated when completing. You can also complete pages that have

not changed, and exclude from completion pages that have changed.

Benefit: • The latest revision index can now also be shown on pages

that have not been modified.

• Report pages can be excluded from completion. These

pages will then not be listed in the revision overview after

updating and these overview pages remain clear.

The project-specific revision settings under Options > Settings > Pro-

jects > "Project name" > Management > Revision (change tracking)

have been extended by the Take page types specially into considera-

tion when completing group box. An illustration can be found in the

"Dividing menu items for improved ergonomics" section, starting from

page 274 onwards.


280 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Always complete:

The page types shown in this field are always considered when complet-

ing and are provided with a revision index, even if there have been no

modifications on the project page.

To allow pages with the page type selected in the Always complete field

to be considered when completing pages, you must also select these

pages in the page navigator before completing, or complete the project

straight away. If you wish the current revision index to be numbered as

well, you must select a relevant numbering scheme in the company

settings.

Example:

You have created a revision of the sample project EPLAN-DEMO, and

have made a change on schematic page =EB3+ET1/1 with the Power

supply description.

To allow the latest revision index to also be shown on the title page of

the project, in the Settings: Revision (change tracking) dialog, in the Always complete field, select the page type Title page / cover

sheet. First of all, in the page navigator, select both the schematic page

and the title page. Once you have then completed the pages with the index EPLAN1, this text will also be displayed in the plot frame on the title

page. Never complete:

The page types shown in this field are never considered when complet-

ing, regardless of whether or not changes have been made on the pro-

ject page.

If, for example, certain page types are listed for report pages here,

although the relevant pages will be updated when completing, they will

not be displayed in the revision overview.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 281

Example:

You have made some changes on the schematic pages of a revision

project. Now when you complete the project and select the Generate

report when completing project check box (see page 275), the report

pages will be updated before completion. These updates are recorded as

a change and also listed in a previously output revision overview. With

extensive reports, this can quickly cause the revision overview to be-

come confusing.

If the updated report pages are not to be listed in the revision overview,

you must previously exclude the report pages from completion. To do

this, in the Settings: Revision (change tracking) dialog, in the Never complete field, select the relevant page types (Parts list, Device

tag list, etc.). Now when you complete the project, the report pages

are actually updated, but not listed in the revision overview. Use the (New) button above the two fields Always complete and

Never complete, to move to the Select page type dialog, where you

can select the required page type.

Differing graphical markers for change tracking

In change tracking, it was previously only possible to use the graphical

markers for changed objects to identify revision changes. In the new

version, the differing graphical markers for added, changed, and deleted

objects are now also shown in change tracking.

New revision marker for reports

New and moved objects on report pages (list entries, graphics, etc.),

have previously all been simply marked as "changed" in a revision

report. A new settings option now makes it possible for you to select a

separate graphical marker for new objects that have been added to the

reports.


282 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The Graphical marker group box has been extended by the New in

report tab for this purpose. This graphical marker is located in the

project-specific settings for the revision under Options > Settings >

Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision (graphical

representation).

Once a report has been updated, all the new objects (such as the new

devices of a device tag list) are marked as "New in report" by this graphi-

cal marker. Objects that have been moved by the newly added objects

will continue to be shown as "changed" objects on the report pages.

Note:

Please note that the graphical marker for the "New in report" revision

change is only used in change tracking, and does not work in master

data reports (forms documentation, plot frame documentation, etc.).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 283

Alternative properties comparison

When comparing the properties of two projects in revision control, you

now have the opportunity to run the comparison using an alternative

identification.

Benefit: When comparing properties with alternative identification, you

can also compare projects that have been automatically

generated.

A standard property comparison of projects identifies the objects by an

internal object ID. When projects are automatically generated (by the

EPLAN Engineering Center, for example), the internal object IDs are re-

assigned at every generation. This means that every time you generate

them, a completely new project emerges and all objects in this project

are given new object IDs. This makes it impossible to carry out a proper-

ties comparison using the identification of objects based on the object ID

anymore.

If you want to run an alternative properties comparison, in the Compare

properties of projects dialog, you must select the new Alternative

identification check box. For more information, see the following

section.

Comparing the properties of projects

Before actually comparing the properties, you must first generate a

reference project. The reference project is usually an earlier copy of the

current project. You then select the desired project in the page navigator

and select the menu items Utilities > Revision control > Property

comparison of projects > Compare projects.


284 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

After selecting the reference project in the Compare properties of

projects dialog, you then specify your settings for the comparison.

Excluding structure identifiers from the properties comparison

You can use the new Structure identifier setting field to define which

structure identifiers are no longer to be seen as different during a prop-

erty comparison of projects.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 285

If you have renamed the structure identifiers, they will normally be

treated in the property comparison of projects as if they have been

deleted and inserted again. If you do not wish to display such changes,

you can create a scheme that tells you which structure identifiers were

renamed. The specified structure identifiers are no longer considered in

a property comparison of projects.

You use the [...] button next to the Structure identifier setting field to

open a dialog with the same name. There you specify which structure

identifier in the reference project is to be replaced by which structure

identifier from the current project, and you can save these settings in a

separate scheme.

Note:

This setting is only useful if you have activated the alternative identifica-

tion of objects using the Alternative identification check box. Create deletion markers for deleted objects

This check box of the same name is also new in the dialog. If this is se-

lected, the deleted objects (components, texts, etc.), on the project

pages are identified by a revision marker and a deletion marker. More

information on this is provided in the section "Displaying deleted objects"

on page 292.

Properties comparison with alternative identification

To run a properties comparison with alternative identification, select the

new Alternative identification check box. In a case like this, the objects

can be identified with the help of so-called "candidate keys". A candidate

key is a minimal quantity of properties that uniquely identifies an object.

The identifying properties are preset by EPLAN.


286 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

When you compare the properties of projects that have been automati-

cally generated (by the EPLAN Engineering Center, for example), you

should select the Alternative identification check box, as the internal

object IDs are re-assigned at each generation, making it no longer

possible to use object IDs for a properties comparison.

The comparison run starts when you click [OK]. The Results of proper-

ty comparison - <Project name> dialog opens and shows an overview

of the results.

In addition to this, the changes specified by a properties comparison are

indicated in the project by graphical markers.

Displaying results of properties comparison

The results of a properties comparison are shown in the new Results

of property comparison - <Project name> dialog. This list of results is

automatically displayed after a property comparison of projects. It does

not matter whether the properties comparison has been run in the

previous way, or by using the new, alternative identification.

Benefit: EPLAN now has a new, clear list for the results of the com-

parison. You are quickly and easily given an overview of all

the changes.

But you can also open this dialog via Utilities > Revision control >

Property comparison of projects > Show results of the properties

comparison. Data is automatically updated after each property com-

parison of projects.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 287

The tabular structure of the dialog is similar to that of message manage-

ment, and can be positioned in the same way by docking and undocking,

outside or inside the EPLAN main window.

The following columns are displayed in the table:

• Object type: Shows the object type, for example, Function, Image

file, etc.

• DT / name: Shows the complete DT of the function or the name of the

object. For connections, the source and target are displayed; for pro-

jects, the project name is shown including file path; for image files, the

file name is shown with file path; and for hyperlinks, the designation is

shown.

• Page of the object: Shows the page where differences were found.

• Kind of change: Shows whether the object was changed, deleted, or

newly inserted.

• Property: Shows the changed property.

• Previous value: Shows the value of the property in the reference

project.

• New value: Shows the value of the property in the current project.

• Last editor: Shows the last editor of the page.

The data shown in the results dialog is read from the MS Access data-

base in which the results of the property comparison are saved.


288 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Number of displayed results

To allow you to quickly receive an overview of the results, not all the

entries from the MS Access database are displayed. You define the

maximum number of messages to be displayed in the results dialog with

another new project setting, Maximum number of displayed results

(see the following section on page 289).

If the number of messages produced exceeds the specified figure, result

output is canceled, and a corresponding note is displayed.

Jumping from the results dialog to the project

Available to you in the Results of property comparison dialog popup

menu, are the two "Go to" menu items Go to project (graphic) and Go

to reference project (graphic). You can use these functionalities to

jump from a modified object to the relevant points in the schematic.

• For a newly added object, the only available option is Go to project

(graphic).

• Both menu items are active for moved and changed objects.

• Both menu items are also active for deleted objects. But with the Go

to project (graphic) menu item, you can then only jump to the project

schematic, if a deletion marker has been generated at this point. To

do this, you must activate the new project setting While deleting

create deletion markers and list deleted pages (see the section

"Displaying deleted objects" on page 292).

Tip:

For certain objects (functions, connections, potentials, PCT loops, PCT

loop functions) given a revision marker in the graphical editor, it is possi-

ble to carry out a synchronization in the Results of property compari-

son - <Project name> dialog. To do this, mark the required object and

then select Popup menu > Synchronize selection. The corresponding

lines in the results list will be marked.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 289

New settings for the property comparison of projects

In this new dialog, you can specify settings for the property comparison

of projects.

Place revision markers on each page at connections:

Now you can also use these settings to specify how connections across

more than one page should be marked in the event of a change.

If this check box is selected, and a change has been made to a connec-

tion that exists on more than one page, this connection will be marked on

all of those pages.

If the check box is deselected, the connection will only appear on the first

page.


290 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Maximum number of displayed results:

We have already mentioned this field, which is where you specify the

maximum number of messages to be shown in the Results of property

comparison - <Project name> dialog. This setting helps speed up the

display of the dialog and does not influence the execution of the property

comparison. Regardless of the number specified here, all objects will be

compared and all results will be written to a database (see the following

section).

Project-specific databases for the comparison results

The results of a property comparison of projects are saved in an MS

Access database, as before. This database can no longer be freely

selected or created from scratch in the settings, but is now automatically

generated for each project and saved in the project directory of the

current project. The database is automatically assigned a file name, which includes the file name of the reference project (e.g. Reference

project.Revision.mdb).

Benefit: Because the databases for the comparison results are stored

project-specifically, this data can also be backed up with a

project / sent as an e-mail message. This also allows you to

easily integrate all the information about the changes in the

project exchange. All project participants, even those in the

larger project teams, are thus always up to date.

If you want to remove databases of this type from a project, the compres-

sion settings in the Revision control area have a new check box avail-

able, Remove revision database. You can then remove the databases

for the comparison results from the project by selecting Project >

Organize > Compress and then making the appropriate compression

settings.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 291

In the course of these changes, the Database for the project compari-

son result field has been removed from the revision settings. In addition

to this, the directory setting for revision control has also been removed

from the Settings: Directories dialog.

Deleting revision data of the property comparison

Previously, you were not able to delete the data of a properties com-

pareson in revision control. But now, in the new version, you have the

opportunity to totally remove all revision data and revision markers.

Benefit: Once all the revision information is removed from a revised

project, this type of project can be used again to create basic

projects or project templates, for example.

The previous dialog, Delete revision markers, has been extended and

renamed for the purpose, as well as being split into two menu items, in

accordance with the two revision control operations.

Old name: New name:

Delete revision markers Delete revision To remove the revision data and revision markers produced by a prop-

erty comparison of projects, select Utilities > Revision control >

Property comparison of projects > Delete revision.

Revision markers:

If this check box is selected, all revision markers generated after a prop-

erty comparison of projects are deleted.


292 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Revision data of property comparison:

If this new check box is selected, the revision data generated after a

properties comparison is now also deleted. This includes, for example,

information about the associated reference projects.

Tip:

To remove the change tracking revision data and revision markers from

a project, select the Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking >

Delete revision menu path.

Displaying deleted objects

EPLAN revision control has been extended, to allow deleted objects to

also be displayed for revision with change tracking and for the property

comparison of projects.

Benefit: The display of deleted objects allows you to track the

changes in a project revision or in a properties comparison

more transparently. If deleted objects are to be displayed in a project, you must make the

following settings:

• For a revision with change tracking you must activate the new

While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages

project setting. The check box can be found under Options >

Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Revision

(change tracking).

• For a property comparison of projects, in the Compare properties

of projects dialog, you must select the new Create deletion markers

for deleted objects check box.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 293

If you have made these settings in a revision project / during a properties

comparison, then the deleted objects (components, texts, etc.), on the

project pages will be identified by a revision marker and by a special

object – the deletion marker. This is the case both for change tracking

and for a properties comparison. The set color for deleted objects is used

for the revision marker here.

Symbol for the deletion marker

A deletion marker gives you information about a deleted object. It is marked by a new special symbol (DO // 300 // Deleted object)

from the SPECIAL symbol library, and is placed in the same position as

the previously existing object.

Example:

A typical deletion marker in the schematic:

Layer management has been extended by the new EPLAN576,

Graphic.Deleted objects layer for the deletion marker. You can use

a corresponding setting in layer management to set the deletion marker

to invisible / visible throughout the project.


294 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Properties dialog for deletion markers

Double-click on a deletion marker to open the Properties (compo-

nents): Deletion marker dialog.

This dialog comprises the familiar Display and Symbol / function data

tabs, as well as the new Deletion marker tab, with information about

each object that is removed. The properties of the currently deleted

object are shown in this tab, such as the name and the Type of the

deleted object, the User name and the Delete date.

All the other properties are shown in the table in the Properties group

box, or can be selected by using property selection.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 295

Edit deletion markers in change tracking

If you have generated a revision of a project, the deleted objects are

now (if the setting mentioned above has been activated) identified in the

graphical editor by a revision marker and by a deletion marker. In a revi-

sion with change tracking, the following is possible for these deletion

markers:

• Move deletion marker

If a deleted object is moved in the graphical editor, the deletion

marker is given a new revision marker. The color for changed objects

alerts the user to the fact that this object has been moved. In addition

to this, the marker text is recalculated and updated where necessary.

The special properties dialog for the deletion marker retains the infor-

mation that this concerns a deleted object, even after the move.

• Edit revision marker texts

By default, a tooltip with the automatically generated revision marker

text is also shown for a deletion marker. To modify this text, select the

deletion marker and then, as usual, choose the Edit revision marker

menu item from the popup menu.

• Delete deleted objects permanently

To permanently remove the information about a deleted object from

a project page, click the deletion marker insertion point, and in the

popup menu, select the new Delete permanently menu item.

Note:

If the revision marker and the deletion marker of a deleted object are

conventionally deleted in the graphical editor (using Popup menu >

Delete, for example), then the deleted objects will be replaced by

identical, new objects.


296 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Displaying deleted pages in change tracking

If the While deleting create deletion markers and list deleted pages

check box is selected, then information about the deleted pages will be

saved when the pages of a revision project are deleted.

You can display a corresponding list using the new Deleted pages

dialog. This dialog can be accessed via the Utilities > Revision control

> Change tracking > Deleted pages menu items. Some of the proper-

ties displayed here are for information only and cannot be changed. You

can describe your changes in the Index, Description, and Reason for

change fields.

Deleted pages can now also be displayed in the revision overview. To do

this, you must activate the new form property Revision output with de-

leted pages <13088>, in the actual form for the revision overview. The

"Pages" option must also be set in the form properties for the Revision

output type <13106> property.

Tip:

You also have the opportunity to remove all the revision markers and

deletion markers in the project that were produced by change tracking.

To do this, select Utilities > Revision control > Change tracking >

Delete revision.

In a revision with change tracking, deleted pages count as data. To

delete them, in the Delete revision dialog, select the Revision data

from change tracking check box.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 297

Delete deleted objects in the properties comparison

In a project property comparison, the changes in the project are not per-

manently logged. The revision markers are generated once, and are in-

itially retained in this form until the next comparison. Because of this, you

can permanently remove a deleted object from the project, by deleting

the revision marker and the deletion marker (via Popup menu > Delete,

for example).

The revision marker and the deletion marker will only be displayed again

after a new properties comparison with the unchanged reference project.

Tip:

You also have the opportunity to remove all the revision markers and

deletion markers in the project that were produced by the property com-

parison of projects. To do this, select Utilities > Revision control >

Property comparison of projects > Delete revision (see the section

"Deleting revision data of the property comparison" on page 291).

In a property comparison of projects, deletion markers and deleted

pages count as revision markers. To delete them, in the Delete revision

dialog, select the Revision marker check box.

Layout spaces in revision control

Change tracking

Changed layout spaces are treated as pages in revision control change

tracking. This allows them to be completed via Utilities > Revision

control > Change tracking > Complete pages, for example. Changes

in layout spaces are then also included in the revision overview.

The Page column in the Edit revision data dialog in Page / Layout

space has also been changed, and now also shows layout spaces.

Unlike a complete page name, the name of a layout space is separated

from the structure identifier not by the separator "/" but by a space and a bracket (e.g. =EB3+ET1 (2)).


298 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Property comparison of projects

The 3D objects in a layout space are also taken into account in a prop-

erty comparison of projects. For example, by specifying the relevant

setting, deleted and new objects in a layout space are listed in the results

dialog.

The DT (identifying) <20005> property can be used for a property com-

parison of projects. But 3D object-specific properties that belong to the

"Data" category, such as Layout space name <20261>, Layout space

description, <20235> etc., can also be used for a property comparison.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 299

New Features in the "Multi Language Translation" Add-on

Note:

The "Multi Language Translation" add-on is optionally available for

EPLAN Electric P8 Select. This add-on is part of the standard scope of

delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, EPLAN Fluid, and EPLAN

PPE.

The Translation utility in the "Multi Language Translation" add-on also

has a number of new features in this version.

Distinguishing between source language and displayed language

In EPLAN, there is now a distinction between source language and

displayed language. The project-specific, general translation settings

have been extended by the Source language drop-down list for this

purpose.


300 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Benefit: This allows you to also enter texts in the project in a language

that is not set as a displayed language. In international pro-

jects, all users can use their native languages for their plan-

ning, whatever displayed language is defined. This simplifies

project planning work and protects against incorrect input,

which is perfectly possible with a foreign language.

Source language:

In this field, you specify the project source language. This is the lan-

guage in which you enter your project texts. The project source language

is simultaneously the translation source language. When translating,

EPLAN searches the dictionary for suitable keywords for this language

and translates them into all the selected translation languages.

You also use the source language to specify the language in which

translatable project texts are displayed in dialogs.

Display languages:

In this field you specify the languages and sequence in which translat-

able project texts are displayed in the graphical editor. You can select

as the display languages either the dialog language (##_## (Dialog

language) option), or other languages that you have already set as

translation languages.

Example:

You have an appropriate dictionary with keywords in the source lan-guage en_US and the corresponding translation texts in the languages

fr_FR, zh_CN, ru_RU. You have made the following settings:

Setting Language

Translation languages en_US, fr_FR, zh_CN, ru_RU

Source language en_US

Display languages zh_CN, ru_RU


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 301

For text input and translation, this means:

• Inserting texts:

You enter your project texts in English, because you have selected en_US as the source language, and translate your project.

• Translate: All project texts are translated into the languages fr_FR, zh_CN, and

ru_RU. They already exist in en_US.

For text display, this means:

• Graphical editor: Here the project texts are only displayed in the languages zh_CN and

ru_RU.

• Dialogs:

Here the translatable project texts, such as page descriptions in the

page navigator, are displayed in the source language of the project, en_US.

Note:

The source language can be selected as the displayed language, but

does not have to be. If you have not selected the source language as the

displayed language, you will receive an appropriate message. The set

source language will also be displayed in the status bar, as soon as you

can enter a text in the project in EPLAN.

Upper-/lower-case letters for the source language

If you have previously inserted a word as text (for example, Antrieb for

the source language de_DE) and for the project-specific, general setting

Upper-/lower-case letters, have selected the option All upper-case

letters, for example, this only affects the output translation text during the translation (for the translation language en_US, e.g. DRIVE). The

source text then had upper-/lower-case letters, as applied for the corres-

ponding keyword in the dictionary. Now the Upper-/lower-case letters

setting also has an effect on the texts in the source language.


302 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

You use this setting not only to define the style to be used to output the

translation texts, but also to decide how the entered project texts will be

displayed in the graphical editor.

Example:

For the Upper-/lower-case letters setting, you have selected the All

upper-case letters option. Then, in the Properties - Text dialog, enter the word Motor. Once you have closed the dialog with [OK], the text

MOTOR will be displayed in the graphical editor.

Notes:

• Please be aware that when automatically translating with Utilities >

Translation > Translate, the Match case setting can also affect the

translation. If this check box is selected, then EPLAN finds the match-

ing keyword only if the upper- and lower-case writing of the text

exactly matches the upper- and lower-case writing of the keyword

in the dictionary.

• If the translation texts are to be output in a specific style during a

translation run (All upper-case letters, All lower-case letters, or

Capitalize first letter options), you must deselect the Match case

check box. This setting does not take effect for a manual translation in

the properties dialog.

Text-based line breaks in translations

A new check box, Line breaks: Text-based is now available in the

translation settings, to influence the translation line breaks in a word-by-

word translation.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 303

You can make this new setting separately, both for project texts and for

project-independent texts, for example, in the Settings: Translation

dialog on the Project and Project-independent tabs. However, the

relevant check box is only available once you have selected the "Word"

setting in the Segment field. If the check box is selected, then the posi-

tions of the line breaks in the translations are subject to the position in

the original text.

The check box is not selected by default. In this case, EPLAN considers

the word length of the source text and puts the line break at an appro-

priate point in the translated text. Separators in the translation of a

particular keyword are considered for a possible line break position. A

space, a hyphen, or a separator suggestion in the dictionary count as

separators here.

Example:

You have set en_US as the source and as the display language for a

project. French (fr_FR) is specified as the translation language and as

the second display language. The project texts input as examples here,

clearly show how these texts are displayed in the schematic, subject to

the selected setting after translation: Text entry Setting Displayed text

Schematic¶

Placeholder

Line breaks:

Text-based

Schematic

Placeholder

Schéma des

connexions Code de réservation

Schematic¶

Placeholder

Line breaks:

Text-based

Schematic

Placeholder

Schéma des connexions

Code de réservation


304 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

For the text entry in the example, it is irrelevant whether it is produced

in a multilingual text box in the properties dialog of a component, or for a graphical text. The line break character (¶) only has an illustrative

function here. When text is entered in the Properties - Text dialog, an

inserted line break is not displayed.

Changed translation behavior on input

If you let your texts be translated on input, the entered texts now remain

language-independent, if a translation text cannot be found for this text in

the dictionary. An online translation now only takes place if there is also

a translation text available in the dictionary. In this case the text is always

displayed in the source language in which it was entered, regardless of

the specified dialog language.

Texts, page properties, project properties, and device properties are

already automatically translated as they are entered, if the Translate on

input check box is selected in the project-specific translation settings.

Correction option for existing projects

A correction option is also available for existing projects, in which non-

translated texts have been marked as translated. The Extent tab in the

translation settings has the [Correction] button available for this

purpose.

Use this button to convert texts that are excluded from the translation,

but for which a translation text is nevertheless entered, into language-

independent texts. Once you have clicked the button, a prompt is

displayed. The following options are available:

• [Yes]: All texts excluded from translation are converted to language-

independent texts. Already existing translation texts are removed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 305

• [No]: Only texts for which an empty translation text has been entered

are converted into language-independent texts. (Empty translation

texts can occur, for example, in projects created with older EPLAN

versions (before Version 2.0), if the Translate on input option was

enabled and no translation text was found in the dictionary.)

• [Cancel]: No texts are converted.

Exporting the missing-word list based on the dictionary

In the new version, you now have the opportunity to export a missing-

word list based on the dictionary, independently of the project. Available

for this in the Dictionary dialog on the Management tab under [Extras],

is the new menu item Export missing-word list.

Benefit: An automated export of words with a missing translation

simplifies dictionary upkeep. The missing-word list makes it

easy to incorporate translation service providers. Project

editors no longer have to deal with translation tasks, and can

concentrate 100% on engineering tasks.

Selecting this menu item opens a dialog, in which you can specify the file

name and file type for the missing-word list to be exported. As when exporting the dictionary, files in XML format *.etd, in tab-separated

Unicode format *.txt, in EPLAN 5 CSV format *.tf, or in EPLAN 21

tab-separated Unicode format *.txt are possible. You select the

relevant languages in a further subsequent dialog.

The missing dictionary texts can then be subsequently translated outside

EPLAN, and imported back with [Extras] > Import. Before starting the

import, you still have to select the source language. This is important for

correctly assigning the imported texts.


306 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Notes:

• With this Export, the language used as the source language (that is,

the language in which you make entries in the dictionary), is the lan-

guage set on the Project-independent tab in the translation settings

as the Source language. One possible menu path to the translation

settings is: Utilities > Translation > Settings.

• To make sure that when importing texts, the new keywords are ac-

cepted into the dictionary, the Append new translations setting is

activated by default. This check box is located, for example, under

Options > Settings > User > Translation > Dictionary.

New messages for the translation

The following two messages are now available for the "008 Foreign

languages" message class in the check-related settings for message

management:

• Message 008004 "Text entry '%1!s!' does not exist in the dictionary."

• Message 008005 "Text is not translated in the project '%1!s!'."

Benefit: Using this functionality, you can jump directly to the texts in

the diagram that are not translated. This makes specific

revision faster and easier. There are no missing translations

and a high quality of project documentation is assured.

If you perform an offline check run using message 008005, "Text in pro-

ject not translated '%1!s!'.", all texts (simple "graphical" texts, property

texts, path function texts, etc.) that do not have a translation for one or

more of the set translation languages, will be listed in message manage-

ment.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 307

New Features in the "User Rights Management" Add-on

Note:

The "User Rights Management" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN

Electric P8 Select, EPLAN Electric P8 Professional, and for EPLAN

Fluid.

With the "User Rights Management" add-on, an administrator can confi-

gure both the user rights and the user interface (dialogs, menu structure,

etc.), of the EPLAN platform.

Administrator:

As an administrator, you must read the following section before you work

with the new version.

Assigning new rights

Numerous rights for rights management have been added in the new

EPLAN version. To allow the new rights to be assigned to the different

user groups, you must update your rights management.

Tip:

We recommend that you create a new group, before updating. No rights

are assigned to this group initially. When you update, the new rights are

assigned to all the groups. Because of this, only the new rights are

activated for the sample group, to make the new rights easier for you to

recognize.

To update, in the Rights management dialog, click the [Update] button.

After updating, the System messages dialog is automatically opened.

Here you can see which rights have been added or removed.

The new rights are then available for the existing user groups. By default,

they are activated for all groups, including "Guests".


308 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New Features in the "Mounting Panel" Add-on

Note:

The "Mounting Panel" add-on is optionally available for EPLAN Electric

P8 Compact and EPLAN Fluid Compact. This add-on is part of the stan-

dard scope of delivery for EPLAN Electric P8 Select, EPLAN Electric P8

Professional, and for EPLAN Fluid.

The "Mounting Panel" add-on allows planning of enclosures and mount-

ing panels.

To make a clearer distinction between the navigator of this add-on and

other navigators, this project data dialog has been renamed "2D panel

layout navigator". The user-specific settings for graphical editing have

also been appropriately renamed.

Old name: New name:

Panel layout navigator 2D panel layout navigator

Settings: Panel layout Settings: 2D panel layout

A clearer view in the navigator

Previously in the 2D panel layout navigator, all parts without device tags

were listed one after the other at the uppermost position. Many of these

entries originated from the connections that were assigned to a part.

To give a clearer arrangement to the 2D panel layout navigator, all parts

from connections are now automatically and permanently filtered out.

These parts are not required for panel layout.

In the identifier-based view, all devices without a DT are sorted into the

Without DT tree structure level. This behavior is similar to the display of

devices without DT in other navigator dialogs.

Benefit: The clearer view makes it easier for you to use the 2D panel

layout navigator.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 309

If a device has multiple parts, in the identifier-based view these parts are

no longer sorted into alphabetical order in the tree under the relevant

device tag, but are arranged in the order in which they occur in the prop-

erties dialog on the Parts tab. Terminals and strip accessories, on the

other hand, are displayed in the type of order in which they appear in the

Edit terminal strip dialog.

Note:

The same behavior as that described here applies for the 3D mounting

layout navigator of the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on.

Placing terminal strips on the mounting panel

It is now possible in EPLAN to place terminal strips on a mounting panel

and then represent them in the enclosure legend.

The placement of items on a mounting panel occurs in the 2D panel

layout navigator, for example, via Popup menu > Place on mounting

panel. In a case like this, if you place the unplaced parts of a terminal

strip, then provided a part has yet to be placed for this terminal strip, a

new prompt will now be displayed. Use this prompt to decide whether the

complete terminal strip should be placed.

Answer [Yes] to this prompt, and you can then place the complete

terminal strip. All the terminals of the terminal strip will be marked as

placed in the 2D panel layout navigator tree by a green check mark. The

terminal widths stored in the parts management module are added to

determine the dimensions of the terminal strip on the mounting panel.

The maximum height stored for the terminal parts is used as the height

of the new part placement.

If you click [No] in the prompt, you can then place the terminals indivi-

dually, as before.


310 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The part placement properties dialog for a terminal strip differs from the

properties dialogs of placed terminals. To identify that this part place-

ment represents the entire terminal strip, no part number is entered on

the Part placement tab in the Part field. All the terminals of the terminal

strip are then regarded internally as placed. This properties dialog also

has the appropriate function definition ("Part placement, terminal strip").

When an enclosure legend is subsequently generated (or updated), the

placed terminal strips are also listed in the relevant legend.

Displaying the handles of part placements

Since EPLAN Version 1.9 International SP 1, the position of the part

placement handle has been evaluated instead of the insertion point,

when numbering the legend items of mounting panels.

Should the handles of part placements be displayed, select the View >

Insertion points menu items. If the position of a handle differs from the

insertion point, the handle is now also displayed for the part placement

(circle with a diagonal cross ). The position of the handle when placing

the part can be influenced using the Settings: 2D panel layout dialog.

Note:

If you place items on a DIN rail, you should always use the "Middle left"

setting for the handle position, so that the legend items are numbered

continuously.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 311

Same legend item for identical devices

When editing legend items, you now have the opportunity to assign the

same legend item to identical devices, for which the same part number

has been entered.

To do this, in the 2D panel layout navigator, for example, select the

Popup menu > Edit legend item menu item for a marked mounting

panel and then click [Number]. In the Number dialog, you now have the

new Same number for identical devices check box available. Select

this check box, if identical devices are to be given the same legend item.

This is particularly important for the GOST standard.

Settings

New action for importing settings

The new "Import settings" action (action name XSettingsImport) is

now available to you in EPLAN. You can use this action to automatically import the settings that have previously been exported as an XML file.

Benefit: These settings allow you to greatly influence the behavior of

the EPLAN platform. It is now an automated process to ex-

change these settings. Manual input is no longer required,

which saves you time when standardizing projects or work-

stations. A common and consistent standard ensures high-

quality planning and makes it easier to implement the

documentation requirements of the machinery directive.

For automated execution, you have to use the Customize dialog to

store the action as a button in a user-defined toolbar, or enter it using

a different command line call (such as the Windows Run dialog). With

command line input, the following command line parameters can be

specified:


312 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• /XMLFile:

directory and name of the file to be imported (necessary).

• /node:

"node" of the setting to be imported (optional).

• /Project:

name of the target project (optional). If a project is specified, only the

project settings are imported.

Importing all user, workstation, and company settings

If only the XMLFile command line parameter is listed, all the existing

user, workstation, and company settings will be imported from the specified file (e.g. XSettingsImport /XMLFile: C:\file.xml).

Importing all project settings

If in addition to XMLFile, the Project parameter is also listed in the

command line, only the existing project settings will be imported from the specified file (e.g. XSettingsImport /XMLFile:C:\project-

settings.xml /Project:C:\...\EPLAN-DEMO.elk).

Importing settings for a dialog

If you only want to import the settings for a quite specific dialog, you must use the node parameter to specify the "node" under which the

settings are to be imported. This can be both a dialog from the project

settings and a dialog from the other settings areas.

To find out the name of the node, you can open the previously exported xml file in Internet Explorer, for example, and transfer the name of the

node from the <MOD name="..."> entry.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 313

Example:

You want to import the settings of the Settings: Print dialog from another user. By default, the name of the exported xml file is Work-

station+Graphical Editing+Print.xml. From this file, under the

<CAT name="STATION"> category, you take the name of the node

<MOD name="Print">.

A possible entry in the command line of the Set button dialog for trans-

ferring settings could then look like this:

XSettingsImport /XMLFile:C:TMP\Workstation+Graphical

Editing+Print.xml /node:Print

Preceding sign for interruption point names

For interruption points, you can now also specify whether a preceding

sign is automatically set in the interruption point name when interruption

points are used.

The new Interruption points check box has been added to the Set-

tings: DT dialog in the Set preceding sign group box for this purpose.

This check box is deselected by default (under Options > Settings >

Projects > "Project name" > Devices > DT). In this case, the interrup-

tion point name is not given a preceding sign when the interruption point

is used.

Note:

The settings for Set preceding sign were previously under Options >

Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > General. For

reasons of space, these settings and the Conversion to uppercase and

Hide brackets in DT check boxes were moved to the new Settings: DT

dialog.


314 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New settings for displayed units of measure

A new dialog for displayed units of measure is available to you in the

user-specific settings. As well as the familiar Displayed unit of length,

you now also have the opportunity here to specify the Displayed unit of

weight. Use the Options > Settings > User > Display > Displayed

units of measure menu path to access these settings in the program.

Benefit: You can use this functionality to specify the weight of a part

either in kilograms or in pounds.

The two options mm and Inch of the Displayed unit of length group

box were previously in the Settings: User interface dialog, and have

been moved here for the sake of clarity.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 315

You use the options in the new Displayed unit of weight group box to

decide whether the weight of a part is evaluated in "kg" or "lb" (pound) in

parts management. This means that an existing weight will be converted

in accordance with the displayed unit of measure.

Tip:

If, when weight values are output in reports, the set unit of measure is to

be output with them (in a parts list, for example), this can be done using

the new Weight in displayed unit <22059> property.

Renamed settings for graphical editing

In the user-specific settings for graphical editing (under Options >

Settings > User > Graphical editing) you make the settings for cursor

display, for scroll behavior or color settings, for example. The settings

dialog has been renamed, to more clearly differentiate these settings

from the similar settings for the 3D view of the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-

on.

Old name: New name:

Settings: General Settings: 2D


316 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Properties

User-defined property configurations

Wherever properties are listed in a table for an object (project, page,

device properties, etc.), you now have the opportunity to create separate

property categories. Properties from different groups can be combined in

this way and saved in a user-defined property configuration.

Benefit: By individually customizing the user interface, you can

access the input fields that are important to you more quickly.

You can save a selection of properties that you have com-

piled as a configuration, and make it available to other pro-

jects or other users.

To create a user-defined property configuration, you must select the

"User-defined" entry for the Category field in the relevant properties

dialog. Then select Popup menu > Configure.

The Property configuration dialog that then opens has been extended

by the familiar Scheme and Description fields for the user-defined prop-

erty configuration. You can use the scheme toolbar that is now also in

the dialog to create a new scheme, for example, or to export / import the

scheme of a property configuration. Properties from all categories are

available to you in the property selection for user-defined property confi-

gurations.

The name of a saved, user-defined property configuration is then dis-

played in the Category field.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 317

Renamed project property

As the term "drawing number" applies to a page, the project property

Drawing number <10013> has been renamed Job number <10013>.

The page property Drawing number <11030> is unchanged.

Old name: New name:

Drawing number <10013> Job number <10013>

New properties for device tags

Now available in EPLAN are several new properties for device tags,

where the preceding sign is also included in the specification. This

affects the following properties:

• DT (superior, without project structures, with preceding sign)

<20211>

• DT (subordinate, without project structures, with preceding sign)

<20212>

• DT (full, without project structures, with preceding sign)

<20213>

• DT (identifying, without project structures, with preceding sign)

<20215>.

Example:

You have inserted the DT (subordinate, without project structures,

with preceding sign) property in a form as a placeholder text. For the device tag =A+O-U1-K1, in a case like this, -K1 is output when

generating a relevant report.


318 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Other New Features in Utilities

Extensions for automated editing

Exporting and importing scripts

In the new version, you now also have the opportunity to export and / or

import scripts for automated processing of project actions.

Benefit: This allows you to transfer scripts for automated processing

from one project to another. Once defined, the scripts can

be exchanged within a planning group, as well as between

different companies. Define a common standard, and use

automated processing to optimize the planning of all those

participating in the project.

Available to you for this purpose in the Settings: Automated process-

ing dialog, in the toolbar next to the Script name drop-down list, are the

two familiar buttons: (Export) and (Import). One possible menu

path to this dialog is: Utilities > Automated processing > Settings.

Automated PDF export

Another new feature is that now, with automated processing, you can

also automatically output projects as a PDF. The new "Export PDF"

action is available to you in the Settings: Automated processing dialog

for this purpose. If you use the button to move this action for a script

to the Selected actions list, the familiar PDF export dialog opens (see

page 192). You can use this dialog to make the settings for automated

PDF file output.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 319

Improved registration for add-ons

The registration of add-ons, such as the EPLAN Data Portal, has

been simplified for the EPLAN platform. The Add-ons dialog, which is

accessed via the Utilities > Add-ons menu path, has been redesigned.

In addition to this, when you uninstall an add-on, registration is now auto-

matically deleted.

Benefit: Install.xml no longer has to be found when re-registering

a module. When you uninstall an add-on, the removal se-

quence is now no longer an issue.

When you start the program, all the possible add-ons that can be

registered are listed in the Add-ons dialog:

• For add-ons that match the product variant (down to the version

number) and which have automated registration available, the new

Registered check box is selected. This means that the functionalities

of these modules are available to you in EPLAN.

• Add-ons that match the product variant, but which are not automati-

cally registered, are also listed. For these modules, the Registered

check box is not selected. If these modules are also to be registered,

select the corresponding check boxes. Registration then takes place

when you exit the dialog with [OK].

Note:

Please note that all add-ons are installed with absolute paths. For that

reason it is not possible to install an add-on in a net. Unregister

To unregister an add-on, deselect the Registered check box and close

the Add-ons dialog with [OK].


320 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

However, the module will still be listed in the dialog. If you want to use

the add-on again, you have to re-open the dialog and select the check

box.

Finding other add-ons

In the Add-ons dialog, you now have the button available for finding

other add-ons (manually created modules or modules that match older main versions). In the next dialog, select the associated Install.xml,

and click [Open]. The corresponding add-on (such as the "PPEAddon"

of Version 1.9.10), will then be listed in the dialog, and can be registered

by using the check box mentioned above.

These new add-ons can also be removed. To do this, you first have to

deselect the Registered check box for this module. Then, to remove the

module from the Add-ons dialog, click .

Automated unregistering when uninstalling

If you have uninstalled an add-on, its registration in the EPLAN platform

is automatically deleted the next time you start the program. The relevant

information is given to you in the system messages. The mandatory

uninstall sequence for add-ons, of first unregistering and then uninstal-

ling the module, no longer applies.

Improved display of system messages

The system messages dialog (under Utilities > System messages) now

has an additional text field available, that cannot be edited. If you select

a message, the full description text is displayed in this field, below the list

with the system messages. If you have selected a message that has

other, subordinate messages, the display also includes the descriptions

of these associated, subordinate messages.

Benefit: It is no longer necessary to change the size of the columns

or maximize the system messages dialog, as the description

text is fully legible immediately.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 321

Licensing

Extensions to EPLAN License Manager

With the release of the new platform version, EPLAN has also made

available a new version of the EPLAN License Manager (ELM). This pro-

gram allows you to manage EPLAN product licenses within a network.

Various new functionalities make network license administration easier

for you.

An overview of the main new features of the EPLAN License Manager:

• Usage of "variable bundles":

When combining licenses in bundles, the licenses can now also be

defined as "variable bundles". License bundles of this type allow you

to create templates for specific license combinations in any number,

regardless of the actual number of available licenses.

The license elements contained in this combination are only assigned

in the EPLAN License Manager when a "variable bundle" is selected

on program start.

• Event log for network licenses:

The "License Manager Monitor" now gives you the opportunity to

create a report about the license status of an EPLAN License

Manager. You use a configuration file to specify everything that is to

be logged. The log itself is created as an XML file.

This shows who has been using or borrowing which license, and

when. This allows you to see how the licenses are utilized, for

example.


322 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• Borrowing licenses using command line parameters:

It is now possible to use command line parameters to borrow network

licenses. The settings for borrowing are transferred as a configuration file (borrow.cfg). The EPLAN platform start could look like this, for

example: W3u.EXE /license:… \borrow.cfg

• Borrowing network licenses offline:

It is now also possible to borrow a network license when the user's

computer is not connected to the internal network. To do this, the

user uses the Select license dialog to create a request file with their

computer data, which is then sent to the EPLAN License Manager

administrator by e-mail, for example. The administrator runs the bor-

rowing process with the data that has been sent, creates a response

file, and returns the borrowed license bundle to the user, who can

then use it to start EPLAN.

• Rights management:

Rights management has now been added to the EPLAN License

Manager configuration program. This makes it possible to define who

can use or borrow the licenses contained in each bundle. Rights

management can now be used to specify user rights for individual

users and user groups.

• Cross-domain usage:

By default, a license client can access the EPLAN License Manager

using the rights of the logged-on user. When the cross-domain usage

function is activated, a separate user account can be specified, for

access to the license manager.

This procedure not only allows access to the EPLAN License

Manager in networks with several independent domains, it also makes

operation easier in environments that do not have Windows domains

(working groups, Novell).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 323

• Failure protection:

To improve failure protection (failover), it is now also possible to install

two license managers. One of these is the active EPLAN License

Manager (Primary License Manager). This is where the licenses are

validated, and the software protection (dongle) is also connected

here.

Should the first license manager fail, a second, and previously inac-

tive EPLAN License Manager (Standby License Manager) takes on its

function for a maximum of seven days, and makes the licenses avail-

able. As soon as the first license manager is available again, the other

one goes back to being inactive. You do not have to exit the EPLAN

application to switch between the two license managers.

Note:

Please note that the Event log, Rights management, Cross-domain

usage, and Failure protection functionalities must be licensed sepa-

rately for the EPLAN License Manager.

Special Topics EPLAN Electric P8

324 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


Terminals / Plugs

Terminal / pin and connection point descriptions

Plugs and terminals now feature an additional new property, namely Ter-

minal / pin description <20225>. This new property is made available

wherever the Terminal / pin designation property can be selected

(filters, reports, etc.).

For this purpose you are offered the new Description field on the Ter-

minal and Pin tabs in the properties dialog. In addition, the Connection

point description field has been added to the properties dialog for ter-

minals and pins.

Benefit: In addition to the connection point designations, you can now

also specify the connection point descriptions for plugs. This

considerably improves the legibility of the plan for the engi-

neer and saves needing to search other sources for the

information.

Example:

RJ45 plug assignment according to the EIA/TIA-568B standard for

Ethernet 1000:

Connection point designation Connection point description

1 D1+

2 D1-

3 D2+

4 D3+

5 D3-

6 D2-


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 325

Connection point designation Connection point description

7 D4+

8 D4-

Extension of the function templates

To also take account of the Connection point description and Ter-

minal / pin description properties during device selection and when

overlaying, the function templates in Parts management have likewise

been extended.

On the Function templates tab, the Device selection (function tem-

plates) table now has the additional column Connection point descrip-

tion for most product groups ("Component (general)", "Component

(relays, contactors)", "Component (PLC)", etc.).


326 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

For the "Component (terminals)" and "Component (plugs)" product

groups, the additional Terminal description and Pin description

columns appear in the device selection table.

You will also be offered these properties as selection criteria in device

selection and in the device selection settings.

Displaying saddle jumpers for "Interconnect devices"

Since EPLAN version 1.9, the terminals in a terminal strip are sometimes

displayed more than once in the Interconnect devices dialog. The rea-

son for this is that the logic model for the "Terminal, general" function

definition (and similar function definitions) has been extended from two to

four connection points. Two of these connection points are designed for

saddle jumpers. The menu path to this dialog is: Project data > Devices

> Interconnect devices.

In the new version an Include saddle jumpers check box has been

added to the Interconnect devices dialog. This enables you to control

whether or not connection points of connection point type "Saddle

jumper" should be displayed.

If the check box is selected, then connection points of connection point

type "Saddle jumper" will be shown in the table. Connection points for

automatically generated saddle jumpers will also be shown; these may

have any connection point type. In order to detect the connection point

type, in this case you should also display the property Connection point

logic: Connection point type in the table (via Popup menu > Confi-

gure columns).

The check box is deselected by default. In this case both connection

points of connection point type "Saddle jumper" and connection points

for automatically generated saddle jumpers are hidden.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 327

Displaying connection point properties

The Interconnect devices dialog has been optimized in respect to the

extensions for defining multi-line connection points (see page 98). You

can now also have the Connection point logic: External property dis-

played in the tables on the left and right side of the dialog for connection

points. First, the columns must be configured accordingly.

The Internal / External option fields have also been converted into a

drop-down list of the same name. In this way you can specify for the

device source and/or the device target whether only the internal, only the

external, or both types of connection points ("Internal and external") are

displayed in the respective table.

The Add insulation popup menu option is also new. Details can be

found in the section "Inserting insulated wire terminations" on page 334.


328 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

New Features in the "PLC & Bus Extension" Add-on

Note:

The "PLC & Bus Extension" is an optional add-on for EPLAN Electric P8



The "PLC & Bus Extension" add-on helps you to manage PLC controllers

and bus systems.

Configurable PLC connection points

To display PLC cards with programmable connection points in EPLAN

you can now use the new "PLC connection point, multifunction" function

definition.

Connection points with this function definition are configurable: For these

connection points the Type of signal property in the connection point

logic determines what type of connection point it is. The default setting

is "Digital input". If a signal type is selected that does not define any I/O

connection point (i.e. not "Digital input", "Digital output", "Analog input",

or "Analog output"), then the connection point is treated as a power

supply. Thus the configurable PLC connection points are not only de-

fined by the function definition, but the signal type is also taken into

account.

If you want to use configurable PLC connection points in your project,

start by adding any PLC I/O connections to the schematic and then, on

the Symbol / function data tab in the properties dialog, select the "PLC

connection point, multifunction" function definition for these connection

points.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 329

Note:

Please note that exported PLC connection points with the "PLC con-

nection point, multifunction" function definition are not displayed in the

Synchronize / import PLC data dialog if they are re-imported. The

PLC configuration systems assign specific connection points to these

"variable" PLC connection points, and for that reason they are not rec-

ognized as multi-function PLC connection points when re-imported.

Channels with several I/O connection points

In EPLAN a PLC channel can now contain more than one I/O connection

point. However, only one of these I/O connection points on a channel

can be active. To mark all the other I/O connection points within the

channel as disabled, you can assign them the new Deactivated I/O

connection point <20438> property.

Benefit: This means that the same macro and the same part can be

used for different wiring configurations. If you can restrict your

macro data to the bare minimum, this will reduce the over-

head of macro maintenance without costing you any flexibility

in project planning.

Example:

A macro contains an analog channel with two I/O connection points to

which the Deactivated I/O connection point property is assigned. You

can use this macro with different wirings for measuring current or vol-

tage. Once the macro has been added, activate the I/O connection point

that matches the wiring by deactivating the Deactivated I/O connection

point property there. Deactivated connection points are treated as power supplies. For exam-

ple, when addressing a filled address, the address from the channel is

overwritten.


330 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Blockwise use of existing PLC connection points and PLC boxes

In the Use existing PLC connection points blockwise dialog, the PLC

boxes can now be seen and can be selected for use.

If you have highlighted PLC connection points in the project that are in a

PLC box, these will be assigned the selected connection points when

using the existing DT. This does not change the DT of the PLC box and,

as a result, the assignment of the PLC connection points to the PLC box

is lost. If you want to retain the assignment of the PLC connection points

to the PLC box, you should again use the existing PLC box.

In the new Status column on the right-hand side, icons show you

whether the existing PLC box or connection point selected for use can

be assigned to the PLC box or connection point available in the project

in the left-hand table. The icons have the following meaning:

Icon Meaning

Function category and PLC function group match. It can be

used.

Warning: The function category of the PLC functions

matches, but the group does not match (e.g. in the case

of a PLC connection point with digital input and a PLC

connection point for a bus cable). It can be used, but this

could lead to incorrect results.

Error: The function category of the PLC functions does not

match (e.g. in the case of a PLC box and a PLC connection

point). It cannot be used.

Interface for PLC data exchange with Rockwell

The new version introduces a new interface for PLC data exchange. This

interface allows the exchange of PLC data between EPLAN Electric P8

and the "RSLogix Architect" PLC configuration software from Rockwell

Automation.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 331

For this purpose, both data exchange dialogs, Export PLC data and

Import PLC data, have been upgraded to include the "RSLogix Architect

3.6" format.

Simplified data display when importing PLC data

Previously, when importing PLC data all properties were displayed in the

Synchronize / import PLC data dialog. In the new version, the number

of properties displayed in the synchronization dialog has now been

significantly reduced.

Benefit: It is easier for the user to see which properties can be ap-

plied. The transparent display makes importing PLC project

planning data easier and also facilitates cross-discipline

engineering in line with PLC software development.

After you have selected a PLC object in the Master / slave or Rack /

module fields, only the relevant properties are displayed in the table on

the right-hand side, depending on the selected import file format. The

properties that are not displayed remain unchanged on import.

Example:

In import files for the "Siemens SIMATIC STEP 7 version 5.3 / 5.4"

format, the Subslot property is displayed for the PLC communication

units. In a Schneider bus configuration file this property does not occur.

Extended part allocation when exporting and importing bus configurations

For the "PLC standard exchange format", a parts list is now exported and

imported in addition to the PLC type designation for each PLC device. If

several parts have been entered for a PLC box (at the main function),

these are exported and reassigned when the PLC box is imported.


332 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Cables

Highlighting cable connections

Cable connections can now be highlighted in EPLAN, by a special color, for example. For this purpose, the EPLAN550, Symbol graphic.Con-

nection symbols.Autoconnecting.Cables layer has been added to

layer management.

Benefit: Using color highlighting means that cable connections can be

traced easily and reliably through the project. Greater trans-

parency in documentation avoids planning errors, increasing

quality without any additional input in terms of time and effort.

As the properties of this layer defined in layer management are used for

the cable connection autoconnecting lines, a special setting must be

specified. To do so, select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project

name" > Devices > Cables (conductors) in the menu, go to the

General tab and in the Representation of the autoconnecting line

group box select the Cable-based option.

Note:

If you select cable-based representation of the autoconnecting line, the

highlighted setting for the cable connections in layer management al-

ways takes precedence over a setting to the connection graphic via a

potential definition point. If a setting is specified on a connection via a

connection definition point, this setting takes precedence over the Cable-

based option.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 333

Ignoring subordinate DTs for nested targets

In the project-specific cable settings in Options > Settings > Projects >

"Project name" > Devices > Cables, the new Ignore subordinate DTs

for nested targets setting can now be seen.

This setting affects both the cable numbering and the automatic genera-

tion of cables as well as the output of cables in reports.

Benefit: This option allows you to change the operation mode of

EPLAN to the main or subordinate device depending on your

requirements. Reports and automatic functions are also avail-

able that immediately show the view that you are used to

working with.

If the check box is activated, the subordinate device tags are not output

as cable targets in the case of nested devices. In this case the superior

devices (for example the black boxes) are the targets. The representa-

tion of the conductor targets is not changed. The subordinate device tags

are always output as targets here.

If the check box is deselected, the subordinate device tags are output as

cable targets.


334 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Inserting insulated wire terminations

In EPLAN, you now have the opportunity to use a special symbol for

insulated wire terminations, such as the conductors of a cable connected

on one side.

Symbols for wire terminations

To insert a corresponding symbol in the graphical editor, in the Symbol

selection dialog, choose a symbol for insulated wire terminations (either NCI // 100 // Wire termination, insulated or NC // 101 //

Wire termination, not connected). These symbols belong to the

SPECIAL symbol library. They can be found under General special

functions in the new Insulated wire termination function

category.

For this purpose, the new Insulated wire termination function

category has been added to the function definitions under General //

General special functions. Functions with a function definition only

have one connection point and this connection is terminated by the

corresponding function.

Properties dialog for wire terminations

When you have placed the symbol in the required variant, the properties

dialog opens. On the new Insulated wire termination tab, enter the

displayed DT of the device at which the connection terminates. For this

component too, use the [...] button to open the DT selection dialog

where the required DT can be imported.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 335

If the device to which the insulated wire termination is assigned is re-

named, the device tag on the wire termination is automatically updated

accordingly.

Displaying wire terminations in the navigators

Insulated wire terminations are shown in the navigator trees (e.g. in the

device navigator) as part of the device to which they are assigned, and

are indicated by the special icon .

The Popup menu > New menu in the device navigator allows you to

create unplaced wire terminations (icon: ) and to place these in the

schematic later on or to connect them to interconnect devices as un-

placed.

Example:

The figure below shows an insulated wire termination in the device

navigator:

Adding insulation for "Interconnect devices"

When generating unplaced connections between device connection

points in the Interconnect devices dialog / tab, you also have the option

to generate unplaced insulated wire terminations. To do so, use the new

Add insulation menu item in the popup menu in this dialog / tab.


336 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Then select one or more connection points in the Device source /

Device target table and choose Popup menu > Add insulation. The

Function definitions dialog then opens, in which a suitable function

definition is automatically suggested as the selected source for the

insulated wire terminations.

The Properties (components): General device dialog then opens. In

this dialog, you can edit the properties of the insulated wire termination.

The displayed DT of the insulation cannot be changed here: this was

defined when the device source was selected. When you close the prop-

erties dialog, the insulated wire termination is generated as an unplaced

function and shown in the Interconnect devices dialog as an additional

row in the table.

Other aspects of insulated wire terminations

Please also bear the following in mind in relation to insulated wire termi-

nations:

• Insulated wire terminations are not taken into account when selecting

devices and when overwriting function templates.

• Device-oriented reports

In device-oriented reports (e.g. connection diagrams), the insulated

wire termination for the device to which it is assigned is not output as

a connection point. For example, if insulation is assigned to a terminal

strip, the insulated wire termination will not be listed as an additional

terminal for the terminal strip in the terminal diagram.

• Connection-based reports

In connection-based reports (connection lists, cable diagrams, etc.),

insulated wire terminations are output as the target of a connection or

a cable conductor.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 337

Devices

Inserting cable parts as devices

If you now insert a cable part as a device in the graphical editor (e.g.

using Insert > Device), the individual objects will be made available for

placement in the sequence defined in parts management.

Benefit: It takes fewer steps to enter cables in the diagram as de-

vices. This reduces the time spent on editing and the user

can concentrate on plant planning.

In the process the symbol for the cable definition line or the shield is

displayed at the cursor. At the conductors, the Color / number of the

conductors is displayed.

Note:

Shields should not be defined as separate function templates with the

"Shield, cable definition" function definition in parts management; this

should be defined implicitly via the cable conductors. If the part has a

function template with the function definition "Conductor / wire" and the

potential type "SH", a shield is generated automatically when Insert

device is used before this cable conductor is inserted.

A connection definition point is generated when a conductor is placed. If

a non-empty connection definition point already exists for the connection,

a prompt is displayed that allows you to choose to retain or replace the

connection definition point. When replaced, the old connection definition

point is deleted and a new one placed with the data from parts manage-

ment.


338 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

The following function templates are defined for a cable part:

Row Function definition Color / no. ... Potential type

1 Cable definition

2 Conductor / wire 1 Undefined

3 Conductor / wire SH SH

In row 3 a shielded conductor – with the potential type "SH" – is defined

at the same time as the shield. The shield name is taken from the Color

/ number field of this conductor.

When the device is inserted into the graphical editor, the following

objects are made available in sequence:

Object Display at the cursor Properties

1. Cable definition

2. Conductor 1 Color / number: 1,

Potential type: Undefined

3 Shield Name of shield: SH

4 Conductor SH Color / number: SH,

Potential type: SH


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 339

Device Selection

Device selection for wires

It is now also possible to run a device selection on wire parts at a con-

nection definition point with the suitable "Conductor / wire" function

definition. During this type of device selection, the data of the particular

wire (Color / number, Cross-section / diameter, etc.), are transferred

from parts management to the connection.

Benefit: When wires are selected from the parts database, the data is

applied directly to the diagram. This reduces the amount of

manual input and results in standardization of the wires used.

Notes:

• Connection definition points placed on an autoconnecting line via

Insert > Connection definition point, show the "Connection,

general" function definition by default. To select a different function

definition for a connection definition point, in the properties dialog, on

the Connection definition point tab, click the [...] button located next

to the Function definition field. Then, in the subsequent dialog, se-

lect the "Conductor / wire" function definition.

• When connection definition points have the Cable connection prop-

erty activated, it is not possible to make a device selection. This is the

case, for example, with connection definition points placed on the

respective connection lines when drawing a cable definition line. Extensions to parts management

Previous versions of EPLAN's parts management have already allowed

you to create parts belonging to the "Wires" product group. But for a

device selection to be based on these parts, the data for the wires had to

be extended.


340 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

This is why the Function templates tab is now also available to the wire

parts. The following column headers are available for the "Component

(wires)" product group in the Device selection (function templates)

table:

• Row

• Function definition

• Color / no.

• Cross-section / diameter

• Potential type

• Intrinsically safe.

For device selection to be successful, it is essential to specify a function

template for each wire. To do this, click in the relevant cell of the

Function definition column and then click [...], to go to the Function definitions dialog. Use General // General special functions //

Connection // Connection definition to select the "Conductor /

wire" function definition.

The Wire data tab has also been redesigned as part of these exten-

sions. As the conductor cross-section and the color are now entered in

the function template, the fields of the same name have been removed.

To allow even more, specific data to be entered for the wires, the Con-

ductor type, Voltage, Min. bending radius, Copper weight, Cable

weight (kg/km), and Short-circuit proof fields / check boxes have been

added.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 341

Extensions to device selection

The Wire tab has been added to the Settings: Device selection dialog,

so that selection criteria for existing function data can also be defined for

wires. The following properties can be used as the criteria for wire parts:

• Color / number

• Cross-section / diameter

• Potential type

• Intrinsically safe.

Filtering by potential type works in exactly the same way as for cables. If

the Potential type check box is selected as the selection criterion, then

device selection does not check the potential type at the connection

definition point, but at the associated connection.

If the conductors / wires have potential type "PE" or "SH", only parts with

the matching potential type (that is, "PE" or "SH") are offered. If a con-

ductor / wire has a different potential type (such as "N"), the device

selection Main parts list will also include parts with other potential types

(such as "L", "N", etc.).

Special Topics EPLAN Pro Panel

342 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


The following sections contain further information about the functions of

the new "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on. Here is an overview of the topics:

• Navigators for the 3D mounting layout (see page 342)

• Creating and opening layout spaces (see page 348)

• Placing mounting panels and enclosures in the layout space (see

page 349)

• Placing components on mounting surfaces (see page 354)

• Changing the 3D view of a layout space (see page 359)

• Editing objects in the layout space (see page 363)

• Macros for the 3D mounting layout (see page 370)

• Editing the device logic of 3D objects (see page 374)

• Inserting and updating model views (see page 378)

• Creating and editing outlines for extrusions (see page 381)

• Device structure for mechanical devices (see page 384)

• Online numbering for mechanical devices (see page 385).

Navigators for the 3D Mounting Layout

Logical structure in the layout space navigator

The layout space navigator maps the logical structure of the placed part.

There are hierarchical dependencies between all the items. If a superior

item (such as a mounting rail) is moved or deleted, the devices that are

placed on it will be moved or deleted as well. This logical structure can

also be included in reports.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 343

The layout space

As well as the logical structure display, there is also a graphical 3D dis-

play area that shows the placed device. This display is independent of

any project page. The 3D model is displayed in a layout space that

allows the 3D objects and their editing to be viewed.

It is therefore a basic requirement for working with 3D components that a

layout space be first created in the layout space navigator. This is the

environment / workspace for the 3D data and the functional logic that

connects it.

The layout space shows a 3D view of the 3D model with shading (body

surfaces filled with color and shaded differently according to the angle).

Devices displayed in the layout space navigator

The layout space navigator displays all devices that exist in the layout

spaces of the opened project.

The new Layout space menu option is provided on the menu bar for

calling the navigator and creating layout spaces. Simply select Layout

space > Navigator to open the layout space navigator.

Tree view

The layout spaces form the top hierarchical level in the tree. Beneath a

layout space, the devices it contains are arranged in hierarchical order:

Starting from the mounting panel or the superior enclosure, all devices

are displayed beneath the item on which they are placed.

You can modify the way the tree is displayed by selecting Popup menu

> View and selecting one or more configurations from the menu that ap-

pears. The default setting is Item designation in which the item desig-

nation is displayed with the grouping sign. The grouping sign is always

displayed first, regardless of which view is selected.


344 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

If you have placed a mounting panel in the layout space, for example,

the grouping sign "MP<mounting panel number>" is inherited by all the

items arranged beneath it and is prefixed before their designation text.

This ensures that it is always clear which part placement belongs to

which mounting panel or enclosure in the navigator tree.

Example:

The illustration below shows an open project with multiple layout spaces

in the layout space navigator tree (left) and an open layout space in the

3D view (right).

In the layout space navigator's tree view, different icons illustrate the

types of component and their status:

Icon Icon Meaning

Layout space

Shown Hidden

Enclosure

Frame profile


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 345

Icon Icon Meaning

Wall panel

Door

Mounting panel

Mounting rail

Wire duct

Part placement

Restricted placing area

Not selected Selected directly

Mounting surface List view

This display shows all devices that exist in the layout spaces of the

opened project. The view and sorting of the devices depends on the

selected column configuration.

Popup menu

The popup menu for the layout space navigator contains menu options

that are used specially to create and display layout spaces (e.g., New

layout space, Open layout space, etc.). It also contains other functions

for editing in the 3D area, such as Update main elements, Update part

dimensions, etc.

Project structure in the 3D mounting layout navigator

The 3D mounting layout navigator is used to list the devices available in

the project so that they can be placed in a layout space.


346 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

To open this new dialog, follow the menu path Project data > Parts /

Devices > 3D mounting layout navigator. This has the following

options:

• All devices to which a part is assigned are listed.

• The view in the 3D mounting layout navigator is always identifier-

based.

• Parts without a device tag are grouped on a separate tree structure

level.

• Devices that have already been placed are identified by an additional

icon.

Multiple entries may be selected in both the tree view and the list view.

These selected devices can then be placed on the mounting panel at the

same time. It is also possible to select a node in the tree view. All de-

vices that are affected by this selection are placed together.

Filters in the navigators

As is normally the case in the other navigators, in the layout space or 3D

mounting layout navigator you have the option of limiting the quantity of

data displayed by using a filter.

To filter by unplaced parts in the 3D mounting layout navigator, the

criteria selection dialog includes the new Number of units / quantity

(unplaced, 3D) <20509> property. In the criteria selection dialog for this

navigator you can otherwise select project properties and / or grouping

elements as filter criteria for function definitions (function definition,

function group, etc.).

Quick input filtering

These navigators also have a new field Value: <Property> beneath the

filter. You can use quick input in this field to quickly modify the value of a

filter criterion for a defined and selected filter.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 347

To do this, a new Quick input column has been added to the Filter

dialog, which you can open by clicking the [...] button and use to define

the filter criteria. The Quick input check box can only be selected for

one filter criterion. This then activates the Value: <Property> field for the

relevant navigator. For a value entered in the Value: <Property> field to

be taken into account, the filter must be activated by selecting the Active

check box.

Value: <Property>:

To enter a new value in this field, click in the field, type in the value, and

press [Enter]. The display in the navigator changes accordingly. The

value entered here is then accepted as the value of the filter criterion in

the filter scheme.

Depending on which property you selected as the criterion (e.g., struc-

ture identifier), you can click [...] in the Value: <Property> field and

select a different value for the filter criterion from the dialog that opens.

To enter multiple values in the field, add a semicolon as a separator

between the values. This is evaluated as an OR operation.

If quick input is not selected for any filter criterion in the Filter dialog,

quick input cannot be used in that navigator. The Value: <Property>

field is grayed out.


348 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Creating and Opening a Layout Space

Creating a layout space

Select Layout space > New to create a layout space in an open project.

The Properties (components): Layout space dialog opens.

If necessary, change the layout space name suggested in the Name

field. Click [...] to open the Structure identifier of layout space dialog

for editing the structure identifier. Enter a descriptive text in the Descrip-

tion field; this is also displayed in the 3D mounting layout navigator tree

view. Click [OK] to close the properties dialog and open the new layout

space in the graphical editor.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 349

Delete layout space

You can delete a layout space selected in the layout space navigator by

selecting Popup menu > Delete in the navigator dialog.

Opening a layout space

Select the layout space in the layout space navigator, then select Layout

space > Open. The selected layout space is opened for further editing

and is displayed in the isometric 3D view to southeast by default. If a

layout space was already selected, it is closed and no longer displayed.

To open a layout space in another, separate 3D view window, select the

Open layout space in new window menu option from the popup menu.

Close layout space

To close the 3D view of an open layout space, select the associated

layout space description in the layout space navigator, then select

Layout space > Close.

Otherwise the 3D view behaves just like another window in the graphical

editor and can be closed by pressing the shortcut key [Ctrl] + [F4].

Placing Mounting Panels and Enclosures

Placing mounting panels

To place a mounting panel in an open layout space, select the Insert >

Mounting panel menu option. The "Mounting panels" product subgroup

is displayed directly in the "Mechanics" generic product group in the Part

selection dialog that opens. Select a mounting panel part and click

[OK].


350 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tip:

You can also use the Pro Panel toolbar to place mounting panels, en-

closures, mounting rails, and wire ducts. Click the (Mounting panel)

button, for example, to switch to part selection, where you can select a

mounting panel part.

The mounting panel hangs on the cursor as a transparent preview. The

size is as defined for the part. The four possible handles are marked by

gray squares. The current handle is displayed in red at the bottom left.

Click the [A] button to change the handle clockwise from the "Bottom

left" position to "Top left", "Top right", "Bottom right".

Select Popup menu > Placement options to call up the Placement

options dialog. This dialog allows you to set the options for the place-

ment of parts in the 3D mounting layout.

Left-click to place the mounting panel at the required position. The

selected part remains at the cursor and can be placed again.

If you want to place the mounting panel in an enclosure or on a second

mounting panel, move the mounting panel to the vicinity of a corner point

of the second mounting panel or an enclosure profile. A red 3D snap

point symbol then appears at the corner point. The mounting panel to be

placed snaps in at this point. Click to place it directly at this position.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 351

Example:

In this example, a mounting panel is connected to a mounting panel that

is already placed. The red rectangle illustrates the snap point.

Placing free mounting panels

For quick and easy design and configuration, it is possible to place an

individual mounting panel in the layout space without surrounding enclo-

sure profiles and without selecting from parts management. The free

mounting panel has the same properties and editing options as the

mounting panel associated with a specific part. The device selection

allows the mounting panel to be retrospectively assigned a part.

When you select the Insert > Free mounting panel menu option, the

Properties (components): Mounting panel dialog opens.


352 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

On the Mounting panel tab, enter values for the width, height, and depth

of the free mounting panel, or accept the suggested values. The dimen-

sions must not be left blank, otherwise the free mounting panel cannot

be placed. Enter a designation text in the Designation field, or accept

the suggested "Mounting panel".

Click [OK] to close the properties dialog. The free mounting panel then

hangs on the cursor in the defined size as a transparent preview and you

can place it in the 3D view. In all other respects this placement operation

is the same as for placing enclosures and mounting panels from parts

management.

Placing enclosures with mounting panels

The EPLAN parts management contains various predefined series of

enclosures; you can select enclosures from them to be placed. Some of

these enclosures (e.g., from the TS 8 series) already have a predefined

mounting panel and one or two doors.

Mechanical components (mounting rails, wire ducts, etc.) and devices

may be placed on the mounting panels and on the doors.

When Insert > Enclosure is used to place enclosures, the part selection

dialog is again opened with a filter set automatically. This ensures that

you only see parts from the "Enclosure" product group.

When you have selected the required enclosure part, the enclosure

hangs on the cursor as a detailed preview with the height, width, and

depth defined for the part. The currently selected handle is displayed in

red, and is also identified by a red square as a snap point. Click [A] to

change the handle. Every time you click the [A] button, the handle

changes clockwise from the "Back left" position to "Back right", "Front

right", "Front left".


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 353

Example:

The illustration below shows how to change the handle for an enclosure.

Select Popup menu > Placement options to call up the Placement

options dialog. Here you can define an offset between the handle and

the cursor position, and enter spacings for arranging multiple enclosures

in series.

Left-click to place the enclosure at the required position. When you insert

it, the enclosure in the layout space navigator automatically receives its

grouping sign "S<Enclosure number>", and this identifier is inherited by

all individual components of the enclosure and all components placed in

it.

All enclosure add-on parts placed with the enclosure are grouped logi-

cally. When you move an enclosure or an enclosure add-on part, all the

components placed on it are moved as well. The selected part can be

placed multiple times; it remains on the cursor until you cancel the

action.


354 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tip:

You can also use the Options > Placement options menu option or the

(Placement options) button from the Pro Panel options toolbar to

open the Placement options dialog.

Placing Components on Mounting Panels or Mounting Surfaces

Once you have added mounting panels or enclosures to your layout

space, you can insert various mechanical components, such as mount-

ing rails, wire ducts, etc. These components are normally placed on

mounting panels or on the mounting surfaces of enclosure profiles.

To place devices correctly on mounting panels, mounting rails, doors,

walls, etc., the required mounting surface or item must be identified for

placement. The Layout space - <Project name> navigator dialog

contains the following options for this:

• Activate mounting surfaces automatically

Suitable for all surfaces and items that are not covered by other

components.

• Activate mounting surfaces directly

Suitable for accessing the mounting surfaces of covered components

or components that are at the back. This is not possible in the graphi-

cal display without hiding the components that are covering other

components. The viewpoint is toggled to the front view. All compo-

nents that are not involved are hidden.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 355

Activating mounting surfaces / items automatically

If you want to activate an item or mounting panel automatically, first

select the required component in the layout space navigator's tree view.

Select Popup menu > Go to (graphic). The selected item and the com-

ponents arranged on it are then displayed.

Now select a device or a mechanical component for placement (e.g.,

Insert > Mounting rail). When you have selected the required part,

move the cursor over the surface to be activated or over an item placed

on it. The surface or item beneath the cursor is highlighted in color.

Once you have found the surface or item onto which you want to place

the component, hold the cursor still for around 1 second without clicking

or keyboard input. The surface or item beneath the cursor changes color.

The surface or item has been activated. It is now only possible to move

the cursor on the activated surface.

Move the cursor to the required position, and left-click once to place a

device. When you insert a mechanical component, left-click twice to

define the start and end points of this component on the mounting

surface.

To activate another surface or item, select Popup menu > Go to

(graphic) again in the navigator and repeat the operation described

above.

Activating mounting surfaces directly

For direct activation, first select the required mounting surface in the lay-

out space navigator tree, then select Popup menu > Activate directly.

The selected mounting surface and the components arranged on it are

then displayed in the front view. All other components contained in the

layout space are hidden. A grid is displayed on the mounting surface.


356 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The hidden components and activated mounting surfaces are identified

by special icons in the layout space navigator (e.g. hidden mounting

panel: ; activated mounting surface: ).

Now select a device or a mechanical component for placement (e.g.,

Insert > Mounting rail). It is now only possible to move on the activated

surface. Then place the required device or mechanical component.

To activate another mounting surface, select Popup menu > Activate

directly again in the navigator.

Cancel direct activation

To release the directly activated mounting surface once more, select the

Popup menu > Cancel direct activation menu option in the navigator.

You can now work with automatic activation once more.

Placing mounting rails and wire ducts

Mounting rails and wire ducts are normally placed on mounting panels or

on the mounting surfaces of enclosure profiles.

To place them, select a suitable option from the Insert menu (such as

Insert > Mounting rail). The correct tree structure level will then appear

directly in the opened part selection. When you have selected the part,

you will once again be able to change the handle on the component in

the preview by pressing [A]. You can also access the placement options

from the popup menu when placing these mechanical components.

Mounting rails and wire ducts can be inserted in two different ways that

differ in terms of the method used to specify the length:

• Length variable for placement

This is done by entering the start and end points; the length is defined

by the distance between the two points. The points / length can be

defined by left-clicking or by entering the data in the input box.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 357

• Placement with accepted length

This is done by accepting the length of an item that has already been

placed. To do this, select the part, then select the Adopt length

option from the popup menu, and then click another mechanical

component that has already been placed. The new component to be

placed adopts the length of the component you clicked and hangs on

the cursor. It should only move with the cursor in parallel to the item

you clicked, and can then be placed by left-clicking, for example.

With this method, the component can also be automatically positioned

centered between two items that have already been placed. Once you

have adopted the length, select Popup menu > Place centered and

then left-click a second wire duct or mounting rail.

Inserting devices as defined devices

As in the EPLAN platform, devices can be inserted as defined devices in

the normal way. This can be done as follows in an open layout space:

• via the Insert > Device menu path

• via the Popup menu > New device or Popup menu > Place menu

paths in the 3D mounting layout navigator

• using drag & drop from the device list

• using drag & drop from the navigators (such as the device or part

master data navigator).

Note:

Mechanical devices (enclosures, mounting rails, etc.) are not displayed

in the device navigator. For this reason, it is also not possible to create

such a device as a defined device via Popup menu > New device in the

device navigator.

A defined device can only be inserted if either the device-specific dimen-

sions (width, height, depth) or a macro is stored for the selected part. If

this is not the case, then an appropriate message is displayed.


358 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

In parts management, the Mounting data tab contains the Width,

Height, and Depth fields and the Technical data tab contains the

Macro field for updating this data.

If the conditions are fulfilled, the defined device hangs on the cursor as a

preview, and you can place it on mounting surfaces or mechanical com-

ponents in the 3D view. The automatic activation or direct activation

options help with accurate placement. The defined device's handle can

be switched using the [A] key before placement. If the device concerned

has already been placed in a layout space within the project, a prompt

will appear to this effect. Click [Yes] to place the device again.

Defining locked areas

Mounting surfaces can be locked for positioning so that no part place-

ment can occur on these areas. This may be necessary if holes are to be

subsequently drilled at these points or if the space is needed for devices

that are mounted from other sides. This applies to cooling attachments

that protrude from above into the enclosure, for example, or to monitors

and controls on a door with a larger mounting depth. Locked areas are

independent 3D objects drawn as rectangles.

Select Insert > Area locked for placing to define a locked area in an

open layout space. Move the cursor onto the area to be locked to auto-

matically activate it, or activate a mounting surface directly in the layout

space navigator. The automatically or directly activated mounting surface

is identified in color. Input is now only possible on this area. Draw the

rectangle representing the area locked for placing. Click again to define

the locked area.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 359

Changing the 3D View of the Layout Space

EPLAN provides the following ways to change the view of an open layout

space:

• Change zoom section

This is done using the View > Window menu or by using the mouse

wheel. These familiar functions allow you to enlarge or reduce the lay-

out space displayed in the 3D view or another component displayed

separately (mounting panel, mounting rail, etc.).

• Change viewpoint or viewing angle

To do this, the View menu contains the 3D viewpoint and Rotate

viewing angle menu options.

The 3D viewpoint menu option allows you to set various orthogonal

(top, bottom, left, right, front, back) or isometric views (southwest,

southeast, northeast, northwest) for your layout space. The content

of the layout space display is refreshed according to which view is

selected.

When you select the Rotate viewing angle menu option, you can

change the viewing angle of the graphic by moving the mouse. The

content of the layout space is displayed with the selected viewing

angle until you select a different viewpoint.

Tip:

These functions can also be selected using buttons on the 3D viewpoint

toolbar. The toolbar is hidden by default. • Highlight selection

When you click a component in 3D view, this component is identified

by a red border. If you move the cursor over a component in 3D view,

this component is highlighted by a light border. This also applies when

you select a device in the layout space navigator. This makes it easier

to identify a component in 3D view.


360 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• Show / hide components

Components can be shown or hidden either using the respective

options from the popup menu in the layout space navigator, or in the

3D view by using the popup menu to specifically hide individually

selected components. For more information, see the following

sections.

• Simplify object display

To reduce the level of detail displayed on screen for certain placed

objects, you can use the Simplified representation option from the

layout space navigator's popup menu. For more information, see the

section with the same name on page 361.

• Set colors and / or transparency

The colors and transparency level of the mechanical components and

devices can – as is normally the case in EPLAN – be defined once for

the entire project using the layer management settings, and then be

defined individually using the respective properties dialog. You can

also set the colors for the 3D view (e.g., for background colors) in the

user-specific settings. For more information, see the section with the

same name on page 362.

Showing / hiding components from the layout space navigator

If you have a layout space open in the layout space navigator, you can

select Popup menu > Hide to hide the selected layout space (mounting

panel or enclosure) or the components selected in the navigator. Select

Popup menu > Show > Selection to show the hidden structure once

more.

The hidden components are identified by special icons in the navigator to

help to distinguish between them (see the section "Devices displayed in

the layout space navigator" on page 343).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 361

The various submenu options on the Show popup menu option allow

you to determine which components contained in the layout space

should be displayed: Selection (all items below the selected tree struc-

ture level), All, Only mounting panels, or Only doors.

Showing / hiding individual components in the 3D view

To specifically hide individual components, first select them in the

graphic and then select the Hide option from the popup menu. This

menu option is not available if you select multiple components.

If you want to show the entire 3D model once more, left-click the mount-

ing panel / enclosure in the 3D view and select Popup menu > Show

all.

Simplifying the object display

The Simplified representation function allows you to increase the level

of detail of the graphic in the layout space for terminal strips and / or 3D

macros.

You can define which items are to be simplified in the display using the

Apply simplified representation to group box in the Settings: 3D

dialog. To access the settings dialog, select Options > Settings > User

> Graphical editing > 3D. These settings apply to all items already

placed and to all subsequently placed items.

To simplify the way the placed parts are represented, select Popup

menu > Simplified representation in the layout space navigator.

3D macros are then represented by rectangular bodies with the same

dimensions as the previously-used items. Terminal strips are combined

into a block; the individual terminals are no longer displayed. The labe-

ling for the individual terminals is retained.


362 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Setting colors and / or transparency

Layer management allows you to set colors and / or the transparency

of mechanical components and devices for the entire project. The "3D

graphic" hierarchical level has been added to the tree in the Layer

management dialog for this purpose.

The drop-down list in the Transparency column allows you to set a dif-

ferent transparency level for the various mechanical components. The

transparency can be set in 10% increments.

To set the transparency individually for a component, select this compo-

nent in the layout space navigator or 3D view and select Popup menu >

Properties. Then switch to the Format tab in the properties dialog and

select a different transparency level from the drop-down list in the

Transparency field.

Changing the background colors for the 3D view

The default colors for the background to the 3D view can be set indivi-

dually. To set the colors, go to the Settings: 3D dialog (under Options >

Settings > User > Graphical editing > 3D).

Shading - Background 1 / Shading - Background 2:

The fields of the Color settings group box are used to define the back-

ground colors. Click [...] to open the familiar dialog for selecting a color.

If you have selected two different colors, the background will be drawn

with a color gradient. The first color determines the starting color in the

top of the window, while the second color represents the end color in the

bottom of the window. If you have selected two identical colors, the back-

ground will be drawn with one single color.

Active mounting surface:

When activated, an individual mounting surface of a body is identified by

a color that is different to the body color. This field allows you to define

the color for the active mounting surface.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 363

Editing Objects in the Layout Space

Rotating objects about an axis

The Rotate around axis function allows you to rotate one or more

objects in the layout space around one of the preselected axes through

the centre of the body. It does not matter which viewpoint is selected for

the rotation; the object is always rotated centered around the absolute

axes. It is not possible to use an edge as an axis of rotation with this

function.

To rotate one or more objects, select the Edit > Graphic > Rotate

around axis > X-axis / Y-axis / Z-axis menu option. The shape of the

cursor then indicates which rotation function is active . Select the

required objects by opening a frame around them with the mouse, for

example.

Then enter the angle in the input box. The input box opens, for example,

if you enter a number on the keyboard (see section "Input Box for

Editors" on page 33). The possible values for the angle may be positive

or negative.

Press [Enter] to confirm the angle you entered. The selected objects are

then rotated. The objects are deselected, but the rotation function re-

mains active and you can select other objects to be rotated. You can use

Undo to reverse any individual rotation.


364 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

90° rotation of an object about an axis, and result:

Axis Rotation Result

X

Changing the length of objects in the layout space

For mounting rails and wire ducts, the length is defined when they are

placed in the layout space. You can also change the length retrospec-

tively in the layout space. You can lengthen or shorten these objects; it is

not possible to select multiple objects.

To change the length of placed mounting rails and wire ducts, select the

Edit > Graphic > Change length menu option. Click the object to be

changed on the end at which the change is to take place.

A red snap point then appears at the cursor at the selected end. The side

of the object that you clicked can be moved in both directions with the

cursor. The 3D snap points on the mounting panel are displayed in blue;

the snap points of other components appear when the cursor touches

them.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 365

You can use the following input methods to determine the new length:

• Change length by mouse click

To do this, move the cursor to the point at which you want to lengthen

or shorten the object. Click again to set the new end point for the

object.

• Change length by snapping a projection point

Move the cursor towards one of the 3D snap points displayed or onto

the edge of a mounting panel. The cursor snaps onto the snap point it

finds or onto an edge. The red cursor snap point is surrounded by a

red square. The object representation is projected as far as the found

point, and extended or shortened until it reaches it. Click to align the

object at the projection point and display it in the new length.

• Change length via the input box

Depending on the setting, the input box appears immediately when

you click the object to be extended or when you enter a number on

the keyboard.

Enter the value by which the object is to be extended or shortened in

the input box. Unsigned values or values with a "+" before them

extend the box, while values with a "-" shorten it. Press [Enter] to

display the object with the new length.

The Change length function remains active until you select Popup

menu > Cancel action.


366 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

Changing the length by snapping a projection point, and the result:

After selection of the mounting rail

If you have selected a mounting rail as the element to be extended, the snap point on the cursor is dis-played as a red square.

Snapping a projection point

Move the cursor in the vicin-ity of a found snap point. The cursor snaps onto the snap point, and the mounting rail display is projected as far as the found projection object.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 367

Result

Click to extend the mounting rail to the found projection point.

Measuring distances in the layout space

The Measuring function is provided to allow you to check the compo-

nents mounted on mounting panels and enclosures in the layout space.

The distance from points and edges can be measured, and the measure-

ment result is displayed in a dialog.

To measure a distance in an open layout space, first select the Layout

space > Measuring menu option. Then select the first point required or

the first edge of an object by clicking it. When the cursor touches a

measurable edge, it is highlighted. If the cursor touches a measurable

point, it is displayed as a highlighted square.

When you have selected the required second point or second edge by

clicking again, the Measuring result dialog opens. The measured points

and the end points of measured edges are displayed in the layout space.

A connecting line is drawn between the measured points.


368 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The Measuring result dialog displays the measured coordinates and

length values. The following options are available:

• Elements are on the same mounting surface

If the two measured elements are placed on a single mounting sur-

face, the coordinates and distances thus determined are related to the

zero point of this mounting surface. Distances in the Y direction (dy)

are ignored and set to "0".

If the Parallel to mounting surface check box is deselected, the Y

distances are also displayed.

• Elements are not on the same mounting surface

If the two elements do not have a common mounting surface, this

option is not available for selection. The Parallel to mounting

surface check box is grayed out and deselected. In this case, the

coordinates and distances thus determined are output in relation to

the zero point of the layout space.

If you click the [Re-measure] button, the measuring results are dis-

carded and you can start another measurement.

Example:

Measuring points and edges:

Selection Result

Measure point (1) /

edge (2)


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 369

Displaying mounting clearances

Parts management can be used to define a mounting clearance in terms

of width, height, and depth on the Mounting data tab in the part proper-

ties. This mounting clearance ensures that the permitted thermal stress

on parts placed beside or on top of one another is not exceeded.

During placement, the defined mounting clearances of parts already

placed can be shown for checking purposes. To do this, select the View

> Mounting clearances menu option. A transparent body is displayed

around the part placements that have a defined mounting clearance.

When you insert devices, you can also relate the handle of the part

underneath to the defined mounting clearance. The With regard to

mounting clearance check box is included in the placement options for

this purpose.

Example:

Mounting clearances for multiple part placements are displayed in a section of a mounting panel.

Selection Result

The Mounting clearances menu option is activated


370 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Macros for the 3D Mounting Layout

The macro technology in the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on is largely

oriented towards the normal way of working in the EPLAN platform.

The following applies to 3D macros:

• 3D macros are managed in a macro project.

• 3D macros can be created and used as window (*.ema) and / or

symbol macros (*.ems).

• 3D macros are always created with the "3D mounting layout" repre-

sentation type. Both creating and inserting with this representation

type is only possible in a layout space.

• The 3D macros can be assigned to the parts in parts management. As

a result, the part is displayed in detail and very realistically. If there is

no graphic macro for the part, the graphic is implemented as a cuboid

by entering the height, width, and depth.

• If a 3D macro is assigned to an enclosure, then the graphic of the en-

closure is not generated automatically during placement; in this case

the content of the graphic macro defines the graphic.

Importing a 3D graphic

You can import 3D graphic data from external CAD systems to create

your own items and 3D macros. The graphic data must be provided in

the common international STEP format (STandard for the Exchange of

Product Model Data).

To do this, open the project into which the data is to be imported and

select Layout space > Import 3D graphic. In the selection dialog that opens, switch to the directory containing the STEP files (*.stp, *.step,

*.ste). Select the required STEP file and click [Open].

The 3D graphic data is then imported into a new layout space. The name

of the STEP file is used as the layout space description.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 371

After being imported, the graphic data can be edited (Rotate around

axis and Unite functions) and assigned functional logic. The imported

data can then be used as enclosure items, devices, or 3D macros.

Uniting objects in the layout space

An imported 3D graphic or an open 3D macro (thus a layout space in a

macro project) may contain multiple individual bodies. The Unite function

is provided to allow you to unite all the components of the layout space

such that, when it is used, a 3D macro is handled in the same way as a

single item.

To unite individual 3D objects in an open layout space, select the Edit >

Graphic > Unite menu option. Use the mouse to drag the frame around

the desired objects. All the objects within this frame are selected. Move

the cursor over the selected objects and click the snap point intended to

represent the insertion point of the united item.

The selected insertion point is stored in a new object. If you generate a

3D macro from this object and subsequently insert this macro, then this

is the point to which the cursor is moved during insertion.

Note:

United components can only be undone immediately after the action.

United items cannot be separated again later (e.g. after insertion as a

macro).

Managing 3D macros in the macro project

You should create a separate layout space for every macro in order to

manage 3D macros in a macro project. No macro boxes are used for

this. You should therefore define the data for a macro to be generated

using the following layout space properties:

• Macro: Name <11018>: Enter the file name and file type (*.ema or

*.ems) of the macro.


372 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• Macro: Description <11019>: The text entered here becomes the

description text of the generated macro and is displayed in a com-

ments field when the macro is inserted.

• Macro: Version <11025>: This property is used for version control of

your macros.

• Macro source / reference <11026>: Here you should enter the

source from which the macro originates.

• Macro: Variant <36019>: Use the drop-down list to define the variant

for the macro to be generated.

These properties are available for a layout space in the "Macro" Cate-

gory in the Properties table. If the properties are not displayed, you will

have to select them first from property selection.

When 3D macros are generated automatically from the macro project,

this data is used to generate a macro from every selected layout space.

If you would like to view each 3D macro on a page to improve the organi-

zation and clarity of your macro projects, you can place a model view on

the required page. Popup menu > Open 3D view allows you to jump

from the view into the respective layout space.

Creating 3D macros

3D macros are always created with the "3D mounting layout" represen-

tation type. You have the following options for creating 3D macros:

• Manually by saving selected objects

To save specific objects in a layout space as a macro, use the Edit >

Create window macro and Edit > Create symbol macro menu

options as you would normally do in the EPLAN platform.

If the selected objects are imported 3D graphics from STEP files, it

may be necessary to prepare these graphics further (unite, create

device logic, etc.) before you can save them as 3D macros.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 373

• Automatically from a macro project

Select Utilities > Generate macros > Automatically from macro

project. A 3D macro is generated from the layout spaces of a macro

project, according to the selection you made.

• Automatically from imported STEP files

Utilities > Generate macros now contains a new From 3D files

menu option for this purpose. 3D window macros (STEP) are gener-ated directly from individual or multiple *.ema files.

Inserting 3D macros

The 3D macros are inserted using the Insert > Window macro and

Insert > Symbol macro menu options as you would normally do in the

EPLAN platform. You can only place these macros in an open layout

space with the "3D mounting layout" representation type.

When you insert a 3D macro, the currently selected handle is identified

as a snap point by a red square. Press [A] to change the handle.

Move the 3D macro towards a mounting panel or another object. As

when you place devices, the mounting surface or mounting rail beneath

the cursor is automatically activated. 3D snap points are also displayed.

Click at the required position to place the 3D macro.

Changing the rotation angle when inserting 3D macros

When you insert a 3D macro, you can rotate the angle of the macro in

90° increments at the handle. Up to 40 different mounting positions can

be implemented with a single 3D macro by changing the handles. These

options also apply to devices whose parts have been assigned a 3D

macro.

To change the angle during insertion, press the [Ctrl] + [Shift] + [R] key-

board shortcut. The position of the 3D macro is rotated by 90° counter-

clockwise. Every time this keyboard shortcut is used, the macro is

rotated by a further 90°.


374 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Tip:

You can also use the Options > Change rotation angle menu option

or the (Change rotation angle) button from the Pro Panel options

toolbar to change the angle.

Editing the Device Logic

3D objects that are to be used as mechanical or electromechanical de-

vices in the 3D mounting layout must have a range of properties that

allow them to be used in the mounting layout:

• The objects can be placed in the layout space and on other objects.

• Other objects can be placed on the 3D objects.

• The placed objects fit in with the logical structure of the items.

All these properties in their entirety are known as the device logic. There

are various functions for creating and editing the device logic (see

section "Defining the device logic" on page 375).

Interactive points, lines, and areas in the device logic

The functions for defining the device logic work with interactive points,

lines, and areas. If necessary you can attach additional user-defined

points to 3D objects that were imported as STEP files. These interactive

points allow you to modify the placing options for components or influ-

ence the levels of freedom associated with rotation and alignment of the

components with respect to one another.

Interactive points always consist of two corresponding parts:

• Handles:

Interactive points of this type look for associated mounting points.

They define points or areas which can only be moved and placed on

the corresponding mounting points.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 375

• Mounting points:

These interactive points only allow the associated handle to be

snapped onto them, to be moved, and to be placed. Mounting points

may be points, lines, or areas.

You can display defined interactive points when you are editing 3D ma-

cros in a macro project. There the points are identified with the following

colors:

Interactive points Display

Handle (user-defined) Orange cuboid

Handle (default) Red cuboid

Mounting point (user-defined) Green cuboid

Mounting point (default) Blue cuboid You can define mounting points when you edit the device logic. This in-

volves defining points, lines, or areas on 3D objects as mounting points.

These are the objects on which other components can be placed.

Mounting points can have a direction and a rotation, which means that

placement of the 3D objects can be controlled using a set of rules:

• The direction determines the direction in which the object to be placed

on the mounting point should be aligned.

• The rotation also allows the object to be placed to be moved around

the selected direction axis.

Defining the device logic

Once you have imported a logic-free 3D graphic, you may want to edit it

further. This is when you use the various functions for editing the device

logic.

To ensure correct placement it is necessary as a minimum to define a

placement area; the other logic functions are optional.


376 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

The Edit > Device logic menu path offers the following options for

defining the device logic.

• Mounting surface

Defines individual areas of bodies imported as 3D data as mounting

surfaces. These are areas on the item on which other components

can be placed.

When you click the required area, this area is defined as a mounting

surface. A mounting surface entry is generated beneath the object

concerned (e.g., logic item) in the layout space navigator. You can

continue to select areas as mounting surfaces until you press [Esc] to

cancel the action. You can delete mounting surfaces in the navigator

using Popup menu > Delete.

• Handle

Defines a handle for placing a 3D macro. There is always only one

handle in the macro.

Click the required point. The handle is identified by an orange cuboid.

To change the position of the handle, simply insert it again.

• Define mounting point

Defines points, lines, or areas on 3D objects as mounting points.

Other components may be placed on these interactive points.

To do this, click a highlighted point / edge / area on the 3D object. For

mounting points of the type "Point" and "Line", then select the direc-

tion in which you would prefer the mounting point to act by moving a

blue direction arrow in the required direction.

Click again to open the Properties: Mounting point dialog. Here

you can enter the Name and Description and set the Direction and

Rotation for mounting points of the type "Point" and "Line". Once you

have selected a mounting point, you can remove it using Edit >

Delete, for example.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 377

• Placement area > Define

Defines an area in the 3D object that is used to place the object cor-

rectly on other 3D objects. The position of the placement area also

determines the mounting depth to which the 3D object is positioned

on a mounting surface. Nine handles are then automatically gener-

ated on the placement surface. You can use these for positioning.

When you have found the required area, simply click it. Any area that

projects beyond the limits of the selected area will appear transparent.

Handles are generated at the corners and centers of the outer edges.

Example:

The illustration shows a 3D macro with a placement area beneath the

base plate. The handles are at the corners and centers of the edges.

• Placement area > Turn around / Move / Rotate

You can use these menu options to further correct the position of

the placement area. If the placement area is incorrectly aligned, for

example, you can turn it around using Turn around. To move or

rotate the placement area, enter the relevant values directly in the

input box.


378 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Model Views for the 3D Mounting Layout

The model views allow you to place standardized, three-dimensional

displays of a layout space or important components thereof on a project

page. Model views are used to create documentation and production

documents. Additional information for the 3D mounting layout can be

drawn on the model views using standard functions such as dimension-

ing, texts, graphics, etc.

A model view can be inserted in any page type. Multiple model views are

also possible on each page. Updating allows the content of the model

views to be adapted to modifications in the layout space (see page 380).

Example:

The illustration below shows the model view of a mounting panel that

was placed on the title page of a project.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 379

So that you do not have to reset the model views in every new project,

you have the option of saving the items to be displayed in a selection

scheme. In this way you can use a scheme to specify that all mounting

panels should always be displayed in the model views, for example. The

item labeling in a model view can also be summarized using a scheme.

Inserting a model view

To place a model view on an open project page, select the Insert >

Graphic > Model view (Pro Panel) menu option. Then place the corners

of the model view by outlining an area. The Model view dialog opens.

Create the data specific to the model view on the View tab of this dialog.

For example, enter a unique name for the model view in the View name

field. You cannot have multiple views with the same name. A model view

can always be created for only one layout space. Select the layout space

for which you want to create the model view from the Layout space

drop-down list.

Define what is to be displayed in the model view in the Basic items field.

You can also further restrict the content of the layout space that is dis-

played. Click [...] to open the 3D object selection dialog and select the

objects to be displayed in the model view.

Determine how the model view is to be displayed from the Style drop-

down list. The following styles are available for selection:

• Wire frame model: The selected items are displayed in the model

view without calculation of the hidden lines. It is thus possible to view

even the hidden items in the enclosure.

• Hidden lines: The selected items are displayed in the model view

after calculation of the hidden lines.

• Shading: With this style, a bitmap of the required items is generated

in the set view.


380 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

You can also use other settings (Selection scheme, Viewpoint, etc.) to

determine what and how it can be seen in the model view. Click [OK] to

confirm the settings you made on this and other tabs (Display, Rectan-

gle, Format). The model view is then generated.

Updating the model view

If the content of the layout space referenced by the model view is

changed, the Model view not up to date message appears over the top

of the model view when the page is opened. The model view must be

updated to match the contents of the layout space and model view.

To do this, select Utilities > Reports > Model view. A tree view of all

the model views that exist in the project is displayed on the left-hand side

of the Model views - <Project name> dialog that opens. Your selection

from the tree will determine whether all the model views in the project, all

the model views in a specific layout space, or only specific model views

are updated. Click [Update] to run the update. The display in the se-

lected model views is matched to the current status in the layout space.

Tip:

You can also update a model view by selecting the associated page in

the page navigator and selecting Utilities > Reports > Update. This

menu option will update the pages selected in the page navigator that

have model views and / or reports. Similarly Utilities > Reports >

Generate project reports will update all the model views and reports

for a project.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 381

Modifying the contents of the model view

Two other functions allow you to modify the position of the graphic of a

model view in the graphical editor. The Move contents function, which is

available in the popup menu for an inserted model view, allows you to

move the graphic of the model view to a new position.

If you want the graphic to be displayed in the center of the model view

once more, then mark it in the graphical editor and select Popup menu >

Center contents.

A graphic that is no longer centered may occur because the display in

the model view was changed by changing the frame size or using the

Update function.

Outline Editor for Extrusions

The "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on provides another editor that you can use

to draw and edit geometrical outlines or contour lines for bodies. The

"outline editor for extrusions" is used to manage 2D outlines that can

later be used to model a 3D object by extrusion. The outline drawings

created for customized mounting rails etc., can include multiple outlines

that do not intersect.

The outline editor is opened via Utilities > Master data > Outline

(extrusion), in the same way as plot frames and forms. The functions

and submenu options (New, Open, Close, and Copy) of the outline

editor are also the same as those of the plot frame and form editors.

The outlines are managed in a special directory. A new Outlines field

has been added to the Settings: Directories dialog (under Options >

Settings > User > Management > Directories). Here you can define

the default directory for storing the outlines in EPLAN.


382 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Creating outlines

To create a new outline for extrusions, select Utilities > Master data >

Outline (extrusion) > New. In the Create outline dialog that opens,

define the file name and directory for the new outline. The "outline extrusion" outline type is saved with the file extension *.fc2.

Click [Save] and the Outline properties - <Outline name> dialog

opens. In this dialog you specify the most important properties of an

outline. Click [OK]. The new outline is saved according to your input and

is displayed in the outline editor. The origin of the coordinate system is

highlighted by a red circle. This can be moved.

In the page navigator tree view, an open outline is identified by the

icon.

The properties of an open outline can be edited retrospectively by select-

ing the outline in the page navigator and selecting Popup menu >

Properties.

Editing outlines

When you create a new outline, the first editing step is to draw the 2D

geometry.

To do this, select from the graphical elements listed under Insert >

Graphic and the editing functions listed under the Edit menu option.

The following conditions apply:

• Draw on a 1:1 scale.

• Use the line, polyline, rectangle, circle, and arc graphical elements.

• Make sure that the elements making up the outline are closed at all

the transition points.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 383

Opening outlines

It is also possible to apply the editing steps listed above to existing

outlines. To open an outline, select Utilities > Master data > Outline

(extrusion) > Open.

The master data for the "EPLAN Pro Panel" add-on includes a number of

outlines of the "outline extrusion" type. You can use this master data as

templates for your own outlines.

To be able to use a finished outline in the 3D mounting layout, save

it with a suitable part in the parts management dialog (e.g., from the

"Mounting rail" product subgroup). This is done in the Macro field on the

Technical data tab.

Importing and cleaning up outlines

The outline editor for extrusions also allows you to import outlines that

were created with other programs. The DXF and DWG file formats are

supported.

Before importing, first create a new, empty outline with the required

outline properties. Then import using Insert > Graphic > DXF / DWG.

Select a DXF / DWG file and make any settings needed for the import in

the next dialogs, then use the mouse to position the graphic on the

current outline.

After importing, you will have to "clean up" the outline manually. This

action removes all unwanted elements from the outline. These include

ellipses, splines, and 3D elements. Blocks are automatically broken up.

To do this, select Utilities > Clean up. Elements reported as "unaccept-

able" are removed and the blocks are broken up. Finally, confirm the

prompt in the Clean up dialog by clicking [OK].


384 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Checking outlines

The Utilities menu contains the Check outline option for checking an

outline at any time during editing. This carries out the following geometry

checks:

• Use of illegal elements

• Existence of at least one closed outline

• All existing outlines are closed and do not contain any duplicate

elements

• No nested inner outlines.

When the outline check is complete, a message appears to tell you

whether the check was successful or not. When you have finished edit-

ing an outline, the outline check is carried out automatically when you

close the dialog. If the outline check is unsuccessful, you cannot use the

associated outline for extrusions in the 3D mounting layout. If this is the

case, you should correct the outline.

Device Structure for Mechanical Devices

The project structure of the EPLAN platform has been extended to allow

you to define your own identification structure for the mechanical devices

in your projects.

Benefit: You can assign a separate identification structure for

mechanical devices. To do this, use the new Mechanical devices drop-down list on the

Structure tab in the Project properties dialog. This drop-down list

shows all user-defined and pre-defined identifier schemes for mechanical

devices. Click [...] to open the Device structure dialog, where you can

create, edit, and manage schemes.

If there is a change of standard, the Structure tab now also has a

Mechanical devices drop-down list.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 385

Online Numbering for Mechanical Devices

The mechanical devices are included in the online numbering, just like

other devices. When you insert mechanical devices into a project,

EPLAN can number them automatically and assign a suitable device tag.

The numbering formats for online numbering have been extended ac-

cordingly to allow unique identification / numbering of the mechanical

devices.

To this end, the Numbering formats dialog now contains a new

General mechanical devices field on the DT tab. There is already a

default DT format in this field. If the check box beside the field is dese-

lected, the mechanical devices are not automatically numbered on

insertion.

You can also specify for mechanical devices that the preceding sign

should be automatically set in the visible DT on insertion. A new General

mechanical devices check box has been added to the Set preceding

sign group box in the Settings: DT dialog for this purpose. If this check

box is selected (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name"

> Devices > DT), the displayed DT will be displayed with the preceding

sign for mechanical devices, e.g., -U1.

The identifiers stored in the master data are used for online numbering

– in relation to the current identifier set (see section "Master Data:

Identifiers" on page 437).

Special Topics EPLAN PPE

386 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


Compressing and Reorganizing Projects

The EPLAN platform functionality is now used for compressing and reor-

ganizing EPLAN PPE projects.

For this purpose, the Clean up project menu item in the PPE submenu

has been removed and replaced by the EPLAN platform compression

function. A possible menu path here is: Project > Organize > Com-

press.

The [Compress project] button that you used to reorganize your

EPLAN PPE projects in the past has also been removed. If you want to

reorganize a PPE project in the new version, one way to do so is by

selecting Project > Organize > Reorganize.

Redesigned Import of Loops and Consumers

In EPLAN PPE, the functionality for the import of loops and consumers

has been extensively enhanced, and the import user interface has been

adjusted to suit the EPLAN platform. You can now import PCT loop

functions, hook-ups, and references to macros into your PPE project

from an external data source.

Benefit: The redesign makes importing from other data sources easier

and more intuitive. The import of large amounts of project

data (e.g. from the preplanning stage) to other engineering

systems allows for seamless transition to EPLAN PPE.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 387

The import function has been made more user-friendly as a whole. This

function can be accessed via Project > PPE > Import > Loops or

Consumers.

Type of data source:

After you have selected the type of data source in this field, it is no

longer necessary to set up an ODBC source (e.g. for frequently used

applications, such as Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel) using the

ODBC administrator. The option to select an ODBC data source is still

available for the "ODBC" type.


388 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Data source:

For the Data source field, click [...] and select the data source in the

dialog that opens. The dialog that opens depends on the data source

type selected.

To output the column names from a data table (e.g. Excel table) to the

External field column of the assignment table, select the Column

names in the header row check box. This check box is not available for

all types of data source.

When you have selected the data source, the data source table fields are

read in and displayed in the External field column.

Scheme:

All import settings (field assignments and object assignments) can now

be saved in a scheme in the usual way in EPLAN.

Assignment tab

On this tab, the external fields and the EPLAN properties are assigned to

each other.

To assign a property, click in the EPLAN property column and then on

[...], and select a property from the dialog that opens.

Define which are identifying properties during assignment by selecting

the relevant check box in the Identifying column. Filters are now defined

on the Assignment tab via the Filter column. If only one value is

entered here, it is filtered for uniformity. You could also enter "> 100".

Tip:

If the external field designations and the EPLAN property designations

are identical, field assignment can be carried out automatically using the

[Automatic assignment] button.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 389

Assignment tab

On this tab, you can specify other import settings.

At the time of the previous import, the Order and PI code drop-down

lists and the Override errors, Overwrite, Test import, and No new

loops / consumers check boxes were part of the Import settings dialog

that followed.

Including Parts from EPLAN PPE for Bills of Materials

Parts that have been scheduled via specifications / hook-ups in EPLAN

PPE can now be included in the EPLAN platform "Parts list" and

"Summarized parts list" reports as well as in the bill of materials export.

Benefit: This allows you to create a complete bill of materials for a

project. Parts from the preliminary and basic planning stages

can be added to the bill of materials in EPLAN PPE, giving

you an overview of the required items and project

components even in the early stages of a project. This allows

you to monitor components with longer delivery times or

technically demanding specifications, and continuously

manage all project data throughout the term of the project.

For this purpose, the two EPLAN platform settings dialogs Settings:

Parts and Settings: Labeling were extended in the Include parts group

box by the Specifications (EPLAN PPE) and Hook-ups (EPLAN PPE)

check boxes. When these check boxes are selected, the parts from

EPLAN PPE are attached to the lists to be output. For these parts, the

device tags are empty.

If the check boxes are deselected, the part from EPLAN PPE is not

included.


390 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Note:

Objects whose parts have already been included using engineering in

the EPLAN platform are ignored in EPLAN PPE to prevent parts from

being output more than once.

New Identifier for Measurands without Supplementary Letters

EPLAN PPE projects now have the new identifier "m". This identifier

stands for the measurand of the PCT loop without supplementary letters.

This is used to display and report the measurand without supplementary

letters for the power station identifier system (KKS).

Labeling and Scripts for EPLAN PPE P&ID

The two utilities Labeling and Scripts are now available with the rele-

vant functions for EPLAN PPE P&ID.

Benefit: Using the Labeling utility, you can now export item data for

labeling based on the plant overviews created with the

EPLAN PPE P&ID add-on and transfer information easily and

quickly to downstream engineering processes. You can auto-

mate recurrent tasks by creating scripts. Time-consuming,

manual work processes are avoided.

Special Topics EPLAN View

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 391

Special Topics EPLAN View

User Settings for Multi-user Operation

The settings for User code / address are now also available in EPLAN

View. This dialog, which is accessed via Options > Settings > User >

Display > User code / address, is used to save user data for multi-user

operation.

Benefit: If an EPLAN View user has opened a project and this results

in a conflict in multi-user operation, the other users in the net

will now immediately see who has locked the project.

Note:

As rights management is not used in EPLAN View, the Logon name

field in the Settings: User code / address dialog remains empty.

New Features in the "API Extension" Add-on

392 EPLAN NEWS 2.0


Note:

The "API Extension" add-on is available as an option for EPLAN Electric

P8 Professional, for EPLAN Fluid, and for EPLAN PPE.

A unified, and especially high-performance, programming interface (API,

Application Programming Interface) is available for EPLAN platform

products. This add-on – the EPLAN API – allows you to develop your

own customized solutions in collaboration with EPLAN or other partners.

The sections below describe the new features in the EPLAN API:

• Direct access to parts management data

• Access to function templates (see page 394)

• All revision control functions are available (see page 395)

• Other new features in the EPLAN API (see page 396).

Direct Access to Parts Management Data

The latest version of the EPLAN API provides direct access to EPLAN

parts management data. For this purpose, the EPLAN API has been

extensively enhanced.

Benefit: Direct access to parts management data in the EPLAN API

allows for communication with external ERP systems. Parts

can be created, edited, or deleted in the ERP system and

synchronized with a central EPLAN parts database to which

all users have access. This allows you to seamlessly inte-

grate EPLAN into your individual system landscape and open

up all potentials for efficiency improvements throughout the

engineering process.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 393

Depending on the add-on, there is a new API DLL (Eplan.EplApi.MasterData.dll) and a new namespace with the

same designation. Numerous new classes have been created in this namespace that usually start with MD (for MasterData). The new

classes enable use of the following and other functions:

• Generate new database

To generate a new database for parts management, use the CreateDatabase method from the MDPartsManagement class.

• Read all parts from the parts database All parts that are in a parts database can be read using the Parts

property from the MDPartsDatabase class. The part is then sorted by

its part number.

In the EPLAN API, each part variant displays its own object. For

example, if a part occurs in three variants, then it will have three objects of the class MDPart in the EPLAN API.

• Read filtered parts from the parts database To read filtered parts use the GetsParts(filter) method in the

MDPartsDatabase class. This filtering option corresponds to the field-

based filter in parts management.

• Define any part property The Properties property from the MDPart class is used to define

parts management properties. There is a common properties list MDPartsDatabaseItemPropertyList for the different data from

parts management (part, construction, connection points, customer or

manufacturer / supplier).

• Create and remove parts The AddPart and RemovePart methods in the MDPartsDatabase

class are available to you for this purpose. Analog methods (AddCustomer, RemoveCustomer, etc.) are available to create and

remove customers, manufacturers / suppliers, etc.


394 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• Copy and paste parts The Duplicate method from the MDPart class is used to copy parts.

There is the option to create a new part as a variant or as a new part

with its own part number.

• Querying selected parts The SelectedPartDatabaseItems property from the

MDPartsManagement class can be used to determine the part that a

user has selected in parts management or in the part master data

navigator.

Note:

An object from the MDPart class stands for a part from the parts data-

base. An EPLAN API object from this class is not related in any way to parts stored in the project (API object: Article). Only the property

names are for common use. The enhanced functionality means that the following data can now be

processed in the EPLAN CPM program variant via the EPLAN API:

• Function templates

• Data on customers and manufacturers

• Construction and connection point data.

Access to Function Templates

The new version of the EPLAN API now allows you to access function

templates.

Benefit: If you create a device using the EPLAN API, you can now

also place auxiliary functions or edit them as unplaced

functions.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 395

The PlaceAt method from the Function class can be used to place

function templates and functions on schematic pages in a particular representation type. The new FunctionTemplates property from the

same class allows you to query the function templates of a main function.

The PlaceAsConnectionDefinitionPoint method from the

Connection class now allows you to place function templates for

connections as a connection definition point in the schematic.

All Revision Control Functions are Available

In the new version, all revision control functions can now be accessed

via the EPLAN API.

Benefit: You can now control the entire revision process using the

EPLAN API. You are using the enormous rationalization

potential of the EPLAN API by standardizing and consistently

automating your engineering processes.

For this purpose, the following methods have been added to the Revision class:

• CompletePages: Saves the revision modifications of the selected

pages in the current revision project.

• CompleteProject: Saves the revision modifications in a project.

• CreateRevision: Generates a new revision of the source project.

• GetUncompletedPages: Provides a list of unchanged and

uncompleted pages in the current revision project.

• RemoveWriteProtection: Removes the write protection from a

revision project.


396 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Other New Features in the EPLAN API

New methods for placeholder objects

It is no longer the case that only a graphical character is used for place-

holder objects; now an appropriate symbol is also used (see section

"Properties dialog and new symbol for placeholder objects" on page 240). Because of this new feature, the new SymbolVariant property has

been added to the Eplan.EplApi.DataModel.Graphics.PlaceHolder

object which means that the symbol can be changed.

Transferring objects to an action

Using the two new GetContextParameter and SetContextParameter

methods from the ActionCallingContext class, you can now transfer

any object to an action.

Opening part selection

The new ShowPartSelectionDialog method can now be found in the

EplApplication class. This method is used to open the Part selection

dialog. To preselect a part, the part number (parameter: strPartNr) and

the variant number (parameter: strVariant) are transferred.

Creating a progress bar for your own offline program

Users of the EPLAN API can now create a progress bar for their own offline programs. A new IEplProgress interface is available for this

purpose.

Launching the API offline program

There is a new launch dll in the EPLAN API that is used to search for

and load all EPLAN API DLLs. The EPLAN version must be specified before calling the Eplan.EplApi.Starter.dll. All API dlls from the

BIN directory are then loaded using the AssemblyResolver class.

Converting components into graphic

The new Group SymbolReference.ConvertToGroup method allows

you to convert components into objects in the EPLAN API.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 397

Adding user-defined property arrangements

The EPLAN API allows you to save or add user-specific property ar-rangements for symbols under a specific name. The new Add method

has been added to the SymbolReference::PropertyPlacementsSchemasConfiguration

class for this purpose.

Switching project options to transparent

In the EPLAN API, you can now set deactivated project options to transparent. The new IsTransparent property has been added to the

Option class for this purpose.

Moving elements into the foreground / background

The new BringToFront and SendToBack methods are now available in

the Placement class of the EPLAN API. These are used to move placed

elements into the foreground / background.

Developing new interactions using the EPLAN API

You can now use the EPLAN API to develop your own graphical

interactions for the graphical editor. These interactions can be used to draw new graphical elements. For this purpose, the new Interaction

class has been added to the Eplan.EplApi.EServices.Ged

namespace.

Specifically locking individual objects

You can now use the EPLAN API not only to lock objects for the entire

project, but also to lock individual objects for multi-user operation. The

following methods are available for this:

• LockDevice: This method from the Function class locks all objects

associated with a device.

• LockObject: This method from the StorableObjekt class locks the

current object.


398 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• SmartLock: This method from the StorableObjekt class (and

classes derived from it) locks the current object and the associated

objects (for a placed object the entire page may be locked, for

example).

Deleting all message management messages

The new Clear method in the PrjMessagesCollection class allows

you to delete all message management messages.

Updating parts database

The new UpgradePartsDb method in the PartsService class can now

be used to update parts databases of an older EPLAN version to the

latest version using the EPLAN API.

Note:

If you work with several EPLAN versions then we recommend using the

latest EPLAN version when editing and managing the parts database. Determining window macro variants

The EPLAN API now allows you to determine all variants of a specific representation type for a window macro. The new GetVariants method

in the WindowMacro class is available for this.

Enabling / disabling actions

The new IEplActionEnable interface is used to enable or disable

actions. If this interface is not used, then the relevant action is enabled

by default. If you implement this interface for an action class, you can

then disable the respective action. If you implement the action for a

menu item or a symbol button, this interface element will accordingly be

disabled (and grayed out).

Retrieving information on project-specific settings

The ProjectSettingNode class in the EPLAN API can now be used to

retrieve information on project setting nodes.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 399

Retrieving a trade function definition

The MainGroup property has been added to the FunctionDefinition

class in the EPLAN API. This property allows you to retrieve the name of

the trade (e.g. Electrical engineering) in which a function definition has

been classified.

Retrieving window macro insertion points

The new Location property in the WindowMacro class allows you to

retrieve the position of the window macro insertion point.

Tracking potentials and signals

The new TrackPotential method can now be found in the

ConnectionService class. This method allows you to use the

EPLAN API to determine all connections that belong to the same potential. Accordingly, you can use the new TrackSignal method to

determine all connections that transmit the same signal.

Name of menu item as multilingual string

The AddMenuItem method in the EPLAN API Menu class has been

enhanced. This allows you to add the name of a menu item as a

multilingual string. The menu item will then be displayed in the specified

dialog language.

Deleting all pages in a project

The new RemoveAllPages method in the Project class allows you to

delete all pages in a project in one go.

Retrieving all page macro placeholder objects

You can now use the PlaceHolders property in the PageMacro class to

retrieve all page macro placeholder objects.


400 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Multilingual project properties

The type of the PROJ_TYPE (Project: Type <10031>),

PROJ_PARTFEATURES (Part features <10033>) and PROJ_REGULATION

(Regulation <10036>) project properties has been changed. These

properties can now be created as multilingual character strings.

Retrieving file names when exporting image files

There is now the option in the EPLAN API to retrieve the names of the

created files when exporting the entire project or individual pages in image file format. Two new methods GraphicProjectEx and

GraphicPageEx in the Export class are provided for this.

Retrieving filtered project data

In the EPLAN API DMObjectsFinder class, there are now several new

methods (Get<ProjectData>WithFilterScheme) available for the

retrieval of filtered project data. These methods, such as GetFunctionsWithFilterScheme, return the filtered objects that are

left over when using a filter scheme for the respective navigator (device

navigator for the method described above).

Exporting filtered bill of materials

The new ExportPartsListWithFilterScheme method in the

PartsService class allows you to export all filtered project parts data for

the bill of materials navigator.

New Features in the Master Data

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 401


Enhanced Information in the Master Data Editor

For the new version, the information displayed when editing master data

has been enhanced and the structure improved.

When you create, open, or copy a master data type (symbol library, plot

frame, outline, or form), the following properties for a selected file are

listed in the info area in the right-hand side of the dialog:

• for symbol libraries:

Symbol library description, creation date, created by, company code,

last editor, modification date, number of symbols.

• for plot frames:

Description, company code, created by, creation date, last editor,

modification date.

• for outlines:

Description, outline type, company code, created by, creation date,

last editor, modification date.

• for forms:

Description, company code, created by, creation date, last editor,

modification date, form handling.

The designation of the property is shown first and this is then separated from the value by a colon (e.g. Created by: ROE). If the text for a prop-

erty is too long, an automatic line break is inserted in the info area.


402 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Example:

In the Open form dialog, you have selected the F01_001.f01 form for

the "Parts list" form type. The text that appears in the info area looks like this Description: Parts list ..., Created by: mka, Creation

date: 25.10.2001, etc.

Master Data: Symbols

Note:

The following pages show numerous illustrations of new symbols from

different symbol libraries. The illustrations show variant "A" of the respec-

tive symbols in multi-line representation (except the symbols from the SPECIAL symbol library).

The name and number of the symbol are shown underneath the symbol. IEC, GOST, and GB standards

• The following new symbols have been added to the IEC_symbol,

IEC_single_symbol, GOST_symbol, GOST_single_symbol,

GB_symbol, and GB_single_symbol symbol libraries

(the respective symbols are shown in multi-line representation):

PLC_S_CBOX

// 330

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT // 331

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG // 332

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG // 333


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 403

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG_1

// 334

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG_1

// 335

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG_M

// 336

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG_FEM

// 337

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG_M // 338

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG_FEM // 339

QL3_7

// 1198

K_3

// 1251

K_4 // 1252 KS3 // 1253 KS4 // 1254 KST3 // 1255

KST4 // 1256 S_EL // 1261 O_EL // 1262 XU2 // 1265

XU2S // 1266 F_SNH_1P // 1281 F_SNH_3P // 1282 F_AB_1P // 1284

QLIM11_1 // 1286 QL3_8 // 1290 W3_SWR_2 // 1291 W3_SWL_2 // 1292


404 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

W3_SWB_2 // 1293 W3_VES_2 // 1294 W3_NES_2 // 1295 W2_OU_1 // 1328

BW3P // 1372 BW3SW // 1373 BW3D // 1374 X1_NB // 1410

X1_B // 1411 X2_NB // 1413 X2_B // 1414 X2_B_2 // 1415

X3_NB // 1417 X3_B // 1418 X3_B_2 // 1419 X4_NB // 1421

X4_B // 1422 X4_NB_1 // 1424 X4_B_1 // 1425 X4_B_2 // 1426

X6_NB // 1428 X6_B // 1429 X6_NB_1 // 1430 X6_B_1 // 1431


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 405

X6_B_2 // 1432 X8_NB // 1434 X8_B // 1435 X8_NB_1 // 1436

X8_B_1 // 1437 X8_B_2 // 1438 SSNS1_ST // 1440 SONS1_ST // 1441

SLS_ST // 1442 SLSAC_ST // 1443 SLSDC_ST // 1444 SLEDC_ST // 1445

SLEAC_ST // 1446 SSUS_ST // 1447 SOUS_ST // 1448

NFPA standard

• The following new symbols have been added to the NFPA_symbol and

NFPA_single_symbol symbol libraries (the respective symbols are

shown in multi-line representation):

PLC_S_CBOX

// 330

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT // 331

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG // 332

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG // 333


406 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG_1

// 334

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG_1

// 335

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG_M

// 336

PLC_S_CBOX

_LEFT_PLUG_FEM

// 337

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG_M // 338

PLC_S_CBOX

_PLUG_FEM // 339

QL3_7

// 1198

K_3

// 1251

K_4 // 1252 KS3 // 1253 KS4 // 1254 KST3 // 1255

KST4 // 1256 S_EL // 1261 O_EL // 1262 XU2 // 1265

XU2S // 1266 F_SNH_1P // 1281 F_SNH_3P // 1282 F_AB_1P // 1284


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 407

QLIM11_1 // 1286 QL3_8 // 1290 W3_SWR_2 // 1291 W3_SWL_2 // 1292

W3_SWB_2 // 1293 W3_VES_2 // 1294 W3_NES_2 // 1295 W2_OU_1 // 1328

BW3P // 1372 BW3SW // 1373 BW3D // 1374 X1_NB // 1410

X1_B // 1411 X2_NB // 1413 X2_B // 1414 X2_B_2 // 1415

X3_NB // 1417 X3_B // 1418 X3_B_2 // 1419 X4_NB // 1421

X4_B // 1422 X4_NB_1 // 1424 X4_B_1 // 1425 X4_B_2 // 1426


408 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

X6_NB // 1428 X6_B // 1429 X6_NB_1 // 1430 X6_B_1 // 1431

X6_B_2 // 1432 X8_NB // 1434 X8_B // 1435 X8_NB_1 // 1436

X8_B_1 // 1437 X8_B_2 // 1438 SSNS1_ST // 1440 SONS1_ST // 1441

SLS_ST // 1442 SLSAC_ST // 1443 SLSDC_ST // 1444 SLEDC_ST // 1445

SLEAC_ST // 1446 SSUS_ST // 1447 SOUS_ST // 1448


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 409

Fluid power and process engineering

• A new symbol library for the "Lubrication" trade has been created: LUB1ESS.

F15.5_14 // 238 F15.3.1 // 254 F15.3.1_01 // 255 AG10.1.1_03 // 307

AG10.1.1_02 // 308 AG10.5_02 // 326 V_BT_058 // 845 V_BT_059 // 846

V_BT_060 // 847 V_BT_061 // 848 AG10.1.2_04 // 856 V_BT_057 // 857

V_BT_053 // 861 V_BT_054 // 862 V_BT_055 // 863 V_S_011 // 871

V_S_012 // 872 V_S_013 // 873 V_S_014 // 874 Z_ZUB_16 // 1060


410 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Z_ZUB_15 // 1061 V_ZUB_03 // 1063 V11.3.1_01 // 1068 PM13.3.4_01 // 1069

F15.5_31 // 1070 GS_EA_06 // 1071 V_BT_077 // 1077 V_BT_078 // 1078

Z14.1.2_17 // 1079 Z_ZUB_31 // 1080 VERB_11 // 1101 VERB_12 // 1102

VERB_13 // 1103 VERB_14 // 1104 VERB_15 // 1105 CON_04 // 1106

VERB_16 // 1107 V11.1.2_15 // 1108 V11.5.3_09 // 1109 ANZ_12 // 1110

ANZ_12_01 // 1111 ANZ_12_02 // 1112 ANZ_12_03 // 1113 ANZ_12_04 // 1114


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 411

GSEA_8.7.14

// 1115

RV_01

// 1117

AG10.5_03

// 1118

ANZ_ZUB_03

// 1120

ANZ_ZUB_04

// 1121

F15.5_26

// 1122

F15.5_27

// 1123

V11.5.2.14_02

// 1124

ANZ_ZUB_09

// 1126

ANZ_ZUB_16

// 1135

STG_01

// 1137

STG_02

// 1138

STG_03 // 1139 STG_04 // 1140 V_RV_09 // 1143 V_RV_10 // 1144

F_13 // 1149 ST_01 // 1152 PM_17 // 1153 GS_SCH_01 // 1154


412 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

GS_SCH_02 // 1155 PM_ZUB_14 // 1157 PM_ZUB_16 // 1158 PM_ZUB_17 // 1159

SCHG_1 // 1162 SCHG_2 // 1163 SCHG_3 // 1164 SS_03 // 1165

SS_04 // 1166 SS_05 // 1167 BS_01 // 1168 PM_ZUB_15 // 1170

SI_01 // 1171 SI_02 // 1172 SI_03 // 1173 SI_04 // 1174

DS_04 // 1177 P_04 // 1180 SV_06 // 1182 SV_01 // 1183


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 413

SV_05 // 1184 SV_07 // 1185 V11.5.3_08 // 1186 GS_MIX_01 // 1187

GS_MIX_02 // 1188 GS6.1.7_04 // 1192 GS6.1.8_04 // 1193 GS6.1.8_02 // 1194

GS6.1.8_03 // 1195 GS6.1.7_02 // 1196 GS6.1.7_03 // 1197 PM_EL_05 // 1198

VERT_VZU_01

// 1201

VERT_VZU_02

// 1202

VERT_VZU_03

// 1203

VERT_DOS_02

// 1207

VERT_VKB_01T

// 1210

VERT_VKB_01

// 1212

VERT_VKB_02

// 1213

VERT_VKB_02.1

// 1214


414 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

VERT_VKB_03

// 1215

VERT_VKB_03.1

// 1216

VERT_VKB_04

// 1217

VERT_VKB_04.1

// 1218

VERT_VKB_05

// 1219

VERT_VKB_05.1

// 1220

VERT_VPB_03

// 1221

VERT_VPB_04

// 1222

VERT_VPB_05

// 1223

VERT_VPB_06

// 1224

VERT_VPB_07

// 1225

VERT_VPB_08

// 1226

VERT_VPB_09

// 1227

VERT_VPB_10

// 1228

VERT_VPK_001

// 1231

VERT_VPK_002

// 1232

VERT_VPK_003

// 1233

AG_02

// 1235

VERT_VDR

// 1239

VERT_VDR_02

// 1240


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 415

VERT_VDR_03

// 1241

VERT_VDR_04

// 1242

VERT_VDR_05

// 1243

VERT_VDR_06

// 1244

VERT_VDR_10

// 1245

VERT_VDR_12

// 1246

VERT_VDR_14

// 1247

VERT_VDR_ZUB_01

// 1248

VERT_VDR_ZUB_02

// 1249

VERT_VDR_ZUB_03

// 1250

VE_DE_01

// 1251

VE_DE_02

// 1252

VE_DE_03

// 1253

VE_DE_04

// 1254

VERT_LEIST_2

// 1261

VERT_LEIST_3

// 1262


416 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

VERT_LEIST_4

// 1263

VERT_LEIST_5

// 1264

VERT_LEIST_6

// 1265

VERT_LEIST_8

// 1266

VERT_LEIST_10

// 1267

VERT_VKB_06

// 1271

VERT_VKB_06.1

// 1272

VERT_VKB_07

// 1273

VERT_VKB_07.1

// 1274

VERT_VKB_08

// 1275

VERT_VKB_08.1

// 1276

VERT_VKB_09

// 1277

VERT_VKB_09.1

// 1278

VERT_VKB_10

// 1279

VERT_VKB_10.1

// 1280

• The following new symbols have been added to the HYD1ESS and

HYD2ESS symbol libraries:

GS7.1.7_04 // 212 V11.5.4_12 // 213 GS7.5.1_02 // 214 GS7.1.8_02 // 217


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 417

F15.1_07 // 219 AG10.1.1_03 // 307 AG10.1.1_02 // 308 AG10.5_02 // 326

Z14.1.2_17

// 371

Z14.1.3_17

// 372

V11.5.4.6_01

// 664

GSVA8.2xx_17

// 665

Z_ZUB_36 // 673 Z_ZUB_37 // 674 Z_ZUB_38 // 675 Z_ZUB_39 // 676

Z_ZUB_40 // 677 Z_ZUB_41 // 678 SV_006 // 681 SV_007 // 682

SV_008 // 683 SV_009 // 684 SV_010 // 685 SV_011 // 686

SV_012 // 687 SV_013 // 688 SV_014 // 689 SV_015 // 690


418 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

SV_016 // 691 SV_017 // 692 V7.1.5.3_03 // 695 V_BT_062 // 849

V_BT_063 // 850 V_BT_064 // 851 V_BT_065 // 852 AG10.1.2_04 // 856

V_BT_057 // 857 V_BT_056 // 859 V11.5.3_07 // 860 V_BT_069 // 869

V_BT_070 // 870 V_BT_049 // 890 V_BT_050 // 891 V_BT_051 // 892

V_BT_052 // 893 Z14.1.2_08_1 // 897 Z14.1.2_09_1 // 898 Z14.1.3_08_1 // 899

Z14.1.3_09_1 // 900 V7.1.2.43_51 // 939 SPIST_01 // 1090 SRLT_01 // 1091


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 419

SRLT_02 // 1092 SRLT_03 // 1093 SRLT_04 // 1094 SRLT_05 // 1095


SRLT_10

// 1100

VERT_VKB_07.1

// 1274

VERT_VKB_08

// 1275

EA_BT_44

// 1309

EA_BT_42 // 1310 EA_18 // 1311 EA_19 // 1312 EA_20 // 1313

EA_BT_43 // 1314 EA9.1.4_02 // 1321 EA9.1.4_03 // 1322 EA9.1.4_04 // 1323

EA_21

// 1324

EA_DS_P_ANA

_3x3M // 1331

EA_DS_P_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1332

EA_DS_P_EL

_3x3M // 1333


420 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

EA_DS_G_ANA

_3x3M // 1334

EA_DS_G_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1335

EA_DS_G_EL

_3x3M // 1336

EA_DS_F_ANA

_3x3M // 1337

EA_DS_F_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1338

EA_DS_F_EL

_3x3M // 1339

EA_DS_L_ANA

_3x3M // 1340

EA_DS_L_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1341

EA_DS_L_EL

_3x3M // 1342

EA_DS_S_ANA

_3x3M // 1343

EA_DS_S_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1344

EA_DS_S_EL

_3x3M // 1345

EA_DS_T_ANA

_3x3M // 1346

EA_DS_T_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1347

EA_DS_T_EL

_3x3M // 1348

EA_DS_W_ANA

_3x3M // 1349

EA_DS_W_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1350

EA_DS_W_EL

_3x3M // 1351

EA_Z_G_ANA

_3x3M // 1364

EA_Z_G_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1365


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 421

EA_Z_G_EL_3x3M

// 1366

EA_Z_T_ANA_3x3M

// 1376

EA_Z_T_DIGIT_3x3M

// 1377

EA_Z_T_EL_3x3M

// 1378

EA_G_ANA_3x3M

// 1394

EA_G_DIGIT_3x3M

// 1395

EA_G_EL_3x3M

// 1396

EA_T_ANA_3x3M

// 1406

EA_T_DIGIT_3x3M

// 1407

EA_T_EL_3x3M

// 1408

• The following new symbols have been added to the PNE1ESS symbol

library:

GS7.1.7_04 // 212 V11.5.4_12 // 213 GS7.5.1_02 // 214 F15.3.1_03 // 215

F15.3.1_04 // 216 GS7.1.8_02 // 217 F15.1_06 // 218 PM13.5.24 // 261


422 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

AG10.1.1_03 // 307 AG10.1.1_02 // 308 AG10.5_02 // 326 Z14.1.2_17 // 371

Z14.1.3_17 // 372 V_BT_026 // 461 V_BT_019_X2 // 575 V_BT_046_X // 576

V_BT_047_X // 577 V7.1.2_33_08 // 657 Z_ZUB_36 // 673 Z_ZUB_37 // 674

Z_ZUB_38 // 675 Z_ZUB_39 // 676 Z_ZUB_40 // 677 Z_ZUB_41 // 678

SV_006 // 681 SV_007 // 682 SV_008 // 683 SV_009 // 684

SV_010 // 685 SV_011 // 686 SV_012 // 687 SV_013 // 688


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 423

SV_014 // 689 SV_015 // 690 SV_016 // 691 SV_017 // 692

V_BT_062 // 849 V_BT_063 // 850 V_BT_069 // 869 V_BT_070 // 870

SPIST_01 // 1090 SRLT_01 // 1091 SRLT_02 // 1092 SRLT_03 // 1093


SRLT_08

// 1098

SRLT_09

// 1099

SRLT_10

// 1100

VERT_VKB_07.1

// 1274

VERT_VKB_08

// 1275

EA_BT_44

// 1309

EA_BT_42

// 1310

EA_18

// 1311


424 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

EA_19 // 1312 EA_20 // 1313 EA_BT_43 // 1314 EA9.1.4_02 // 1321

EA9.1.4_03

// 1322

EA9.1.4_04

// 1323

EA_21

// 1324

EA_DS_P_ANA_3x3M

// 1331

EA_DS_P_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1332

EA_DS_P_EL

_3x3M // 1333

EA_DS_G_ANA

_3x3M // 1334

EA_DS_G_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1335

EA_DS_G_EL

_3x3M // 1336

EA_DS_F_ANA

_3x3M // 1337

EA_DS_F_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1338

EA_DS_F_EL

_3x3M // 1339

EA_DS_L_ANA

_3x3M // 1340

EA_DS_L_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1341

EA_DS_L_EL

_3x3M // 1342

EA_DS_S_ANA

_3x3M // 1343


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 425

EA_DS_S_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1344

EA_DS_S_EL

_3x3M // 1345

EA_DS_T_ANA

_3x3M // 1346

EA_DS_T_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1347

EA_DS_T_EL

_3x3M // 1348

EA_DS_W_ANA

_3x3M // 1349

EA_DS_W_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1350

EA_DS_W_EL

_3x3M // 1351

EA_Z_G_ANA

_3x3M // 1364

EA_Z_G_DIGIT

_3x3M // 1365

EA_Z_G_EL_3x3M

// 1366

EA_Z_T_ANA_3x3M

// 1376

EA_Z_T_DIGIT_3x3

M // 1377

EA_Z_T_EL_3x3M //

1378

EA_G_ANA_3x3M //

1394

EA_G_DIGIT_3x3M

// 1395

EA_G_EL_3x3M

// 1396

EA_T_ANA_3x3M

// 1406

EA_T_DIGIT_3x3M

// 1407

EA_T_EL_3x3M

// 1408


426 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• In the PPE_SYM symbol library, the function definition for the symbol

B73 // 73 ("Symbol name" // "Symbol number") has been changed

from "Analog temperature sensor, 2 connection points" to "Analog

sensor, general, 2 connection points".

Special symbol library

• A new symbol for net definition points has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:

NDP // 312 // Net definition point (triangle)

NDP

• A new symbol for potential definition points has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:

PDP2 // 313 // Potential definition point (triangle)

PDP2


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 427

• A new symbol has been created for placeholder objects in the SPECIAL symbol library:

PLHO // 323 // Placeholder object

PLHO

• A new symbol for insulated wire terminations has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:

NCI // 100 // Wire termination, insulated

NCI

• A new symbol for wire terminations that are not connected has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:

NC // 101 // Wire termination, not connected

NC


428 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

• A new symbol for deleted objects has been created in the SPECIAL

symbol library:

DO // 300 // Deleted object

DO

• A new symbol for outline definition points of outlines of type "Extrusion" has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:

ODP // 290 // Outline definition points for outlines

of type extrusion

ODP

• A new symbol for connection definition points of type "Coiled pipe" has been created in the SPECIAL symbol library:

CDPST // 472 // VDP, Coiled pipe

CDPST


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 429

• The following new device connection points are available in the SPECIAL symbol library:

DCFP2OL2 // 59 DCPP3 // 408 DCPPJIC // 409 DCPPOJIC // 410

DCPPO // 411

• In addition, the following symbols for complex devices have been added to the SPECIAL symbol library:

D2DCP // 412 D3DCP // 413 D4DCP // 414 D2DCPFEM // 415

D3DCPFEM

// 416

D4DCPFEM

// 417

D2DCPJICFEM

// 418

D3DCPJICFEM

// 419


430 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

D4DCPJICFEM // 420 D2DCPM // 421 D3DCPM // 422 D4DCPM // 423

D2DCPJICM // 424 D3DCPJICM // 425 D4DCPJICM // 426 D2DCPNG // 427

D3DCPNG // 428 D4DCPNG // 429 D2DCPP3 // 430 D3DCPP3 // 431

D4DCPP3 // 432 D2DCPPJIC // 433 D3DCPPJIC // 434 D4DCPPJIC // 435

D2DCPPO // 436 D3DCPPO // 437 D4DCPPO // 438 D2DCPPOJIC // 439


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 431

D3DCPPOJIC // 440 D4DCPPOJIC // 441 S2DCP // 442 S3DCP // 443

S4DCP // 444 S2DCPFEM // 445 S3DCPFEM // 446 S4DCPFEM // 447

S2DCPJICFEM

// 448

S3DCPJICFEM

// 449

S4DCPJICFEM

// 450

S2DCPM

// 451

S3DCPM // 452 S4DCPM // 453 S2DCPJICM // 454 S3DCPJICM // 455

S4DCPJICM // 456 S2DCPNG // 457 S3DCPNG // 458 S4DCPNG // 459

S2DCPP3 // 460 S3DCPP3 // 461 S4DCPP3 // 462 S2DCPPJIC // 463

S3DCPPJIC // 464 S4DCPPJIC // 465 S2DCPPO // 466 S3DCPPO // 467


432 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

S4DCPPO // 468 S2DCPPOJIC // 469 S3DCPPOJIC // 470 S4DCPPOJIC // 471

• In the SPECIAL symbol library, the width of several symbols for PCT

loops and PCT loop functions has been reduced to 10 mm. This

relates to the following symbols:

– PID6 // 346 // PCT loop – Process computer – On-site – PID7 // 347 // PCT loop – Process computer – Measuring

station – PID8 // 348 // PCT loop – Process computer – Control

room – PID15 // 355 // PCT loop function - Process computer -

On-site – PID16 // 356 // PCT loop function - Process computer -

Measuring station – PID17 // 357 // PCT loop function - Process computer -

Control room.

General

• In the IEC_symbol, NFPA_symbol, GOST_symbol, and GB_symbol

symbol libraries, the appearance of contactor contact image symbol

variants has been changed in several symbols (change-over contacts and contacts with delay). This relates to symbols with the number 3,

4, 5, 6, 270, 1011, 1012, 1013, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062,

1063, 1106, 1107, 1126, 1127, 1128, 1129, 1130, 1131, 1132, and

1133.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 433

Master Data: Function Definition Library

Numerous new function definitions have been added to the function defi-

nition library. For further information on the properties, the basic symbol,

etc. of the function definitions listed below in the Function definitions

dialog, navigate to the location indicated in the Selection field.

Trade: General

• The following new function definitions have been added under General // General special functions // Connection //

Connection definitions:

– Internal jumper.

Trade: Electrical engineering

• The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // Electrical engineering

special function // Device connection point to the groups

listed below:

"Device connection point" group:

– N device connection point – SH device connection point.

"Device connection point, 2 connection points" group:

– N device connection point, 2 connection points – PE device connection point, 2 connection points – SH device connection point, 2 connection points.

• The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // Terminals and plugs //

Terminal to the groups listed below:

"Terminal, variable" group:

– Terminal, variable – N terminal, variable – PE terminal, variable – SH terminal, variable.


434 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

"Terminals with saddle jumper, 1 connection point" group:

– General terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point – Terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point – N terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point – PE terminal with rail contact, 1 connection point – SH terminal with saddle jumper, 1 connection point.

"Terminals with saddle jumper, 2 connection points" group:

– General terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points – Terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points – N terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points – PE terminal with rail contact, 2 connection points – SH terminal with saddle jumper, 2 connection points.








EPLAN NEWS 2.0 435



"Terminals, 1 connection point" group:

– General terminal, 1 connection point – Terminal, 1 connection point – N terminal, 1 connection point – PE terminal, 1 connection point – SH terminal, 1 connection point.

"Terminals, 2 connection points" group:

– General terminal, 2 connection points – Terminal, 2 connection points – N terminal, 2 connection points – PE terminal, 2 connection points – SH terminal, 2 connection points.






436 EPLAN NEWS 2.0





• The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // PLC / bus // PLC connection

point // PLC connection point, I / O, 1 connection

point:

– PLC connection point, multifunction.

• The following new function definitions have been added under Electrical engineering // Coils, Contacts and protec-

tive circuits // Coil // Coil, 2 Connection points:

– Coil, auxiliary relay.

The "Coil" function definition was renamed "Coil, power circuit

breaker".

Master Data: Plot Frames

GOST standard

• The following new plot frames have been created:

– GOST_first_page_scheme_A2_sl.fn1

– GOST_next_page_scheme_A2_sl.fn1.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 437

Master Data: Settings for Messages and Check Runs

• Enhanced program functionality means that two check run messages

in the "Cable" message class are now redundant. For this reason, the

following message numbers have been removed:

Number: Message text:

003016 Identical shield symbols affect identical and differing

connections.

003017 Identical shield symbols affect differing connections.

Master Data: Identifiers

Utilities > Master data > Identifier

• In the Suggested identifiers dialog, you can now sort the tables

shown alphabetically by either the Trade, Category, Group, or Func-

tion definition column, in ascending or descending order. To do so,

double-click on the column.

• In addition, you can assign identifiers for mechanics items in this

dialog. For this purpose, additional lines with function definitions from

the "Mechanics" trade have been added to the Suggested identifiers

dialog. Identifiers can be saved for these function definitions in the

IEC 61346 and NFPA columns as well as for user-defined identifier

sets.

Note:

After each change, the changed identifier sets must be exported. To

do this, select the columns with the changed identifier sets and select

Popup menu > Export. If you receive a new function definition library in

an update, you need to import your exported identifier sets into the new

program version and add the new function definitions.


438 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Master Data: Projects and Templates

• A new "Higher-level function number" page structure has been added

to sample projects and templates.

• In the Num_bas001.zw9 and Num_tpl001.ept templates, the Num-

bering format setting when inserting symbols has changed from

"Identifier + page (three-digit) + column" to "Identifier + counter and

device connection points".

Master Data: Workspace

View > Workspace

• In the Workspace dialog, the "EPLAN PPE" scheme has been

revised. The Documentation dialog has now been replaced by

Graphical preview.

Master Data: Schemes

• Two new filter schemes have been created for the terminal strips

navigator:

– Main terminals – Auxiliary terminals.

• A new filter scheme has been made available in the PLC navigator:

– Address-oriented.

• The new "UnityPro - Txt" scheme, with PLC-specific formats for

Schneider Electric's "Unity Pro" software, is now available for the

PLC-specific settings field in the Settings: PLCdialog.

• The following filter scheme has been created for the field-based filter

of parts management:

– Accessories.

Other New Features and Information

EPLAN NEWS 2.0 439


Customer Queries and Messages

Note:

Please note that the following EPLAN service is not possible in all

countries.

A large number of your queries and wishes have contributed to the new

version of the EPLAN platform. Please note that not all queries can be

listed within the scope of this document. You can, however, query the

status of your message ("issue") with us at any time.

Login to EPLAN Support on the Internet (software service customers

only) and, within our support area, click the Login Call-Tracking hyperlink

under Call tracking. The "EPLAN Support Call Tracking" page will now

open in your browser.


440 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

You need the following information to log on here:

• User name (= your last name)

• The first five digits of your Software service number.

After filling out the form, confirm this information by clicking [Login].

In the Issue No. field on the next page, enter the issue number that you

were given by support and click [Search].


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 441

You will be redirected to your message. This will show you an overview

of your support query.


442 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Validation Code

To use this new version of EPLAN, you need a new validation code. This

is provided on the delivery note sent with your storage medium. In addi-

tion, you can now have the option of retrieving the validation code via the

internet (see the following section).

Retrieving the validation code online

EPLAN now enables you to carry out the final installation step quickly

and easily by allowing you to retrieve the validation code required for

licensing via the internet. After the required data have been transmitted,

the validation code is automatically copied into the license dialog.

Benefit: Retrieving the validation code via the internet, makes enter-

ing the validation code quicker and easier and you are less

likely to make mistakes.

Note:

Please note that you must be connected to the internet to download

the validation code. You cannot retrieve a validation code for network

licenses or licenses without a dongle. The Enter validation code dialog has been enhanced to allow you the

option of retrieving the validation code online.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 443

This dialog opens when you start the application for the first time after

installation. Click the new [Retrieve online] button.

The Company name and Serial number are automatically entered into

the open Set validation code online dialog. This data is needed to re-

trieve the validation code successfully.

Up-to-date information

If you would like to receive information in the future (such as our eNews-

letter), please select the I would like to receive further information

check box. EPLAN will then save your personal details (Name, Phone,

E-mail address, etc.).

Internet settings

The settings for the existing internet connection are adopted by default.

You can also use a proxy server as a network component via the

[Settings] button and the dialog that then opens. In this case, enter the

relevant data in the Address, Port fields, etc. Contact your administrator

for the relevant settings.

Returning the validation code

Click [Send] to send the encoded data to EPLAN. If your details are

already held by EPLAN and are valid, a validation code is created and

sent to the license dialog. Then start the application by clicking [OK].


444 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Installation and Subsequent Operation Steps

Administrator:

As the administrator, you must read the sections below on installation,

software and hardware requirements before working with the new

version.

Warning:

Data of previous versions generated with the EPLAN platform can still be

used in the latest version. However, data edited in the current version

may not always be compatible with previous versions – due to extended

functionalities and parameters. We expressly advise you not to work with

mixed data originating from different versions.

In the installation wizard directory settings, in place of the previous

Database directory field, you will now find two new input fields, EPLAN

original master data and System master data. In addition to this

change, the installation behavior has also changed.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 445

Benefit: Because the original master data is not overwritten when

installing an update, the system can be completely reset to

the factory settings. The original master data can be copied

to the relevant company directories selectively and at any

time.

Original EPLAN master data

For original EPLAN master data (reference master data and examples),

the installation wizard creates version-dependent directories (e.g. for forms <Directory for Original EPLAN Master Data>\<Version

Number>\Forms\EPLAN).

System master data

The directories for system master data are version-independent. When

installing for the first time or installing EPLAN 2.0 as another EPLAN

version, this means the following:

• Initial installation

When installing for the first time, the directories for the system master

data are created when the program is started for the first time. A

directory with the company code specified in the installation (e.g. <Directory for System Master Data>\Forms\<Company Code>)

is then created for each master data type (e.g. forms) below the

relevant master data directory. The master data from the directories

for the original EPLAN master data is copied into this directory.

• Installation of another EPLAN version

If the directory for the system master data and the company code are

unchanged during the installation, the previous system master data

remains unchanged. The new master data will for now only be in-

stalled in the new version-dependent directory for the original EPLAN

master data.


446 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Notes:

• To update your company-specific master data in this case, perform a

synchronization of the system master data (see page 449).

• If you install EPLAN 2.0 as another version of EPLAN, a dialog opens

when you start the program for the first time in which you can opt to

use the settings of the previous version. For more information on this,

see section "Automatically importing the settings of the previous

version" on page 448.

Directory structure after installation

The precise appearance of the directory structure for the installed data

depends on the operating system used and the setting you have spe-

cified for the application in the installation wizard. If you selected the

Anyone who uses this computer option, the system master data is

stored in a public folder. If you select the Only for me option, then this

data is stored in the user-specific area of the user currently logged on.

Note:

Please note that this setting cannot be subsequently changed. Windows XP

Under the Windows XP operating system, the original and the system

master data are stored in the following directory by default:

• Anyone who uses this computer: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\EPLAN\<Program Variants>

• Only for me: C:\Documents and Settings\<Your User Name>\Application

Data\EPLAN\<Program Variants>


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 447

Example:

Following the installation of EPLAN Electric P8 with the default settings,

the directory structure for the forms described above would look some-

thing like this:

Directory for original EPLAN master data:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\

EPLAN\EPLAN Electric P8\2.0.5\Forms\EPLAN

Directory for system master data:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\

EPLAN\EPLAN Electric P8\Forms\MyCompanyCode

Note:

Please note that to see the application data under Windows XP, you

must make the following settings in Windows Explorer: Select Tools >

Folder options. Open the View tab and in the Advanced settings field

look for the Hidden files and folders folder. Select the Show hidden files and folders option here. The Application Data folder will now be

visible. Windows Vista and Windows 7

Under the Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems, the original

EPLAN master data is stored in the following directory by default:

• Anyone who uses this computer: C:\ProgramData\EPLAN\<Program Variants>\<Version

Number>

• Only for me: C:\ProgramData\<Your User Name>\EPLAN\<Program

Variants>\<Version Number>


448 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Under the Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems, the system

master data is stored in the following directory by default:

• Anyone who uses this computer: C:\Users\Public\EPLAN

• Only for me: C:\Users\<Your user name>\EPLAN

Note:

To see the protected program directory ProgramData, you must enter

%ProgramData% in the Windows Explorer address bar.

Automatically importing the settings of the previous version

If you are installing the current EPLAN version in addition to an existing

version, you now have the opportunity to automatically apply the settings

of the previous version. The first time you start the program, the Import

settings dialog is displayed for this purpose.

Benefit: It is no longer necessary to manually import and export the

various setting ranges. After installation, you can immediately

continue working with your familiar user settings. In this dialog the check boxes of the User, Workstation, and Company

settings areas are selected by default. [OK] imports the settings of these

areas to the current version, and generates the corresponding settings

databases. In addition to this, the settings for Property arrangement,

Dialog memory, Column configuration, and External programs are

also applied.

Note:

If the new EPLAN version is started via the W3u.EXE file using the

/Quiet parameter, the Import settings dialog is suppressed. In a case

like this, the settings are not applied.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 449

Synchronization with original EPLAN master data

When installing another EPLAN version with unchanged directory set-

tings, the new master data is for the moment only installed in the original

EPLAN master data directories. For example, the original forms are co-pied to a directory with the designation EPLAN that can be found below

the new version-dependent directory for the original EPLAN master data (e.g. <Directory for Original EPLAN Master Data>\<Version

Number>\Forms\EPLAN).

To use the new master data, you must first synchronize the system

master data. To do so, copy the original EPLAN master data into your company-specific directory (e.g. <Directory for System Master

Data>\Forms\<Company Code>). Create the company-specific directo-

ries, which will be used by default, in the Company code field during

installation.

Benefit: The option of updating master data means you are less likely

to make mistakes when transferring data. Errors that previ-

ously arose when copying data are avoided and data can be

synchronized more quickly.

Synchronizing system master data

Synchronization of the system master data starts in the following situa-

tions:

• When the program is first started and if you have installed a new

EPLAN version in addition to an existing version.

• When the program is first started and if you later install an add-on with

master data.

• When you open the dialog for synchronizing system master data via

the Utilities > Master data > Synchronize system master data

menu path.


450 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

In the first two cases, the program displays a prompt asking you whether

synchronization should take place immediately. You have the following

options in this dialog:

• If you select [User-defined], the master data is loaded, and the

Master data synchronization - system master data dialog opens.

You can then use this dialog to transfer specific EPLAN original

master data to specific targets.

• If you select [Yes], the system master data will be synchronized

automatically. Old system master data will be overwritten and non-

existent system master data added.

• If you select [No], you can resume your work without synchronizing.

Recommended data backup

A security warning is displayed at the same time as the Master data

synchronization - system master data dialog opens. This warning

reminds you that changes due to synchronization cannot be undone and

recommends that you back up your data beforehand.

Click [No] to exit master data synchronization and switch to data backup.

Click [Yes] to keep the dialog for master data synchronization open and

synchronize data without backing up your data beforehand.

Dialog for synchronizing system master data

Specify which master data is to be updated in your company-specific

directories in the Master data synchronization - system master data

dialog.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 451

Directories:

You can select various directories for master data synchronization from

this drop-down list.

To be able to do this, you must first have saved these directory settings

as a scheme. This may be useful if you are using different master data

directories for different companies / customers. Click [...] to open the

Settings: Directories dialog and create a new scheme for the directo-

ries.

Source:

Select the source for the synchronization from this drop-down list. The

list contains all the installed program variants and add-ons, such as

"EPLAN Electric P8", "EPLAN Fluid Addon", and "EPLAN PPE add-on".

System master data / EPLAN master data:

The master data in the company-specific directories are displayed in the

table on the left. The original EPLAN master data is listed in the table on

the right. Click on the Status, Name, Type, or Modification date column

to sort the entries in the tables.


452 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Filter:

Use this drop-down list to set the dialog for synchronizing the master

data so that only specific data is displayed. The following options are

available:

• Show differences: When you select this filter, only master data that

exists both in the EPLAN master data for the selected source and in

the system master data in the specified directories and that has the

status "Older" or "Newer" is displayed.

• System master data (older): When you select this filter, only master

data that is older than the corresponding EPLAN master data is

displayed in the System master data list.

• EPLAN master data (older): When you select this filter, only master

data that is older than the corresponding system master data is

displayed in the EPLAN master data list.

• Extensions: When you select this filter, only master data that does

not yet exist in the system master data ("Only in EPLAN master data"

status) is displayed in the EPLAN master data list.

• System master data (older) and extensions: Select this filter to

display both system master data that is older than the corresponding

EPLAN master data, and the EPLAN master data that does not yet

exist in the system master data ("Only in EPLAN master data" status).

Select the Active check box to use the selected filter.

Synchronizing data

To transfer specific original EPLAN master data to a specific target, se-

lect the data in the EPLAN master data table on the right and click

(Move to the left).

A warning prompt is displayed to ensure you do not accidentally replace

a newer version of a list entry in your system master data with an older

one and you still have the option of canceling the update.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 453

To update the system master data globally, use the menu items available

below the [Update] button:

• System master data (older):

Replaces all outdated system master data with the latest EPLAN

master data.

• Extensions:

Adds data that was previously only available in the EPLAN master

data to the system master data.

• System master data (older) and extensions:

Replaces all outdated system master data with newer EPLAN master

data and adds data that are not yet available in the system master

data.

Synchronizing project master data

To be able to use the updated system master data in a specific project,

you must then synchronize the project master data for this project with

the system master data.

When the Synchronize project master data when opening project set-

ting is enabled, the Project master data prompt is displayed whenever

you open an "outdated" project. This dialog now has the [User-defined]

button as well which is similar to the prompt for synchronizing system

master data. Use this button to open the dialog for synchronizing project

master data and to transfer specific master data to specific targets. Click

[Yes] to update the project master data automatically as previously.

If you wish to synchronize the project master data later, click [No]. The

menu items for this can be found under Utilities > Master data.


454 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Software Requirements and Approvals

General requirements

The Microsoft .NET framework 3.5 SP1 is required to operate the EPLAN

platform. Further information and the latest version of .NET framework

are available for download from the Microsoft website.

EPLAN recommends that a 64 bit Windows operating system is used.

The EPLAN platform is approved for the following operating systems and

applications:

Client operating systems

• Windows XP Professional SP3 (32 bit)

• Windows Vista SP2 Enterprise (32 or 64 bit)

• Windows Vista SP2 Business N (32 or 64 bit)

• Windows Vista SP2 Ultimate (32 or 64 bit)

• Windows 7 Professional (32 or 64 bit)

• Windows 7 Enterprise (32 or 64 bit)

• Windows 7 Ultimate (32 or 64 bit).

Note:

Further information on these operating systems is available on the

Microsoft website.

Server operating systems

• Windows Server 2003 SP2 (with all hotfixes and updates)

• Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32 or 64 bit)

• Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit).


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 455

Notes:

• Please note that the EPLAN platform may not be installed on servers

that run Back Office products from Microsoft (e.g. proxy servers, SQL,

Exchange, Active Directory) or other suppliers (e.g. Lotus Notes,

Linux servers, Novell servers).

• Please also bear in mind that the EPLAN License Manager is not

approved for use with virtual operating systems.

EPLAN Mechatronic Integration

EPLAN EMI is approved for the following Inventor products:

• AutoCAD Inventor Professional Suite 2010

• AutoCAD Inventor Routed Systems Suite 2010

• AutoCAD Inventor Professional Suite 2011

• AutoCAD Inventor Routed Systems Suite 2011.

Note:

Please also note the relevant hardware requirements when installing

these Inventor products.

Database systems for parts management / selection

• Microsoft SQL Server 2005 SP2 Express / Workgroup / Standard or

Enterprise Edition

• Microsoft SQL-Server 2008.

The EPLAN platform supports these Microsoft SQL servers for all client

and server operating systems approved by us.

Note:

Other database systems from other manufacturers are not currently

supported.


456 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

Microsoft Office Excel versions

• Microsoft Office Excel 2003 SP2 and SP3

• Microsoft Office Excel 2007 and Excel 2007 SP1.

Internet browsers for the EPLAN Data Portal

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.

Unsupported operating systems

Windows 2000 Professional

The EPLAN platform no longer supports the Windows 2000 Professional

operating system that is no longer supported by Microsoft.

Windows 2000 Server

The EPLAN platform no longer supports the Windows 2000 Server

operating system that is no longer supported by Microsoft. Microsoft has

ceased official support for this operating system.

Note:

Further information on the life cycle of operating systems is available on

the Microsoft website.

EPLAN software no longer supported

Remote Dongle Server 4.3

We are offering a new version of our EPLAN License Manager for the

management of network licenses alongside the new EPLAN platform.

For this reason, Remote Dongle Server 4.3 is no longer supported.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 457

Other software no longer supported

AutoCAD 2006

EPLAN PPE now has a new P&ID AutoCAD interface that supports

the current versions of AutoCAD 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010. For this

reason, EPLAN no longer supports the AutoCAD 2006 software from

Autodesk.

Hardware Requirements

Workstation hardware requirements

The computer platform is a PC with an Intel Pentium 4 or compatible

processor.

Notes:

• The introduction of the enhanced command set SSE2 (Streaming

SIMD Extensions 2) started with the Intel Pentium 4 in 2001. In the

case of AMD processors, this enhancement was introduced with the

Athlon 64 in 2005. If you use a computer system from Intel, the CPU

should be restored to 2002. In the case of AMD processors, the CPU

should be newer than 2005.

• If you are using a processor that dates to before 2005, check whether

this processor supports SSE2 command sets. The "CPU-Z" program

allows you to do this. This program can be downloaded free of charge

from http://www.cpuid.com/.

It is preferable to choose a high speed dual-core computer rather than a

quad-core computer at the same price (i.e. a slower machine), as you

will get better performance from the EPLAN platform.

A high speed quad-core processor (which is therefore slightly more

expensive) is optimal since it also offers further potential for the future.


458 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

We advise against choosing a single-core computer (which also includes

a Pentium 4 with its 2 virtual cores).

Recommended workstation configuration

Processor: Comparable to an Intel Pentium D at 3 GHz or

comparable to an Intel Core 2 Duo at 2.4 GHz

RAM: 4 GB

Hard disk: 160 GB

Monitor / graphics

resolution:

2-screen solution 21" or 16:10 graphics system

with a resolution of 1680 x 1050

3D display: Graphics card from ATI or Nvidia with the latest

OpenGL driver

Minimum net requirements

As stated in the software requirements and performance, only operate

the server with a Microsoft Windows operating system.

Net transfer rate of the server: 1 Gbits/s

Net transfer rate of the client computer: 100 Mbits/s

Recommended latency period: < 1 ms

Minimum multi-user requirements

Please contact the EPLAN Support for further information about the

minimum requirements for multi-user operation. We can advise you

individually on the basis of your requirements.


EPLAN NEWS 2.0 459


460 EPLAN NEWS 2.0

News EPLAN 20 en US - Rittbuleplan.rittbul.bg/fileadmin/dateien-BG/NEWS/News_EPLAN_20_en_US.… ·...

Documents

Transcript of News EPLAN 20 en US - Rittbuleplan.rittbul.bg/fileadmin/dateien-BG/NEWS/News_EPLAN_20_en_US.… ·...